JP6823017B2 - Game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine.

As a game machine, when a game medium such as a game ball is launched into a game area by a launching device, the game medium wins a prize in a winning area such as a winning opening provided in the game area, and an execution condition (starting condition) is satisfied. Pachinko that enhances the interest of the game by a so-called variable display game in which multiple types of identification information (hereinafter referred to as display symbols) are variably displayed on a variable display device and whether or not to give a predetermined game value is determined based on the display result. There is a game machine. In such a pachinko game machine, when the stop symbol mode when the variable display of the display symbol in the variable display game is completely stopped becomes the specific display mode, the player is in an advantageous state (big hit game state). Then, before the display result is derived and displayed on the variable display device, various types of advance notice effects are executed to expect the player to have the display result in a specific display mode.

As such a game machine, a variable display effect such as a pseudo-ream in which the variable display is temporarily stopped and then changed (re-variated) again, or a period until the variable display is temporarily stopped and a temporary stop rather than the variable display effect of the pseudo-ream. There is a game machine that can execute a variable display effect for a short period of time. Then, in a game machine that performs such a variable display effect, there is a game machine that is expected to be a big hit as the number of re-variations increases (for example, Patent Document 1).

JP-A-2010-253079

However, in the game machine described in Patent Document 1, the player's interest is concentrated on the number of re-variations, and the production becomes monotonous, which may reduce the interest in the game.

The present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine capable of preventing a deterioration in the interest of a game.

(A) In order to achieve the above object, the gaming machine according to the present invention is
It is a game machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player.
A special effect executing means for executing a special effect that repeats a predetermined mode a predetermined number of times,
A predetermined effect executing means capable of executing a predetermined effect during the execution of the special effect is provided.
When the predetermined effect is not executed by the predetermined effect executing means, the case where the predetermined mode is repeated a second time more than the first time is more than the case where the predetermined mode is repeated the first time as the special effect. Highly controlled to favorable conditions,
A case where the predetermined effect is executed by the predetermined effect executing means before the predetermined mode is repeated the first time, rather than a case where the predetermined effect is not executed by the predetermined effect executing means and the predetermined mode is repeated the second time. Is more likely to be controlled to the advantageous state,
The predetermined aspect is performed after the predetermined aspect is repeated the first number of times and before the predetermined effect is repeated the second number of times, as compared with the case where the predetermined effect is executed by the predetermined effect executing means by repeating the predetermined aspect the first number of times. When the predetermined effect is executed by the effect executing means, the ratio of being controlled to the advantageous state is higher.
further,
It is equipped with a specific display execution means that can execute a specific display that starts the display when the variable display starts and ends the display when the variable display ends.
The specific display execution means is
A specific display can be displayed in a manner that can suggest a variable display period.
When the specific display is displayed in a mode that can suggest a variable display period, it is possible to change the mode of the specific display according to the degree of expectation controlled by the advantageous state.
It is characterized by that.
(1) In order to achieve the above purpose, other game machines
A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player.
A special effect executing means (such as an effect control CPU 120 that performs a special variation) that executes a special effect that repeats a predetermined mode a predetermined number of times, and
A predetermined effect executing means (such as an effect control CPU 120 that executes a predetermined effect) capable of executing a predetermined effect during execution of the special effect is provided.
When the predetermined effect is not executed by the predetermined effect executing means, it is higher when the predetermined mode is repeated a second time more than the first time than when the predetermined mode is repeated the first time as the special effect. The ratio is controlled to the advantageous state (for example, the higher the number of executions of the special fluctuation, the higher the expectation).
A case where the predetermined effect is executed by the predetermined effect executing means before the predetermined mode is repeated the first time, rather than a case where the predetermined effect is not executed by the predetermined effect executing means and the predetermined mode is repeated the second time. Is controlled to the advantageous state at a higher rate (for example, when the predetermined effect is executed at the time of the special variation before 12 times, the predetermined effect is not executed and the special variation is performed 12 times. Expectations are higher than in the case),
further,
A special display that starts the display according to the start of the variable display and ends the display according to the end of the variable display (for example, the active display, the display of the sphere display 129IW002b in the active display movement effect, and the specific display in the embodiment. It is provided with a special display executing means capable of executing (sometimes referred to as), and the special display executing means can display the special display in a manner capable of suggesting a variable display period (for example, a spherical display by an active display movement effect). It is suggested that the 129IW002b is located at the start position at the start of the variable display and at the end position at the end of the variable display. See FIG. 10-4.), The variable display period is special in a suggestable manner. While displaying the display, it is possible to change the mode of the special display according to the degree of expectation controlled in an advantageous state (for example, during the execution of the active display movement effect of moving the sphere display 129IW002b). , It is possible to execute an active display change effect that changes the display mode of the spherical display 129IW002b (see FIG. 10-5).
It is characterized by that.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to attract the attention of the player to the execution of the predetermined effect, and it is possible to prevent the deterioration of the game interest. Furthermore, the game entertainment can be improved by performing an appropriate production.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above
At the start of the special effect, the special effect executing means executes an explanatory effect explaining that when the predetermined effect is executed, the expectation of being controlled to the advantageous state is high (for example, executing the explanatory effect). CPU 120 for production control, etc.),
You may do so.

With such a configuration, the purpose of the special effect can be easily recognized.

(3) In the gaming machine according to (1) or (2) above.
Further equipped with a variable display means for performing variable display according to a variable display pattern (for example, an effect control CPU 120 for changing a decorative pattern according to a variable pattern).
The variable display pattern includes a re-variable display pattern that executes a re-variable display a predetermined number of times after temporarily stopping the variable display from the start of the variable display until the display result is derived and displayed. Including a shortened re-variable display pattern in which the period until the temporary stop is shorter than that of the variable display pattern (for example, a pseudo-ream fluctuation pattern and a special fluctuation fluctuation pattern are included).
The special effect executing means executes a special effect in which the revariable display by the shortened revariable display pattern is repeated a predetermined number of times as the predetermined mode (for example, the variation is performed according to the variation pattern of the special variation).
The predetermined effect executing means can execute the predetermined effect during execution of the special effect of repeating the revariable display by the shortened revariable display pattern a predetermined number of times (for example, performing the predetermined effect during the variable display effect of the special variation). ),
You may do so.

With such a configuration, it is possible to pay attention not only to the number of executions but also to the presence or absence of execution of a predetermined effect.

(4) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (3) above.
The predetermined effect executing means executes the predetermined effect of any one of the plurality of types of the predetermined effects at a different ratio depending on the ratio controlled to the advantageous state (for example, "Aspect A" rather than "Aspect A". "Aspect B" has higher expectations, etc.),
You may do so.

With such a configuration, it is possible to pay attention to the type of predetermined effect.

(5) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (4) above.
Further equipped with a variable display means for performing variable display according to a variable display pattern,
The variable display pattern includes a pattern for executing a specific effect suggesting that the special effect will be achieved after the execution of the special effect, and a pattern for controlling the advantageous state as it is after the execution of the special effect (for example, "" Including the fluctuation pattern of "special fluctuation super reach jackpot" and the fluctuation pattern of "special fluctuation jackpot"),
You may do so.

According to such a configuration, there are a plurality of development patterns after the execution of the special effect, and the game entertainment can be improved.

(6) In the gaming machine described in (5) above
The predetermined effect includes a predetermined effect of the first aspect and a predetermined effect of the second aspect different from the first aspect, and when the predetermined effect of the first aspect is executed during the execution of the special effect, If the specific effect is executed after the special effect is executed and the predetermined effect of the second aspect is executed during the execution of the special effect, the advantageous state is controlled as it is after the special effect is executed. For example, in the case of the fluctuation pattern of "special fluctuation super reach jackpot", the predetermined effect of "aspect A" is executed, and in the case of the fluctuation pattern of "special fluctuation jackpot", the predetermined effect of "mode B" is executed. ,
You may do so.

According to such a configuration, there are a plurality of development patterns after the execution of the special production, and the game entertainment can be improved.

(7) In the gaming machine described in (3) above
The special effect executing means can display the number of times the revariable display by the shortened revariable display pattern is repeated as the special effect (for example, a display indicating how many special variations are performed).
You may do so.

According to such a configuration, the number of repetitions can be easily counted, and the game entertainment can be improved.

In addition, the embodiment for carrying out the invention described later includes the inventions according to the following means (12) to (16). Conventionally, a gaming machine has been proposed in which the transition of the content of the effect is shown by a flowchart as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2003-93653. However, since the content of the production is displayed in advance, the player may be dissatisfied with understanding the development, and the interest may be reduced. Therefore, it is desired to propose a game machine that enhances the effect of the effect in the game machine as described in Patent Document 1.

(8) In order to achieve the above object, the gaming machine according to another aspect performs variable display (for example, variable display of a special symbol or decorative symbol), and is in an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player. A controllable gaming machine with a special display (for example, an active display or a sphere display 129IW002b in an active display movement effect) that starts the display when the variable display starts and ends the display when the variable display ends. A special display executing means capable of displaying, sometimes referred to as a specific display in the examples) is provided, and the special display executing means can display the special display in a manner capable of suggesting a variable display period (for example,). , The active display movement effect suggests that the sphere display 129IW002b is moved so that it is located at the start position at the start of the variable display and at the end position at the end of the variable display. See FIG. 10-4.), Variable. When the special display is displayed in a mode that can suggest the display period, it is possible to change the mode of the special display according to the degree of expectation controlled in an advantageous state (for example, move the spherical display 129IW002b). It is possible to execute an active display change effect that changes the display mode of the sphere display 129IW002b during the execution of the active display movement effect. (See FIG. 10-5).
According to such a configuration, the effect of production can be enhanced.

(9) In the game machine of (8) above, the special display executing means displays a special display in a predetermined display area (for example, information display area 129IW001; see FIG. 10-4) in which information related to variable display is displayed. You may do so.
According to such a configuration, the player can easily recognize the variable display period.

(10) In the gaming machines 8) to (9) above, when the special display is displayed, it becomes difficult to visually recognize the information related to the variable display in the predetermined display area (see FIGS. 10-3 and 10-4). You may do so.
With such a configuration, attention can be drawn to the variable display during execution.

(11) In any of the game machines (8) to (10) above, the special display executing means moves and displays the special display during the variable display, and suggests a variable display period depending on the display position of the special display. However, when the special display is moved, the mode of the special display may be changed (see FIG. 10-5).
With such a configuration, the player's attention can be continuously attracted to the moving special display.

(12) In any of the game machines (8) to (11) above, even if the mode of the special display after the change is the same, the mode is changed when the special display is in which display position. Depending on the situation, the degree of expectation controlled by the advantageous state may be different (see FIG. 10-2 (D)).
With such a configuration, it is possible to pay attention to the position where the special display changes.

(13) In any of the game machines (8) to (12) above, when the special display moves, the locus region to which the special display has moved may be displayed in a different manner from that before moving. ..
With such a configuration, it is possible to easily recognize the elapsed period.

In addition, the present invention may have only the invention-specific matters described in the claims of the present invention, and has a configuration other than the invention-specific matters together with the invention-specific matters described in the claims of the present invention. It may be a thing.

It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine in this embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows various control boards and the like mounted on the pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the game control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the effect control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of an effect control process process. It is a block diagram which shows various control boards and the like concerning other feature parts. It is a rear view which shows the pachinko game machine which concerns on other feature parts. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of the effect control command which concerns on other feature parts. It is explanatory drawing which illustrates the random number value which becomes the random number for a game which concerns on other feature parts. It is a figure which shows the fluctuation pattern which concerns on other characteristic part. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display result determination table which concerns on other feature parts. It is explanatory drawing which shows the hit type determination table which concerns on other characteristic part. It is explanatory drawing which shows the jackpot type which concerns on other feature parts. It is explanatory drawing which shows the variation pattern determination table which concerns on other characteristic part. It is explanatory drawing which shows the variation pattern determination table which concerns on other characteristic part. It is a figure which shows the game control data holding area which concerns on other feature parts. It is a figure which shows the arrangement and display contents of the display monitor which concerns on other feature parts. It is a figure which shows the storage area which stores the number of prize balls related to other feature parts. It is a figure which shows the memory map which concerns on other feature parts. It is a figure which shows the built-in RAM area which concerns on other feature parts. It is a figure which shows the control example of the display in the display monitor which concerns on other feature parts. It is a figure which shows the execution example of the buffer update which concerns on other feature parts. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the main processing which concerns on other feature parts. It is a figure which shows the display mode of the display monitor which concerns on other feature parts. It is a figure which shows the display mode of the display monitor which concerns on other feature parts. It is a figure which shows the display mode of the display monitor in the modification which concerns on other feature parts. It is a figure which shows the display mode of the display monitor in the modification which concerns on other feature parts. It is a rear perspective view which shows the pachinko game machine in the modification which concerns on other feature parts. It is a rear perspective view which shows the state which opened the frame for a game machine in the modified example which concerns on other feature parts. It is a figure which shows the security cover in the modification which concerns on other feature parts. It is a figure which shows the security cover in the modification which concerns on other feature parts. It is a figure which shows the state control example which concerns on other characteristic part. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the effect control main processing which concerns on other feature parts. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the command processing at the time of power-on which concerns on other feature parts. It is a figure which shows the priority of the production control which concerns on other feature parts. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the effect control main processing in the modification which concerns on other feature parts. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the progress setting confirmation processing in the modification which concerns on other feature parts. It is a figure which shows the configuration example of the output amount changeover switch which concerns on a feature part 71AK. It is a figure which shows the initial setting control which concerns on the feature part 71AK. It is a figure which shows the execution example of the notification which concerns on a feature part 71AK. It is a figure which shows the display example which concerns on the feature part 71AK. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the effect control main processing which concerns on a feature part 71AK. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the output switching process at the start which concerns on a feature part 71AK. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the in-progress output change processing which concerns on a feature part 71AK. It is a figure which shows the priority of the effect control in the modification which concerns on the feature part 71AK. It is a figure which shows the execution example of the initial operation which concerns on a feature part 72AK. It is a figure which shows the control pattern which concerns on the characteristic part 72AK. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the command processing at the time of power-on which concerns on a feature part 72AK. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the command processing at power-on in the modification which concerns on the feature part 72AK. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the command processing at the time of power-on which concerns on a feature part 73AK. It is a figure which shows the display example of the setting confirmation notification screen which concerns on a feature part 73AK. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the effect control pattern which concerns on the feature part 74AK. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the effect control main processing which concerns on a feature part 74AK. It is a flowchart which shows an example of confirmation effect control processing which concerns on a feature part 74AK. It is a timing diagram which shows the control example of the confirmation effect which concerns on the feature part 74AK. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the command processing at the time of power-on which concerns on a feature part 75AK. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the confirmation effect control processing during setting change which concerns on the feature part 75AK. It is a timing diagram which shows the control example of the confirmation effect which concerns on the feature part 75AK. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the variation pattern setting process which concerns on a feature part 87AK. It is a figure which shows an example of the variation pattern which concerns on a feature part 87AK. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the variation pattern determination table which concerns on the characteristic part 87AK. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the variable display start setting process which concerns on a feature part 87AK. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the predetermined effect execution setting process which concerns on a feature part 87AK. It is a figure which shows the determination ratio of the predetermined effect execution presence / absence which concerns on a feature part 87AK. It is a figure which shows the determination ratio of the predetermined production mode which concerns on a feature part 87AK. It is a figure which shows the determination ratio of the execution timing of the predetermined effect which concerns on a feature part 87AK. It is a figure which shows the determination ratio of the effect mode after a predetermined effect which concerns on a feature part 87AK. It is a figure which shows the determination ratio of the execution mode of the explanatory effect which concerns on a feature part 87AK. It is a figure which shows the determination ratio of the display character which concerns on a feature part 87AK. It is a figure which shows the production operation example which concerns on the feature part 87AK. It is a figure which shows the production operation example which concerns on the feature part 87AK. It is a flowchart which shows an example of an active display effect determination process. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of an active display change effect execution decision table, active display movement effect execution decision table, active display mode decision table, and active display change timing decision table. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the effect mode of the active display change effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the effect mode of the active display movement effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the effect mode of the active display movement effect and the active display change effect. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a predetermined effect determination process. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the predetermined effect execution decision table and the decoration display decision table. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of an information display area. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the effect mode of a predetermined effect (hold change). It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the effect mode of a predetermined effect (background change).

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (also the configuration and control of a general pachinko gaming machine) will be described.

(Configuration of pachinko gaming machine 1 etc.)
FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1, showing an arrangement layout of main members. The pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly classified into a gaming board (gauge board) 2 constituting the game board surface and a game machine frame (underframe) 3 for supporting and fixing the game board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is launched from a predetermined ball launching device and is driven into the game area.

A variable display (also referred to as a special figure game) of a special symbol (also referred to as a special figure) as a plurality of types of special identification information is displayed at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, the right side of the game area). The first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B to be performed are provided. Each of these consists of a 7-segment LED or the like. The special symbol is represented by a number indicating "0" to "9" or a lighting pattern such as "-". The special symbol may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off.

The "variable display" of the special symbol is, for example, to display a plurality of types of special symbols in a variable manner (the same applies to other symbols described later). Fluctuations include update display of a plurality of symbols, scroll display of a plurality of symbols, deformation of one or more symbols, enlargement / reduction of one or more symbols, and the like. When the special symbol or the ordinary symbol described later is changed, a plurality of types of special symbols or ordinary symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of the decorative symbols described later, a plurality of types of decorative symbols are scrolled or updated, and one or more decorative symbols are deformed or enlarged / reduced. The variation also includes a mode in which a certain symbol is blinked and displayed. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) as a display result (the same applies to the variable display of other symbols described later). In addition, the variable display may be expressed as a variable display or a variable display.

The special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A is also referred to as a "first special symbol", and the special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B is also referred to as a "second special symbol". Further, the special figure game using the first special figure is also referred to as a "first special figure game", and the special figure game using the second special figure is also referred to as a "second special figure game". It should be noted that there may be one type of special symbol display device that performs variable display of the special symbol.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display), an organic EL (Electro Luminescence), or the like, and displays various effects images. The image display device 5 may be composed of a projector and a screen. Various effects images are displayed on the image display device 5.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, a decorative symbol (a symbol indicating a number or the like) as a plurality of types of decorative identification information different from the special symbol is synchronized with the first special figure game or the second special figure game. Is variable display. Here, in synchronization with the first special figure game or the second special figure game, the decorative symbols are variably displayed (for example, up and down) in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". Direction scroll display and update display). It should be noted that the special figure game and the variable display of the decorative pattern that are executed in synchronization are collectively referred to as simply variable display.

On the screen of the image display device 5, a display area for displaying a hold display corresponding to the variable display in which execution is suspended or an active display corresponding to the variable display being executed may be provided. Hold display and active display are collectively referred to as variable display compatible display corresponding to variable display.

The number of variable displays on hold is also called the number of stored items on hold. The number of reserved storage corresponding to the first special figure game is also referred to as the first reserved storage number, and the number of reserved storage corresponding to the second special figure game is also referred to as the second reserved storage number. Further, the total of the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number is also referred to as a total reserved storage number.

Further, at a predetermined position of the game board 2, a first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B configured to include a plurality of LEDs are provided, and the first hold indicator 25A has the number of LEDs lit. The first hold storage number is displayed, and the second hold display 25B displays the second hold storage number according to the number of LEDs lit.

Below the image display device 5, a winning ball device 6A and a variable winning ball device 6B are provided.

The winning ball device 6A forms a first starting winning opening that is always kept in a constant open state in which a game ball can enter by a predetermined ball receiving member, for example. When a game ball enters the first start winning opening, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls may be paid out and the first special figure game may be started.

The variable winning ball device 6B (ordinary electric accessory) forms a second starting winning opening that is changed between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 2). The variable winning ball device 6B includes, for example, an electric tulip-shaped accessory having a pair of movable wing pieces, and the movable wing pieces are in a vertical position when the solenoid 81 is off, so that the tip of the movable wing pieces is in a vertical position. Is close to the winning ball device 6A and is in a closed state in which the game ball does not enter the second starting winning opening (also referred to as the second starting winning opening is closed). On the other hand, the variable-sweep wing device 6B is in an open state in which the game ball can enter the second start winning opening because the movable wing piece is in the tilted position when the solenoid 81 is in the on state (second start). It is also said that the winning opening is open.) When a game ball enters the second start winning opening, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls can be paid out and the second special figure game can be started. The variable winning ball device 6B may be any as long as it changes between the closed state and the open state, and is not limited to the one provided with the electric tulip type accessory.

At predetermined positions of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, four locations on the lower left and right sides of the game area), general winning openings 10 are provided, which are always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member. In this case, when entering any of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

Below the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B, a special variable winning ball device 7 having a large winning opening is provided. The special variable winning ball device 7 includes a large winning opening door that is opened and closed by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 2), and has a large winning opening as a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state depending on the large winning opening door. Form.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door (for special electric accessory) is in the off state, the large winning opening door closes the large winning opening and the game ball is large. You will not be able to enter (pass) the winning opening. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door is on, the large winning opening door opens the large winning opening, and the game ball can easily enter the large winning opening. Become.

When a game ball enters the large prize opening, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. When a game ball enters the large winning opening, more prize balls are paid out than when the game ball enters, for example, the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, and the general winning opening 10.

The entry of a game ball into each winning opening including the general winning opening 10 is also referred to as "winning". In particular, winning a prize at the starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening starting opening) is also referred to as a starting winning.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, the left side of the game area). As an example, the ordinary symbol display 20 is composed of a 7-segment LED or the like, and performs variable display of the ordinary symbol as a plurality of types of ordinary identification information different from the special symbol. Ordinary symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9" and lighting patterns such as "-". The normal symbol may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off. Such a variable display of a normal pattern is also called a normal pattern game.

On the left side of the image display device 5, a passing gate 41 through which a game ball can pass is provided. Based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41, the normal drawing game is executed.

A normal symbol display 25C is provided above the normal symbol display 20. The normal figure hold indicator 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the number of normal figure hold storages, which is the number of normal figure games whose execution is suspended, by the number of LEDs lit.

In addition to the above configuration, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill that changes the flow direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstacle nails. At the bottom of the game area, there is an out opening for taking in a game ball that has not entered any of the winning openings.

Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the upper left and right positions of the game machine frame 3, and game effect lamps 9 for game effects are further provided around the game area. ing. The game effect lamp 9 is configured to include an LED.

A movable body 32 that operates according to the effect is provided at a predetermined position (not shown in FIG. 1) of the game board 2.

At the lower right position of the game machine frame 3, a ball striking operation handle (operation knob) 30 operated by a player or the like to launch the game ball toward the game area by the striking ball launching device is provided.

At a predetermined position of the game machine frame 3 below the game area, the game balls paid out as prize balls and the game balls rented by the predetermined ball lending machine are held (stored) so as to be able to be supplied to the hitting ball launching device. ) A hit ball supply plate (upper plate) is provided. Below the upper plate, a hit ball supply plate (lower plate) is provided, in which prize balls are paid out when the upper plate is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be gripped and tilted by the player is attached to a predetermined position of the game machine frame 3 below the game area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed and operated by the player. The operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by the controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 2).

A push button 31B is provided at a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area so that the player can perform a predetermined instruction operation by a pressing operation or the like. The operation on the push button 31B is detected by the push sensor 35B (see FIG. 2).

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B are provided as detection means for detecting the movement (operation, etc.) of the player, but detection means other than these may be provided.

(Outline of the progress of the game)
The game ball is launched toward the game area by the rotation operation of the pachinko game machine 1 with respect to the ball striking operation handle 30 by the player. When the game ball passes through the passing gate 41, the normal symbol game by the normal symbol display 20 is started. In addition, when the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 during the period during which the previous normal drawing game is being executed (when the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41 but the normal drawing game based on the passage cannot be executed immediately). , The game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In this normal symbol game, if a specific normal symbol (design per normal symbol) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the normal symbol becomes "per normal symbol". On the other hand, if the normal symbol other than the normal symbol (the normal symbol lost symbol) is stopped and displayed as the confirmed normal symbol, the display result of the normal symbol becomes "normal symbol lost". When it becomes "per normal drawing", the opening control is performed so that the variable winning ball device 6B is opened for a predetermined period (the second starting winning opening is opened).

When the game ball enters the first starting winning opening formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started.

When the game ball enters the second starting winning opening formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

In addition, when the game ball enters (wins) the start winning opening during the period during which the special figure game is being executed or during the period controlled by the big hit game state or the small hit game state described later (the start prize has occurred). If the special figure game based on the start winning cannot be executed immediately), the execution of the special figure game based on the approach is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In the special symbol game, if a specific special symbol (big hit symbol, for example, "7", the actual symbol differs depending on the jackpot type described later) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol, it becomes a "big hit" and a jackpot symbol. If a predetermined special symbol (small hit symbol, for example, "2") different from the above is stopped and displayed, it becomes "small hit". Further, if a special symbol (missing symbol, for example, "-") different from the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, it becomes "missing".

After the display result in the special figure game becomes "big hit", it is controlled to the big hit game state as an advantageous state advantageous for the player. After the display result in the special figure game becomes "small hit", it is controlled to the small hit game state.

In the big hit game state, the big winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined mode. The open state includes the elapsed timing of a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) and the timing until the number of game balls that have entered the large winning opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9). It will continue until the earlier timing. The predetermined period is an upper limit period during which the large winning opening can be opened in one round, and is also hereinafter referred to as an open upper limit period. One cycle in which the big winning opening is open in this way is called a round (round game). In the jackpot game state, the round can be repeatedly executed until the maximum number of times (15 times or 2 times) is reached.

In the big hit game state, the player can obtain the prize ball by letting the game ball enter the big prize opening. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The larger the number of rounds in the jackpot game state and the longer the opening upper limit period, the more advantageous it is for the player.

A jackpot type is set for "big hit". For example, multiple types of opening modes (number of rounds and upper limit period of opening) of the big winning opening and game states after the big hit game state (normal state, time saving state, probability change state, etc., which will be described later) are prepared, and the big hit is made according to these. The type is set. As the jackpot type, a jackpot type in which a large number of prize balls can be obtained or a jackpot type in which a small number of prize balls or almost no prize balls can be obtained may be provided.

In the small hit game state, the large winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined opening mode. For example, in the small hit game state, the same opening mode as the big hit game state in some big hit types (the number of times the big winning opening is opened is the same as the number of rounds, and the closing timing of the big winning opening is also the same. Etc.), the big winning opening becomes open. As with the big hit type, the small hit type may be provided for the "small hit".

After the jackpot game state is completed, it may be controlled to a time saving state or a probability change state according to the jackpot type.

In the time saving state, control (time saving control) is executed in which the average special figure fluctuation time (period in which the special figure is changed) is shortened as compared with the normal state. In the time saving state, the average fluctuation time of the normal map (the period during which the normal map is changed) is shortened from the normal state, and the probability of becoming a "normal map hit" in the normal map game is improved from the normal state. Controls (high opening control, high base control) that make it easier for the game ball to enter the second starting winning opening are also executed. The time saving state is a state in which the fluctuation efficiency of the special symbol (particularly the second special symbol) is improved, which is advantageous for the player.

In the probability variation state (probability fluctuation state), in addition to the time saving control, the probability variation control in which the probability that the display result becomes a "big hit" is higher than in the normal state is executed. The probabilistic state is a state that is more advantageous for the player because it is a state in which a “big hit” is likely to occur in addition to improving the fluctuation efficiency of the special symbol.

The time saving state and the probability change state continue until any one of the end conditions such as the execution of the special figure game a predetermined number of times and the start of the next big hit game state are satisfied first. A game whose end condition is that the special figure game has been executed a predetermined number of times is also referred to as a number cut (time cut time reduction, number cut probability change, etc.).

The normal state is a gaming state other than a special state such as an advantageous state such as a big hit gaming state, a time saving state, or a probability change state, which is advantageous for the player, and the display result in the normal drawing game is "normal drawing hit". The pachinko game machine 1 such as the probability and the probability that the display result in the special figure game becomes a "big hit" returns to a predetermined state after the power is turned on, such as the initial setting state of the pachinko game machine 1 (for example, when a system reset is performed). It is in the same controlled state as (when the process is not executed).

The state in which the probability change control is executed is also called a high probability state, and the state in which the probability change control is not executed is also called a low probability state. The state in which the time saving control is executed is also called a high base state, and the state in which the time saving control is not executed is also called a low base state. By combining these, the time saving state is also called the low accuracy high base state, the probability variation state is called the high accuracy high base state, and the normal state is also called the low accuracy low base state. The high accuracy state and the low base state are also called the high accuracy low base state.

After the small hit game state ends, the game state is not changed, and the game state is continuously controlled to the game state before the display result of the special figure game becomes "small hit" (however, "small hit" occurs. If the special figure game at the time is the special figure game of the predetermined number of times in the number of times cut, the game state is naturally changed). It should be noted that there may be no "small hit" as the display result of the special figure game.

The game state may change based on the fact that the game ball has passed through a specific area (for example, a specific area in the big winning opening) during the big hit game state. For example, when the game ball passes through a specific area, it may be controlled to a probabilistic state after the big hit game state.

(Progress of production, etc.)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various effects (effects of notifying the progress of the game and enlivening the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The production will be described below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5, and in addition to or instead of the display, audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R and / or the game effect lamp 9 It may be performed by the point or the like, turning off the light, or the operation of the movable body 32.

As an effect executed according to the progress of the game, in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the "left", "middle", and "right" provided in the image display device 5, the first special figure game or the first 2 In response to the start of the special figure game, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started. At the timing when the display result (also referred to as the finalized special symbol) is stopped and displayed in the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game, the final decorative symbol (combination of three decorative symbols) that is the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol ) Is also displayed (derived) as a stop.

In the period from the start to the end of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the variable display mode of the decorative symbol may be a predetermined reach mode (reach is established). Here, the reach mode is a variable display of a decorative symbol that has not yet been stopped and displayed when the decorative symbol that has been stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 constitutes a part of the jackpot combination described later. It is a mode in which is continuing.

In addition, the reach effect is executed in response to the above-mentioned reach mode during the variable display of the decorative pattern. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the ratio of the display result (display result of the special figure game or variable display of the decorative symbol) to be "big hit" (also called big hit reliability or big hit expectation) is determined according to the production mode. Multiple different types of reach effects are performed. Reach production includes, for example, normal reach and super reach, which has a higher hit reliability than normal reach.

When the display result of the special figure game is "big hit", a fixed decorative symbol which is a predetermined jackpot combination is derived as a display result of variable display of the decorative symbol on the screen of the image display device 5 (decoration). The display result of the variable display of the symbol is "big hit"). As an example, the same decorative symbols (for example, "7") are aligned and stopped and displayed on predetermined effective lines in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". ..

In the case of a "probability change jackpot" that is controlled to a probability change state after the end of the jackpot game state, an odd number of decorative symbols (for example, "7") are aligned and displayed as a stop, and the probability change state is entered after the end of the jackpot game state. In the case of an uncontrolled "non-probability variable jackpot (normal jackpot)", an even number of decorative symbols (for example, "6") may be aligned and displayed as a stop. In this case, the odd-numbered decorative symbol is also referred to as a probabilistic symbol, and the even-numbered decorative symbol is also referred to as a non-probable variable symbol (normal symbol). After the non-probability pattern is in the reach mode, the promotion effect that finally becomes the "probability jackpot" may be executed.

When the display result of the special figure game is "small hit", the fixed decorative symbol (for example, "for example," "is a predetermined small hit combination as the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol on the screen of the image display device 5. 1 3 5 ”etc.) Is derived (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is a“ small hit ”). As an example, the decorative symbols constituting the chance eyes are stopped and displayed on the predetermined effective lines in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". In addition, when the display result of the special figure game becomes "big hit" of some big hit types (big hit type of the big hit game state in the same mode as the small hit game state), and when it becomes "small hit". , A common fixed decorative pattern may be derived and displayed.

When the display result of the special figure game is "missing", the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is not the reach mode, and the variable display result of the decorative symbol is a fixed decorative symbol of a non-reach combination ("" (Also referred to as "non-reach loss") may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be "non-reach loss"). In addition, when the display result is "missing", after the variable display mode of the decorative symbol becomes the reach mode, the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol is a predetermined reach combination ("reach loss") that is not a jackpot combination. The fixed decorative symbol (also called) may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol may be "reach loss").

The effect that the pachinko gaming machine 1 can execute includes displaying the above-mentioned variable display compatible display (hold display or active display). Further, as another effect, for example, a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the jackpot is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbol. The notice effect includes a notice effect that announces the jackpot reliability in the variable display during execution, and a look-ahead advance notice effect that announces the jackpot reliability in the variable display (variable display in which execution is suspended) before execution. As the look-ahead notice effect, an effect of changing the display mode of the variable display compatible display (hold display or active display) to a mode different from the usual mode may be executed.

Further, in the image display device 5, the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped during the variable display of the decorative symbol, and then the variable display is restarted to make one variable display look like a plurality of variable displays in a pseudo manner. The pseudo-continuous production may be executed.

Even during the big hit game state, the big hit middle effect that notifies the big hit game state is executed. As the big hit middle effect, an effect of notifying the number of rounds and a promotion effect indicating that the value of the big hit gaming state is improved may be executed. Further, even during the small hit game state, the small hit medium effect for notifying the small hit game state is executed. It should be noted that the big hit game during the small hit game state and in some big hit types (the big hit type in the big hit game state having the same mode as the small hit game state, for example, the big hit type in which the subsequent game state is a high accuracy state). By executing a common effect depending on the state, the player may not know whether the player is currently in the small hit game state or the big hit game state. In such a case, by executing a common effect after the end of the small hit game state and after the end of the big hit game state, it is not possible to distinguish between the high accuracy state and the low accuracy state. You may.

Further, for example, when a special figure game or the like is not executed, a demo (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demo effect is executed).

(Board configuration)
The pachinko gaming machine 1 is equipped with, for example, a main board 11, an effect control board 12, a voice control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, and the like as shown in FIG. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, and a power supply board are arranged on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and the progress of the above-mentioned game in the pachinko game machine 1 (execution of a special figure game (including management of hold), execution of a normal figure game (including management of hold), and a big hit. It has a function to control a game state, a small hit game state, a game state, etc.). The main board 11 includes a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, which includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103. , A random number circuit 104 and an I / O (Input / Output port) 105 are provided.

The CPU 103 performs a process of controlling the progress of the game (a process of realizing the function of the main board 11) by executing the program stored in the ROM 101. At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (data such as a fluctuation pattern described later, an effect control command described later, and various tables referred to when making various decisions described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. .. The RAM 102 is a backup RAM in which the stored contents are stored for a predetermined period even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped in part or in whole. Note that all or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be expanded into the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

The random number circuit 104 updatablely counts numerical data indicating various random number values (game random numbers) used when controlling the progress of the game. The game random number may be updated by the CPU 103 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

The I / O 105 includes, for example, an input port into which various signals (detection signals described later) are input, various signals (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, ordinary symbol display 20, first hold). It includes an output port for transmitting (a signal for controlling (driving) the display 25A, the second hold display 25B, the normal figure hold display 25C, etc., and a solenoid drive signal).

The switch circuit 110 is a detection signal (a game ball has passed or is passed) from various switches for detecting a game ball (gate switch 21, start port switch (first start port switch 22A and second start port switch 22B), count switch 23). It takes in a detection signal indicating that the switch has been turned on by entering and transmits it to the game control microcomputer 100. By transmitting the detection signal, the passage or approach of the game ball is detected.

The solenoid circuit 111 transmits a solenoid drive signal (for example, a signal for turning on the solenoid 81 or the solenoid 82) from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for an ordinary electric accessory or the solenoid 82 for a prize-winning door. To transmit.

The main board 11 (microcomputer 100 for game control) issues an effect control command (a command for designating (notifying) the progress of the game) according to the progress of the game as a part of controlling the progress of the game. Supply to 12. The effect control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the effect control board 12. The effect control command includes, for example, various determination results on the main board 11 (for example, a display result of a special figure game (including a jackpot type)) and a variation pattern used when executing a special figure game (details will be described later). )), The game status (for example, the start and end of the variable display, the opening status of the large winning opening, the occurrence of winning, the number of stored memories, the game status), the command for specifying the occurrence of an error, and the like are included.

The effect control board 12 is a control board on the sub side independent of the main board 11, receives an effect control command, and produces an effect (various effects according to the progress of the game) based on the received effect control command. It has a function of executing various notifications such as driving of the movable body 32, error notification, and notification of power failure recovery).

The effect control board 12 is equipped with an effect control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control unit 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I / O 125.

The effect control CPU 120 is a process for executing the effect together with the display control unit 123 by executing the program stored in the ROM 121 (a process for realizing the above-mentioned function of the effect control board 12, and the effect to be executed). (Including the decision etc.). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as the main memory.

The effect control CPU 120 displays the execution of the effect based on the detection signal from the controller sensor unit 35A or the push sensor 35B (a signal output when an operation by the player is detected and an appropriate signal indicating the operation content). It may also instruct the control unit 123.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), and the like, and executes the effect based on the effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120.

The display control unit 123 supplies the image display device 5 with a video signal corresponding to the effect to be executed based on the effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120, so that the effect image is displayed on the image display device 5. The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal for designating the output sound) to the sound control board 13 in order to output sound synchronized with the display of the effect image and turn on / off the game effect lamp 9. Or, a lamp signal (a signal for designating a lamp on / off mode) is supplied to the lamp control board 14. Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a drive circuit for driving the movable body 32.

The voice control board 13 is equipped with various circuits for driving the speakers 8L and 8R, drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the sound designated by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. Let me.

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits for driving the game effect lamp 9, drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, and turns on / off the game effect lamp 9 in a mode designated by the lamp signal. To do. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the audio output and the lighting / extinguishing of the lamp.

The effect control CPU 120 executes audio output, lamp lighting / extinguishing control (sound designation signal, lamp signal supply, etc.), and movable body 32 control (signal supply for operating the movable body 32, etc.). You may do so.

The random number circuit 124 updatablely counts numerical data indicating various random number values (random numbers for effect) used to execute various effects. The effect random number may be one that is updated (updated by software) when the effect control CPU 120 executes a predetermined computer program.

The I / O 125 mounted on the effect control board 12 is for transmitting various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, lamp signal) and an input port for taking in the effect control command transmitted from, for example, the main board 11. It is configured to include the output port of.

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the effect control board 12, the sound control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also referred to as sub-boards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko gaming machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

(motion)
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

(Main operation of main board 11)
First, the main operations on the main board 11 will be described. When the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is started, and the game control main process is executed by the CPU 103. FIG. 3 is a flowchart showing a game control main process executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 3, the CPU 103 first sets interrupt prohibition (step S1). Subsequently, necessary initial settings are made (step S2). The initial settings include stack pointer settings, register settings for built-in devices (CTC (counter / timer circuit), parallel input / output ports, etc.), settings for making the RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, it is determined whether or not the output signal from the clear switch is ON (step S3). The clear switch is mounted on the power supply board, for example. When the power is turned on with the clear switch turned on, an output signal (clear signal) is input to the game control microcomputer 100 via the input port. When the output signal from the clear switch is on (step S3; Yes), the initialization process (step S8) is executed. In the initialization process, the CPU 103 performs a RAM clear process for clearing the flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and sets initial values in the work area.

Further, the CPU 103 transmits an effect control command instructing initialization to the effect control board 12 (step S9). When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command, for example, the image display device 5 displays a screen for notifying that the control of the game machine has been initialized.

If the output signal from the clear switch is not on (step S3; No), it is determined whether or not the backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (backup RAM) (step S4). When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped due to an unexpected power failure or the like (power interruption), the CPU 103 executes the power supply stop processing immediately before the pachinko gaming machine 1 becomes inoperable due to the stop of the power supply. In this power supply stop processing, a processing of turning on a backup flag indicating that data is backed up to the RAM 102, a data protection processing of the RAM 102, and the like are executed. The data protection process includes addition of an error detection code (checksum, parity bit, etc.) and a process of backing up various data. The data to be backed up includes various data (including various flags, various timer states, etc.) for advancing the game, as well as the state of the backup flag and the error detection code. In step S4, it is determined whether or not the backup flag is on. When the backup flag is off and the backup data is not stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; No), the initialization process (step S8) is executed.

When the backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; Yes), the CPU 103 checks the data of the backed up data (used by using an error detection code) and determines whether or not the data is normal (step). S5). In step S5, for example, it is determined by the parity bit or the checksum whether or not the data in the RAM 102 matches the data when the power supply is stopped. When it is determined that these match, it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal.

If it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is not normal (step S5; No), the internal state cannot be returned to the state when the power supply is stopped, so the initialization process (step S8) is executed.

When it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal (step S5; Yes), the CPU 103 performs a recovery process (step S6) for returning the internal state of the main board 11 to the state when the power supply is stopped. In the recovery process, the CPU 103 sets the work area based on the stored contents (contents of the backed up data) of the RAM 102. As a result, the game state is restored to the state when the power supply is stopped, and if the special symbol is changing, the change of the special symbol is restarted from the state before the restoration by executing the game control timer interrupt process described later. Will be.

Then, the CPU 103 transmits an effect control command instructing recovery from the power failure to the effect control board 12 (step S7). In accordance with this, an effect control command that specifies the game state before the power failure that is backed up, and an effect control that specifies the display result of the special figure game that is being executed when the special figure game is being executed. You may want to send a command. For these commands, the same commands that are set to be transmitted in the special symbol process processing described later can be used. When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command that specifies the time of recovery from the power failure, the image display device 5, for example, notifies that the image display device 5 has recovered from the power failure or is recovering from the power failure. Display the screen to do so. The effect control CPU 120 may display an appropriate screen based on the effect control command.

After the restoration process or the initialization process is completed and the effect control command is transmitted to the effect control board 12, the CPU 103 executes the random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104 (step S10). Then, the CTC register built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that the timer is interrupted periodically every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step S11), and interrupts are permitted (step S12). ). After that, the loop processing is started. After that, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) intervals, and the CPU 103 can periodically execute the timer interrupt process.

When the CPU 103 that has executed the game control main process receives the interrupt request signal from the CTC and receives the interrupt request, the CPU 103 executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 4 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process to perform the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, and the second start port via the switch circuit 110. It is determined whether or not detection signals are received from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 (step S21). Subsequently, by executing a predetermined main-side error process, an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be generated if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, the jackpot information (information indicating the number of times the jackpot has occurred) and the start information (starting) supplied to the hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1. Data such as information such as the number of times of winning and the probability fluctuation information (information indicating the number of times of the probability change state) are output (step S23).

Following the information output process, a game random number update process for updating at least a part of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S24). After that, the CPU 103 executes the special symbol process process (step S25). By executing the special symbol process process for each timer interrupt by the CPU 103, it is possible to manage the execution and hold of the special symbol game, control the big hit game state and the small hit game state, control the game state, and the like (for details, see See below).

Following the special symbol process processing, the normal symbol process processing is executed (step S26). By executing the normal symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, the CPU 103 manages the execution and hold of the normal figure game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the passing of the game ball through the passing gate 41). It enables opening control of the variable winning ball device 6B based on "per-figure". The execution of the normal figure game is performed by driving the normal symbol display 20, and the number of normal figure reservations is displayed by turning on the normal figure hold display 25C.

After executing the normal symbol process process, as a part of the game control timer interrupt process, a process when a power failure occurs, a process for paying out a prize ball, and the like may be performed. After that, the CPU 103 executes the command control process (step S27). The CPU 103 may send and set an effect control command in each of the above processes. In the command control process of step S27, a process of transmitting the effect control command set for transmission to a control board on the sub side such as the effect control board 12 is performed. After executing the command control process, the interrupt is permitted and then the game control timer interrupt process is terminated.

FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S25 shown in FIG. 4 as the special symbol process process. In this special symbol process process, the CPU 103 first executes a start winning determination process (step S101).

In the start winning determination process, a process of detecting the occurrence of a start winning, storing the hold information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and updating the hold storage number is executed. When the start winning is generated, the display result (including the jackpot type) and the random value for determining the fluctuation pattern are extracted and stored as hold information. Further, a process of pre-reading and determining a display result or a fluctuation pattern may be executed based on the extracted random number value. After the hold information and the number of hold storages are stored, the transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command for designating the determination result such as the occurrence of the start winning prize, the number of hold storages, and the look-ahead determination is made on the effect control board 12. .. The effect control command at the time of starting winning, which is set to be transmitted in this way, is executed from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process in step S27 shown in FIG. 4 after the special symbol process process is completed. Is transmitted to.

After executing the start winning determination process in S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes any of the processes of steps S110 to S120 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the RAM 102. In each process (steps S110 to S120) of the special symbol process process, a transmission setting for transmitting an effect control command corresponding to each process to the effect control board 12 is performed.

The special symbol normal processing in step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “0” (initial value). In this special symbol normal processing, it is determined whether or not to start the first special figure game or the second special figure game based on the presence or absence of the pending information. In addition, in the special symbol normal processing, whether or not the display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is set to "big hit" or "small hit" based on the random value for determining the display result, and the big hit type when the display result is set to "big hit". Is determined (predetermined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Further, in the special symbol normal processing, a fixed special symbol (either a big hit symbol, a small hit symbol, or a lost symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set according to the determined display result. After that, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1", and the special symbol normal processing ends. In addition, the special figure game using the second special figure may be executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure (also referred to as special figure 2 priority digestion). Further, the winning order of the game balls to the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening may be memorized, and the starting condition of the special figure game may be satisfied in the winning order (also referred to as winning order digestion).

When making various determinations based on the random number value, various tables stored in the ROM 101 (a table in which the determination value to be compared with the random number value is assigned to the determination result) are referred to. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the effect control board 12. In the effect control board 12, various tables are stored in the ROM 121.

The variation pattern setting process in step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “1”. In this fluctuation pattern setting process, one of a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns is used by using a random value for determining the fluctuation pattern based on a preliminary determination result of whether or not the display result is a "big hit" or a "small hit". The process of deciding on is included. In the variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2", and the variation pattern setting process ends.

The fluctuation pattern includes the execution time of the special symbol game (special symbol fluctuation time) (which is also the execution time of the variable display of the decorative symbol), the mode of the variable display of the decorative symbol (presence or absence of reach, etc.), and the variable display of the decorative symbol. The content of the effect (type of reach effect, etc.) is specified, and it is also called a variable display pattern.

The special symbol variation process in step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “2”. In this special symbol change processing, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B are set to change the special symbol, and the elapsed time from the start of the change of the special symbol. It includes processing to measure. In addition, it is also determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the special symbol variation reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3", and the special symbol variation process ends.

The special symbol stop process in step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “3”. In this special symbol stop process, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B stop the fluctuation of the special symbol, and stop display (derive) the confirmed special symbol that is the display result of the special symbol. Includes processing to make settings for. Then, when the display result is "big hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, when the big hit flag is off and the display result is "small hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "8". If the display result is "missing", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0". When the display result is "small hit" or "miss", the game state is also updated when the time saving state or the probability change state is controlled and the end of the number of cuts is established. When the value of the special symbol process flag is updated, the special symbol stop processing ends.

The jackpot release preprocessing in step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “4”. This big hit pre-opening process includes a process of setting to open the big winning opening by starting the execution of the round in the big hit game state based on the display result being "big hit". It has been. When the large winning opening is opened, a process of supplying a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door is executed. At this time, for example, the open upper limit period for keeping the big winning opening in the open state and the upper limit execution number of rounds are set according to which type of jackpot is used. When these settings are completed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", and the jackpot release preprocessing ends.

The process of opening the jackpot in step S115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “5”. In this process during opening of the big hit, the process of measuring the elapsed time since the large winning opening is opened, the measured elapsed time, the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, and the like are used as the basis for the large winning opening. It includes a process of determining whether or not it is time to return the device from the open state to the closed state. Then, when the large winning opening is returned to the closed state, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6" after executing a process of stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door. Ends processing while the jackpot is open.

The post-processing after opening the jackpot in step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “6”. In this post-opening process of the jackpot, a process of determining whether or not the number of executions of the round that opens the jackpot has reached the set upper limit execution number, and a jackpot game state when the upper limit execution number is reached. It includes processing to make settings to terminate. Then, when the number of round executions has not reached the upper limit, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", while when the number of round executions reaches the upper limit, the special figure process flag is set. The value is updated to "7". When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the post-launch processing is completed.

The jackpot end processing of step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “7”. In this jackpot end process, there is a process of waiting until the waiting time corresponding to the period in which the ending effect as an effect action for notifying the end of the jackpot game state is executed, and a probability change corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state. It includes processing to make various settings to start control and time reduction control. When such a setting is made, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot end processing ends.

The small hit release preprocessing in step S118 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “8”. This small hit pre-opening process includes a process of setting the large winning opening to be in the open state in the small hit game state based on the display result being "small hit". At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "9", and the small hit release preprocessing ends.

The small hit opening process in step S119 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “9”. In this small hit opening process, it is the timing to measure the elapsed time from the opening state of the big winning opening and to return the big winning opening from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time. It includes processing to determine whether or not it is. When the big winning opening is returned to the closed state and the end timing of the small hit game state is reached, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "10", and the processing during the small hit opening process ends.

The small hit end process in step S120 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “10”. The small hit end process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period in which the effect operation for notifying the end of the small hit game state is executed has elapsed. Here, when the small hit gaming state ends, the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 before the small hit gaming state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small hit game state has elapsed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the small hit end process ends.

(Main operation of the effect control board 12)
Next, the main operation of the effect control board 12 will be described. When the effect control board 12 receives the power supply voltage from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated to execute the effect control main process as shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the effect control main process shown in FIG. 6 is started, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S71) to clear the RAM 122, set various initial values, and press the effect control board 12. Set the registers of the mounted CTC (counter / timer circuit). In addition, the initial operation control process is executed (step S72). In the initial operation control process, control for performing the initial operation of the movable body 32, such as control for driving the movable body 32 to return to the initial position and control for confirming a predetermined operation, is executed.

After that, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is turned on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to the ON state every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses, based on the register setting of the CTC, for example. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed and waits.

Further, on the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving the effect control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to the timer interrupt that is generated every time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is, for example, an interrupt generated when the effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the effect control INT signal being turned on, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets interrupt disabled, but if a CPU that is not automatically interrupt disabled is used, an interrupt occurs. It is desirable to issue a prohibition order (DI instruction). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt caused by the effect control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, among the input ports included in the I / O 125, the effect control command is taken in from a predetermined input port that receives the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15. The effect control command captured at this time is stored in, for example, the effect control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122. After that, the effect control CPU 120 sets the interrupt enable, and then ends the command reception interrupt process.

If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared and turned off (step S74), and the command analysis process is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various effect control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer, the read effect control commands are used. Corresponding settings and controls are performed. For example, the read effect control command may be stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 or stored in the RAM 122 so that which effect control command is received and the content specified by the effect control command can be confirmed by the effect control process process or the like. Turn on the provided receive flag. Further, when the effect control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display the background according to the game state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the effect control process process is executed (step S76). In the effect control process processing, for example, an effect image display operation in the display area of the image display device 5, an audio output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, a lighting operation in a decorative light emitting body such as a game effect lamp 9 and a decorative LED, and a movable body 32. Controls are performed to operate various production devices such as the driving operation of the LED. Further, regarding the control content of the effect operation using various effect devices, determination, determination, setting, etc. are performed according to the effect control command or the like transmitted from the main board 11.

Following the effect control process process in step S76, the effect random number update process is executed (step S77), and at least a part of the effect random numbers used on the effect control board 12 side is updated by the software. After that, the process returns to the process of step S73. Other processes may be executed before returning to the process of step S73.

FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S76 of FIG. 6 as the effect control process process. In the effect control process process shown in FIG. 7, the effect control CPU 120 first executes the lookahead advance notice setting process (step S161). In the look-ahead advance notice setting process, for example, a determination, determination, and setting for executing the look-ahead advance notice effect are performed based on the effect control command at the time of starting winning, which is transmitted from the main board 11. In addition, a process for displaying the hold display is executed based on the number of hold storages specified from the effect control command.

After executing the process of step S161, the effect control CPU 120 selects and executes any of the following processes of steps S170 to S177 according to, for example, the value of the effect process flag provided in the RAM 122.

The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “0” (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start the variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command for designating the start of the variable display is received from the main board 11. Etc. are included. When it is determined that the variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 is started, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is terminated.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “1”. In this variable display start setting process, the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol (fixed decorative symbol), the mode of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the reach effect, and various types are based on the display result and the variation pattern specified by the effect control command. It is determined whether or not various effects such as a notice effect are executed, their modes, and the execution start timing. Then, an effect control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the effect) that reflects the determination result and the like is set. After that, based on the set effect control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start executing the variable display of the decorative symbol, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is completed. The display control unit 123 starts the variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 in response to the instruction to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol.

The variable display effect process in step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “2”. In this variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display the effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. , Driving the movable body 32, outputting voice and sound effect from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting the command (sound effect signal) to the voice control board 13, and commanding the lamp control board 14 (illumination signal). Various effect controls are executed during the variable display of the decorative pattern, such as turning on / off / blinking the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED according to the output. After performing such effect control, for example, an end code indicating the end of variable display of the decorative symbol is read from the effect control pattern, or a command is received from the main board 11 to specify that the fixed decorative symbol is to be stopped and displayed. In response to what has been done, the final decorative symbol, which is the display result of the decorative symbol, is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "3", and the effect process during variable display ends.

The special figure hit waiting process in step S173 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “3”. In this special figure hit waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not an effect control command that specifies to start the big hit game state or the small hit game state has been received from the main board 11. Then, when the effect control command for specifying the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state is received, if the command specifies the start of the big hit game state, the value of the effect process flag is set to "6". Update to. On the other hand, if the command specifies the start of the small hit game state, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "4", which is a value corresponding to the small hit medium effect process. In addition, when the reception waiting time of the command elapses without receiving the command specifying to start the big hit game state or the small hit game state, it is determined that the display result in the special figure game is "missing". Then, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0". When the value of the effect process flag is updated, the waiting process for hitting the special figure ends.

The small hit medium effect process in step S174 is a process executed when the value of the effect control process flag is “4”. In this small hit medium effect process, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the effect content in the small hit game state, and executes various effect controls in the small hit game state based on the set content. .. Further, in the small hit middle effect processing, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify that the small hit game state is terminated, the value of the effect process flag is set to a value corresponding to the small hit end effect. Update to a certain "5" and end the small hit medium production process.

The small hit end effect process in step S175 is a process executed when the value of the effect control process flag is “5”. In this small hit end effect process, the effect control CPU 120 sets an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to, for example, the end of the small hit game state, and various effect controls at the end of the small hit game state based on the setting contents. To execute. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the small hit end effect process is terminated.

The jackpot effect process in step S176 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “6”. In this big hit middle effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the effect content in the big hit game state, and executes various effect controls in the big hit game state based on the set content. Further, in the jackpot middle effect processing, for example, the value of the effect control process flag is set to a value corresponding to the ending effect process in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify that the jackpot game state is terminated. Update to 7 ”and end the production process during the big hit.

The ending effect process of step S177 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “7”. In this ending effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state, and controls various effects of the ending effect at the end of the jackpot game state based on the setting contents. Execute. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the ending effect process ends.

(Modified example of basic explanation)
The present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the above basic description, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the gist of the present invention.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the above basic explanation is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as a prize based on the occurrence of a prize, but the game medium is enclosed and a score is given based on the occurrence of a prize. It may be an enclosed game machine.

Only one type of symbol (for example, a symbol indicating "-") is displayed during the variable display of the special symbol, and the variable display may be performed by repeating the display and extinguishing of the symbol. Further, even if the symbol is displayed during the variable display, the symbol may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" may not be displayed as the display result).

In the above basic explanation, the pachinko game machine 1 is shown as a game machine, but a medal is inserted and a predetermined number of bets is set, and a plurality of types of symbols are rotated according to the operation of the operation lever by the player, and the player If the combination of stop symbols becomes a specific combination of symbols when the symbols are stopped in response to the operation of the stop button by, a slot machine capable of executing a game in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player (for example, a big bonus) The present invention can also be applied to a slot machine equipped with one or more of regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter, bonus, etc.).

The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to the form of being distributed and provided by the detachable recording medium to the computer device included in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the computer device and the like in advance. It may take the form of being distributed by installing it in the storage device of the. Further, the program and data for realizing the present invention are distributed by downloading from another device on the network connected via the communication line or the like by providing the communication processing unit. It doesn't matter.

The execution mode of the game is not limited to the one executed by attaching a detachable recording medium, but can be executed by temporarily storing the program and data downloaded via the communication line or the like in the internal memory or the like. It may be executed directly using the hardware resources of other devices on the network connected via a communication line or the like. Further, the game can be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

In addition, in this specification, one of the expressions for comparison of various ratios such as the execution ratio of the production (expressions such as "high", "low", and "differentiate") is "0%". It may be included. For example, one may have a proportion of "0%" and the other may have a proportion of "100%" or less than "100%".

(Explanation of configuration for other feature parts)
Next, other feature parts in the embodiment of the present invention will be described. This feature unit makes it possible to control an advantageous state such as a jackpot gaming state that is advantageous to the player based on the set value, and makes it possible to change the set value based on a predetermined setting change operation. It is equipped with a configuration that allows the set values to be confirmed by display. Then, the set value can be displayed by the configuration that can display the information on the game value such as the prize ball given based on the entry of the game medium such as the game ball into the predetermined area.

FIG. 8-1 is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted on the pachinko gaming machine 1 related to this feature portion. The same reference numerals are given to the configurations common to the above-described embodiments. For example, the output circuit 111 may have the same configuration as the solenoid circuit 111. The first special symbol display 4A and the second special symbol display 4B may have the same configuration as the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B. The effect display device 5 may have the same configuration as the image display device 5. When the display result is "missing" (hiragana), it is the same as when the display result is "missing" (katakana). The first general winning opening switch 26A, the second general winning opening switch 26B, the third general winning opening switch 26C, and the fourth general winning opening switch 26D are game balls that have passed (entered) any one of a plurality of general winning openings 10. Is detected, and a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls based on the detection.

The effect control board 12 is connected to the operation motors AK011 to AK014 for driving the movable member serving as the movable accessory (movable effect device) and the origin sensors AK021 to AK024 for detecting the origin position of the movable member. .. The operation motors AK011 to AK014 may be those using a motor, an electromagnetic solenoid, or the like. The origin sensors AK021 to AK024 may be configured by using a contact type sensor such as a micro switch or a non-contact type sensor such as a photo sensor or a capacitance type sensor. The effect control board 12 is provided with a real-time clock (RTC) 126 capable of outputting time information.

In this embodiment, when the small hit game state is controlled, the second large winning opening provided separately from the first large winning opening, which is the large winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7, is It becomes an open state in a predetermined opening mode. For example, in the small hit game state, the second big winning opening is opened in the period until the predetermined upper limit time (for example, 3 seconds) elapses or the predetermined number (for example, 10) of winning balls are generated. Make it a state. In the present embodiment, the second big winning opening is set to open once until a predetermined upper limit time (for example, 3 seconds) elapses in the small hit game state, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, it may be opened a plurality of times in the small hit game state. When the solenoid 83 for the 2nd big winning opening door is on, the 2nd big winning opening is opened by the 2nd big winning opening door, and the game ball passes (enters) the 2nd big winning opening. It will be easier. On the other hand, when the solenoid 83 for the 2nd prize opening door is off, the 2nd prize opening is closed by the 2nd prize opening, and the game ball passes through the 2nd winning opening ( Entry) is disabled. In this way, the second big winning opening changes into an open state in which the game ball easily passes (enters) and is advantageous to the player, and a closed state in which the game ball cannot pass (enter) and is disadvantageous to the player. In addition, instead of the closed state in which the game ball cannot pass (enter) the second prize opening, or in addition to the closed state, a partially open state is provided in which the game ball is difficult to pass (enter) the second prize opening. You may.

The count switch 23 is a first count switch that detects a game ball that has passed (entered) the first winning opening. The game ball that passes (enters) the second special winning opening is detected by the second count switch by passing through the second count switch installed in the second special winning opening. Based on the detection of the game balls by the second count switch, a predetermined number (for example, 15) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. In this way, when the game ball passes (enters) the second major winning opening that has been opened, the game ball passes (enters) other normal winning openings such as the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening. ) More prize balls will be paid out. Therefore, when the second big winning opening is opened, the game ball can enter the second big winning opening, which is an advantageous first state for the player. On the other hand, if the 2nd prize opening is closed, it becomes impossible or difficult to pass (enter) the game ball through the 2nd prize opening to obtain the prize ball, which is disadvantageous to the player. There are two states.

Inside the second prize opening, a third count switch and a fourth count switch through which a game ball can pass are installed. The game ball that has passed (entered) the second special winning opening passes through either the third count switch or the fourth count switch and is guided to the back side of the game board 2. The game ball is detected by the third count switch by passing through the third count switch. The game ball is detected by the fourth count switch by passing through the fourth count switch.

In this embodiment, based on the fact that the game ball is detected by the third count switch during the small hit game, the game state after the end of the small hit game is controlled to the big hit game state. Therefore, during the period when the second big winning opening door is open during the small hit game, if the course of the game ball is changed by adding vibration or the like and the game ball is detected by the third count switch, In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the game is stopped in such a case because fraud that is controlled to the jackpot gaming state that is advantageous for the player becomes possible.

Inside the second prize opening, a regulating member that regulates and allows the flow of the game ball toward the third count switch is provided. The regulating member is provided so as to be changeable between a regulated state that regulates the flow of the game ball toward the third count switch and a permissible state that allows the flow of the game ball toward the third count switch. Has been done.

In the small hit game state, when the game ball that has won the second big winning opening passes through the third count switch, it becomes a "big hit" based on the passage of the third count switch of the game ball (V winning big hit). That is, the CPU 103 controls the game state to the big hit game state based on the detection of the passage of the game ball by the third count switch. On the other hand, if the game ball that has won the second big winning opening in the small hit game state passes through the fourth count switch, it does not become a "big hit". That is, the CPU 103 does not control the gaming state to the jackpot gaming state based on the detection of the passage of the gaming ball by the fourth count switch.

Then, when the big hit game state is controlled based on the passage of the third count switch of the game ball, the period until the predetermined upper limit time (for example, 29 seconds) elapses or the predetermined number (for example, 29 seconds) of the second big winning opening door. For example, the second major winning opening is opened during the period until 10) winning balls are generated. As a result, a round game is executed in which the second major winning opening is set to the first state (open state) which is advantageous for the player. In the present embodiment, when the big hit game state is controlled based on the passage of the third count switch, the second big winning opening is controlled to the first state. The first grand prize opening may be controlled to the first state without limitation.

The round game, which is the opening cycle of the second major winning opening, can be repeatedly executed until the number of executions reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "15" or "5"). Even before the number of times the round game is executed reaches the upper limit, the round game may be terminated when a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, the game ball did not win in the second major winning opening). Good.

FIG. 8-2 is a rear view showing a main board 11, an effect control board 12, a power supply board 17, and the like mounted on the pachinko gaming machine 1. The main board 11 is mounted on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in a state of being housed in the board case 201. The main board 11 is provided with a display monitor 29 that can be visually recognized from the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the display monitor 29 also has a function of displaying various winning information related to winning. A display changeover switch 30 is provided on the left side of the display monitor 29, and the information displayed on the display monitor 29 can be switched by operating the display changeover switch 30.

The main board 11 has a door opening sensor 90 that detects the opening of the glass door frame that covers the front surface of the game board 2 so as to be openable and closable, and a large winning opening for detecting the opening of the first large winning opening and the second large winning opening. Various sensors such as the door sensor 91 are connected, and it also has a function of determining the occurrence of various abnormalities (errors) based on the detection signals output from these sensors. The reset signal, power cutoff signal, and clear signal from the power supply board 17 are taken into the switch circuit 110 of the main board 11 and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100.

The main substrate 11 is enclosed in a substrate case 201 made of a transparent synthetic resin material, a display monitor 29 (for example, 7 segments) is arranged in the center of the main substrate 11, and a display monitor 29 (for example, 7 segments) is arranged on the right side of the display monitor 29. The display changeover switch 30 is arranged. The display monitor 29 and the display changeover switch 30 are arranged in front of the main board 11 when the main board 11 is visually recognized. Since the main board 11 cannot be visually recognized when the gaming machine frame 3 is not opened, the front surface when the main board 11 is visually recognized is the back surface side of the gaming board 2 when the gaming machine frame 3 is opened. This is the front when visually recognizing, and is different from the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1. However, the front surface when the main board 11 is visually recognized and the front surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be common.

The main board 11 (microcomputer 100 for game control) has each winning opening (first winning opening, second major winning opening, second starting winning opening, first starting winning opening, general winning opening, hereinafter, "entrance area". The number of game balls entering the game is totaled, and various winning information such as the ratio and the winning ratio are displayed on the display monitor 29, and these winning information are displayed. As a result, various winning information such as the ratio and the role ratio after installation in the amusement park can be confirmed. On the manufacturer side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, it is usual to design the gaming board surface so that the gaming ball enters the general winning opening (passing the test) at a predetermined frequency. In addition, when conducting the test, it is confirmed (verified) whether or not the game ball has entered the general winning opening at a predetermined frequency. Furthermore, even after the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed, whether or not adjustments have been made, what kind of adjustments have been made, and as a result of the adjustments, the game balls enter the general winning opening at the frequency as designed. It is confirmed (verified) whether it is. Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, it is possible to recognize the presence / absence and contents of adjustment after installation.

The power supply board 17 is configured to be able to supply electric power from an AC power source (AC100V), which is an external power source (commercial power source), to electrical components including various control boards such as the main board 11 and the effect control board 12. ing. The power supply board 17 is enclosed in a board case 202 made of a transparent synthetic resin material, and a lock switch 51 for switching to a setting change state or a setting confirmation state is set on the upper right side of the back surface of the power supply board 17. A setting changeover switch 52 that functions as a setting switch for changing a set value such as a jackpot winning probability (ball output rate) in the changed state is provided. Further, the power supply board 17 is provided with a clear switch AK001 and a power supply switch AK002.

The lock switch 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 are provided on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and cannot be operated unless the gaming machine frame 3 that can be opened by a predetermined key operation is opened, and the predetermined key is pressed. Only the staff in possession can operate it. Further, since the lock switch 51 requires key operation, only the staff who has the key to operate the lock switch 51 can operate the lock switch 51 among the staff in the game hall. The lock switch 51 is a switch capable of performing an ON / OFF switching operation by a predetermined key, and is also a switch capable of performing an operation different from the switching operation (for example, a pushing operation).

When the power-on operation using the power switch AK002 is performed, a predetermined operation using the lock switch 51 or the clear switch AK001 such as an on / off switching operation of the lock switch 51 and a pressing operation of the clear switch AK001 is performed. May be The lock switch 51 and the clear switch AK001 may perform a predetermined operation using these switches at the same time as the power is turned on by using the power switch AK002. Therefore, at least, the lock switch 51, the clear switch AK001, and the power switch AK002 may be arranged at positions that can be simultaneously operated by a staff member of the amusement park or the like. In this way, the lock switch 51 and the clear switch AK001 can detect various operations such as on / off switching operation and pressing operation by a staff member of the amusement park or the like as the power is turned on using the power switch AK002. It is configured in.

At the lower part on the back side of the pachinko game machine 1, a nozzle (discharge port) for discharging the game ball that has won a prize in each winning port or the game ball that has entered the out port to the outside of the pachinko game machine 1 is provided, and is inside the nozzle. Is provided with a discharge port switch 70 for detecting a game ball discharged from the pachinko gaming machine 1 (detecting a launched game ball). The signal from the outlet switch 70 is taken into the switch circuit 110 of the main board 11.

FIG. 8-3 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of the effect control command used in this embodiment. The effect control command has, for example, a 2-byte structure, the first byte represents MODE (command classification), and the second byte represents EXT (command type). The first bit (bit 7) of the MODE data is always set to "1", and the first bit of the EXT data is set to "0". Note that this command form is an example, and other command forms may be used. Further, in this example, the control command is composed of two control signals, but the number of control signals constituting the control command may be one or a plurality of three or more.

The command 8001H is a first variation start command for designating the variation start in the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display 4A. The command 8002H is a second variation start command for designating the variation start in the special figure game using the second special figure on the second special symbol display 4B. The command 81XXH is a decoration that is variablely displayed in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the effect display device 5 in response to the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol game. This is a fluctuation pattern specification command that specifies a fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) such as a symbol. Here, XXH indicates that it is an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be a value arbitrarily set according to the content of instruction by the effect control command. In the variation pattern specification command, different EXT data is set according to the variation pattern to be specified.

The command 8CXXXH is a variable display result notification command for designating a variable display result such as a special symbol or an effect symbol. In the variable display result notification command, when the variable display result is "missing", "big hit", or "small hit" (predetermined result), or when the variable display result is "big hit". Different EXT data are set according to the determination result (the jackpot type determination result) of which of the plurality of types the jackpot type is to be used.

The variation display result notification command includes, for example, commands 8C00H to 8C05H. The command 8C00H is a first variable display result designation command indicating a pre-determined result indicating that the variable display result is “missing”. The command 8C01H is a second variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "big hit A" and the big hit type determination result. The command 8C02H is a third variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "big hit B" and the big hit type determination result. The command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "big hit C" and the big hit type determination result. The command 8C04H is a fifth variation display result designation command for notifying the predetermined result that the variation display result is "small hit A". The command 8C05H is a sixth variation display result designation command for notifying the predetermined result that the variation display result is "small hit B".

The command 8F00H is a symbol confirmation command for designating the change stop (confirmation) of the decorative symbol in each of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the effect display device 5. The command 9000H is a RAM clear notification command that notifies that the stored contents of the RAM 102 have been cleared due to the initialization by the game control microcomputer 100 when the power supply by turning on the power of the pachinko game machine 1 is started. Is. The command 9100H is a setting change start command that specifies the start of the setting change state that enables the setting value to be changed when the power supply by turning on the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started. The command 9200H is a power failure recovery designation command that specifies the execution of the power failure recovery process corresponding to the power failure recovery. Command 93XXH is a setting change end command that specifies the end of the setting change state.

In the setting change end command, for example, EXT data corresponding to the setting value newly set by the change may be set. In this case, different EXT data is set according to the setting value newly set by the change in the setting change state or the setting value continuously set without being changed. When the set value consists of three stages from 1 to 3, the command 9300H specifies that the set value is set to "1", and the command 9301H specifies that the set value is set to "2". Then, the command 9302H may specify that the set value is set to "3". Alternatively, as the setting change end command, only the command 9300H whose EXT data is 00H is prepared, and the end of the setting change state may be specified by the command 9300H regardless of the setting value newly set by the change. Alternatively, as an effect control command different from the setting change end command, a setting value specification command for specifying the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be prepared. The setting value specification command corresponds to the fluctuation start at each time of the special figure game, for example, with the transmission of the first fluctuation start command and the second fluctuation start command, in addition to the case where the setting change end command is transmitted. May be sent. Further, a set value designation command may be transmitted as the variation display is executed a predetermined number of times, for example, every 10 variation starts in the special figure game. In place of these, or in addition to these, a setting value designation command may be transmitted in association with the transmission of the hit start designation command and the hit end designation command. A setting value specification command may be transmitted along with the transmission of the customer waiting demo specification command.

The command 9400H is a setting confirmation start command that specifies the start of the setting confirmation state that enables the setting value to be confirmed when the power supply by turning on the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started. Command 9401H is a setting confirmation end command that specifies the end of the setting confirmation state. The command 95XXH is a game state designation command for designating the current gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the game state designation command, different EXT data are set according to, for example, the current game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1. As a specific example, the command 9500H is the first game state specification command corresponding to the game state (low base state, normal state) in which the time reduction control is not performed, and the command 9501H is the game state (high base state) in which the time reduction control is performed. , Time saving state) is used as the second game state specification command.

The command 96XXH is an error (abnormal) designation command that specifies the occurrence of an error (abnormal) and the type of the error (abnormal) that has occurred in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the error (abnormality) designation command, for example, by setting the EXT data corresponding to each error (abnormality), it is specified which error (abnormality) has been determined on the effect control board 12 side. The occurrence of the specified error (abnormality) can be notified by the error notification process. The command 9F00H is a customer waiting demo designation command for designating the display of the customer waiting demonstration screen (demo screen display) by displaying an effect image corresponding to the progress stop of the game in the customer waiting state.

The command A0XXH is a hit start designation command (also referred to as a "fanfare command") for designating the display of an effect image indicating the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state. The command A1XXH is a command designated during the opening of the large winning opening, which specifies that the large winning opening is in the open state in the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state. The command A2XXH is a command specified after opening the big winning opening that specifies the period during which the big winning opening has changed from the open state to the closed state in the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state. The command A3XXH is a hit end designation command for designating the display of the effect image at the end of the big hit game state or the small hit game state.

In the hit start designation command and the hit end designation command, different EXT data may be set according to the pre-determination result and the jackpot type determination result, for example, by setting the same EXT data as the variation display result notification command. .. Alternatively, in the hit start designation command or the hit end designation command, the correspondence between the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result and the set EXT data may be different from the correspondence in the variable display result notification command. .. In the notification command while the big winning opening is open and the notification command after opening the big winning opening, different EXT data is set according to the number of round executions (for example, "1" to "15") in the big hit game state or the small hit game state. Will be done.

The command B100H is based on the fact that the game ball that has passed (entered) the first starting winning opening formed by the normal winning ball device 6A is detected by the first starting opening switch 22A and the starting winning (first starting winning) is generated. , Is a first start opening winning designation command for notifying that the first start condition for executing the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display 4A is satisfied. The command B200H indicates that a game ball that has passed (entered) the second start winning opening formed by the normally variable winning ball device 6B is detected by the second starting opening switch 22B and a starting winning (second starting winning) is generated. Based on this, it is a second start opening winning designation command for notifying that the second start condition for executing the special figure game using the second special figure on the second special symbol display 4B is satisfied.

The command C1XXH is a first hold storage number notification command for notifying the first special figure hold storage number. The command C2XXH is a second hold storage number notification command for notifying the second special figure hold storage number. The first hold storage number notification command is, for example, when the first start opening prize designation command is transmitted based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening and the first starting condition is satisfied. , Is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. The second hold memory number notification command is used when, for example, a second start opening prize designation command is transmitted based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening and the second starting condition is satisfied. , Is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. In addition, the first hold storage number notification command and the second hold storage number notification command are used in the special figure game when either the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied (when the hold storage number decreases). It may be transmitted in response to the start of execution.

Instead of the first hold storage number notification command and the second hold storage number notification command, the total hold storage number notification command for notifying the total hold storage number may be transmitted. That is, a total hold storage number notification command may be used to notify an increase (or decrease) of the total hold storage number.

The command D100H is a V winning notification designation command for notifying that the third count switch is turned on when the game ball passes through the third count switch, that is, that the V winning is won. On the effect control board 12, for example, the effect control CPU 120 may control to execute the V prize notification effect that notifies that the V prize has been won based on the reception of the V prize notification designation command. In the V-winning notification effect, different effect patterns may be determined according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, or the determination ratios of the plurality of effect patterns may be different. In this way, the set value may be suggested depending on the effect mode of the V prize notification effect. For example, as the effect mode of the V prize notification effect, when the effect image indicating "V" is rotated and displayed, the effect mode in which the rotation direction is clockwise and the effect mode in which the rotation direction is counterclockwise are included. You may be. Alternatively, a plurality of production modes in which the display colors of the production images indicating "V" are different may be included. Then, the set value designation command may be transmitted along with the transmission of the V prize notification designation command. As a result, when the V winning notification effect is executed, the effect mode according to the set value can be appropriately determined.

FIG. 8-4 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a random number value which is a random number for a game counted on the side of the main board 11. In this embodiment, on the side of the main board 11, in addition to the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, and the normal figure display result determination are used. Numerical data indicating each of the random number values MR4 and the random number value MR5 for determining the initial value of MR4 is controlled so as to be countable. In addition, a random number value other than these may be used in order to enhance the game effect. These random number values MR1 to MR5 may be counted by software update using different random counters in the CPU 103, or may be updated by the random number circuit 104. The random number circuit 104 may be built in the game control microcomputer 100, or may be configured as a random number circuit chip different from the game control microcomputer 100.

In this embodiment, each random value MR1 to MR5 is used as a value in the range shown in FIG. 5, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the range of each random value MR1 to MR5. May be different depending on the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

FIG. 8-5 shows the fluctuation pattern in this embodiment. Hereinafter, the fluctuation pattern of non-reach loss is also referred to as a non-reach fluctuation pattern, and the fluctuation pattern of reach loss is also referred to as a reach fluctuation pattern. Further, the fluctuation pattern in which the display result is "big hit" is also referred to as a big hit fluctuation pattern, and the fluctuation pattern in which the display result is "small hit" is also referred to as a small hit fluctuation pattern.

The jackpot fluctuation pattern and the reach fluctuation pattern include a normal reach fluctuation pattern in which a normal reach reach effect is executed and a super reach fluctuation pattern in which a super reach reach effect such as super reach α and super reach β is executed. In this embodiment, only one type of normal reach variation pattern is provided, but the present invention is not limited to this, and like the super reach, a plurality of normal reach α, normal reach β, ... A variation pattern may be provided. Further, as for the super reach fluctuation pattern, three or more super reach fluctuation patterns such as super reach γ may be provided in addition to the super reach α and the super reach β.

In the ROM 101, for example, a display result determination table (setting value 1), a display result determination table (setting value 2), a display result determination table (setting value 3), a jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol), and a jackpot type determination A table (for the second special symbol), a small hit type determination table, etc. are stored.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment has a configuration in which the winning probability (ball output rate) of a big hit and a small hit changes according to a set value. For example, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing, the winning probability (ball output rate) of the big hit and the small hit is changed by using the display result determination table (winning probability) according to the set value. The set value is composed of three stages of 1 to 3, with 1 having the highest payout rate and increasing the value in the order of 1, 2 and 3 to lower the payout rate. That is, when 1 is set as the set value, the advantage is highest for the player, and the larger the value in the order of 2 or 3, the lower the advantage is stepwise.

FIG. 8-6 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table. In the display result determination table, a hit determination value to be compared with MR1 is set. In the display result determination table, the variable special figure designation buffer is 1 (first), that is, the first special symbol is the target of the variable display and the variable special figure designation buffer is 2 (second). That is, for each of the cases where the second special symbol is the target of the variable display, a judgment value for a big hit and a judgment value for a small hit are set.

FIG. 8-6 (A) shows a display result determination table corresponding to the set value 1. When the display result determination table corresponding to the set value 1 is used, when the variable special symbol designation buffer is the first, that is, when the first special symbol is the target of the variable display, the set value is ". It is set because a big hit is won with a higher probability (1/99) than in the case of "2" and "3", and a part of these judgment values is set as a judgment value corresponding to a small hit. The small hit is won with a higher probability (1/50) than when the values are "2" and "3". When the display result judgment table corresponding to the set value 1 is used and the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, the judgment value corresponding to the jackpot is the same as when the variable special figure designation buffer is the first. Even when the judgment value of is set and the second special symbol is the target of the variable display, the jackpot has the same probability (1/99) as when the first special symbol is the target of the variable display. In addition to winning the prize, half of these judgment values are set as judgment values corresponding to small hits, so that the probability (100/200) is higher than when the first special symbol is targeted for variable display. ) To win a small hit.

FIG. 8-6 (B) shows a display result determination table corresponding to the set value 2. When the display result judgment table corresponding to the set value 2 is used, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, the jackpot is hit with a lower probability (1/150) than when the set value is "1". By winning and some of these judgment values are set as judgment values corresponding to small hits, there is a lower probability (1/99) of small hits than when the set value is "1". You are supposed to win. When the display result judgment table corresponding to the set value 2 is used, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, the judgment value corresponding to the jackpot is the same as when the variable special figure designation buffer is the first. Even when the judgment value of is set and the second special symbol is the target of the variable display, the jackpot has the same probability (1/150) as when the first special symbol is the target of the variable display. In addition to winning the prize, half of these judgment values are set as judgment values corresponding to small hits, so that the probability is higher than when the first special symbol is targeted for variable display. , The small hit is won with the same probability (100/200) as when the set value is "1".

FIG. 8-6 (C) shows a display result determination table corresponding to the set value 3. When the display result judgment table corresponding to the set value 3 is used, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, the judgment value corresponding to the big hit is set, but the judgment value corresponding to the small hit is If it is not set, and therefore the first special symbol is the target of variable display, it will be a big hit with a lower probability (1/200) than when the set values are "1" and "2". Wins, but does not win small hits (winning probability: 0). When the display result judgment table corresponding to the set value 3 is used, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, the judgment value corresponding to the jackpot is the same as when the variable special figure designation buffer is the first. Even when the judgment value of is set and the second special symbol is the target of the variable display, the jackpot has the same probability (1/200) as when the first special symbol is the target of the variable display. In addition to winning the prize, half of these judgment values are set as judgment values corresponding to small hits, so that the probability is higher than when the first special symbol is targeted for variable display. , The small hit is won with the same probability (100/200) as when the set values are "1" and "2".

The CPU 103 refers to the display result determination table corresponding to the set value set at that time, and when the value of MR1 matches any of the hit determination values corresponding to the jackpot, the CPU 103 hits the jackpot (big hit A to) with respect to the special symbol. Decide to make a jackpot C). Further, when MR1 matches any of the hit determination values corresponding to the small hit, it is determined that the special symbol is a small hit. That is, the winning of the big hit and the small hit is decided with the probability according to the set value. The "probability" indicates the probability of a big hit (ratio) and the probability of a small hit (ratio). Determining whether or not to make a jackpot means determining whether or not to control the jackpot game state, but the stop symbol in the first special symbol display 4A or the second special symbol display 4B is a jackpot symbol. It also means deciding whether or not to do it. Further, determining whether or not to make a small hit means determining whether or not to control the small hit game state, but stop at the first special symbol display 4A or the second special symbol display 4B. It also means deciding whether or not to make the symbol a small hit symbol. In this way, the probability of being controlled to the big hit game state or the small hit game state differs depending on the set value. Therefore, if the set value is changed, 1 is set in a plurality of settings having different advantages for the player. Will be changed to another setting.

In this embodiment, in each display result determination table, the winning probabilities of small hits when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second are all the same, but the small hits are in the order of the set values 1, 2, and 3. The winning probability may be low. On the other hand, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, the winning probability of the small hit is reduced in the order of the set values 1, 2, and 3, but the same as when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second In addition, the same winning probability may be used for all the set values.

In this embodiment, the CPU 103 uses the display result determination table to determine whether or not to make a big hit or a small hit. However, the big hit determination table and the small hit determination table are separately provided to determine whether or not to make a big hit or a small hit. Judgment is made using a common table for the case of the fluctuation display of the first special symbol and the case of the fluctuation display of the second special symbol regardless of the variable special symbol designation buffer, and the judgment of the small hit is made. A separate table may be used depending on whether the variable special diagram designation buffer is the first or the second.

In this embodiment, when the display result judgment table corresponding to the set value 3 is used and the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, a judgment value other than the judgment value corresponding to the big hit is used as the judgment value corresponding to the small hit. It was not set, that is, the small hit was not won, but a part of the judgment value other than the judgment value corresponding to the big hit is set as the judgment value corresponding to the small hit so that the small hit is won. It may be. That is, the fact that the ratio of the small hit probability differs depending on the set value includes that the small hit probability is 0%.

In this embodiment, a total of three set values, 1 to 3, are provided as set values that can be set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not limited to this. The set value that can be set to is 2 or 4 or more (for example, 6). Further, the player's advantage according to the set value is not limited to the one in which the smaller the set value, the higher the advantage for the player, and the larger the set value, the higher the advantage for the player. May be good. For example, when the set value consists of 6 levels from 1 to 6, 1 has the lowest ball output rate, and the larger the value in the order of 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, and 6, the higher the ball output rate, and 6 is. It may be the one with the highest ball output rate. In this way, the larger the value, the lower the advantage for the player when 1 is set as the set value, and the highest advantage for the player when 6 is set. The degree of advantage may be gradually increased.

FIG. 8-7 is an explanatory diagram showing a large hit type determination table and a small hit type determination table. In the jackpot type determination table, when it is determined that the variable display result is a jackpot symbol, the jackpot type is selected from jackpot A to jackpot C based on the random number (MR2) for determining the jackpot type. Referenced to determine. In the small hit type determination table, when it is determined that the variation display result is a small hit symbol, the small hit type is set to small hit A or small hit B based on the random number (MR2) for determining the hit type. Referenced to determine. In this embodiment, when the game ball passes through the third count switch during the small hit game of the small hit A, that is, when the V winning big hit occurs, the big hit game of the big hit type D is executed. It has become. Further, when the game ball passes through the third count switch during the small hit game of the small hit B, that is, when the V winning big hit occurs, the big hit game of the big hit type E is executed. .. These jackpots D and jackpot E are not the jackpot types determined by the random value MR2 for determining the hit type extracted at the time of starting winning, but the game ball is the first during the small hit game of either the small hit A or the small hit B. It is a jackpot type determined by whether or not it has passed the 3-count switch.

FIG. 8-7 (A) shows a jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol). The jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol) uses the hold memory based on the game ball winning the first start winning opening (that is, when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed) to select the jackpot type. Referenced when deciding.

FIG. 8-7 (B) shows a jackpot type determination table (for the second special symbol). The jackpot type determination table (for the second special symbol) uses the hold memory based on the game ball winning the second start winning opening (that is, when the variation display of the second special symbol is performed) to select the jackpot type. Referenced when deciding.

FIG. 8-7 (C) shows a small hit type determination table. The small hit type determination table is referred to when determining the small hit type regardless of whether the game ball is a reserved memory based on which of the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening is won. ..

FIG. 8-8 is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot type in this embodiment. In this embodiment, the jackpot types include jackpot A and jackpot D in which the time saving control is not executed after the end of the jackpot gaming state, and jackpot B, jackpot C, and jackpot E in which the time saving control is executed after the jackpot gaming state ends. It is set. Of these jackpots A to E, jackpot C and jackpot E are considered to be the most advantageous jackpots for the player, and jackpots A and jackpot D are considered to be the most disadvantageous jackpots for the player. Further, since the big hit E is a big hit that is more advantageous than the big hit D, the small hit B is a small hit that is more advantageous than the small hit A.

Of these jackpots A to jackpot E, jackpot A is a jackpot that is repeatedly executed five rounds (so-called five rounds) that change the first jackpot into a second state that is advantageous to the player. Further, the time saving control is not executed after the end of the jackpot gaming state of the jackpot A. The jackpot B is a jackpot that is repeatedly executed 10 rounds (so-called 10 rounds) that change the first jackpot into a second state that is advantageous to the player. Further, after the end of the big hit game state of the big hit B, the time saving control is executed until the special figure game is executed 20 times or until the big hit occurs again by the time when the special figure game is executed 20 times. The jackpot C is a jackpot that is repeatedly executed 15 rounds (so-called 15 rounds) that change the first jackpot into a second state that is advantageous to the player. Further, after the end of the big hit game state of the big hit C, the time saving control is executed until the special figure game is executed 100 times or until the big hit occurs again by the time when the special figure game is executed 100 times. The jackpot D is a jackpot that is repeatedly executed four times (so-called four rounds) that change the second big winning opening into a second state that is advantageous to the player. Further, the time saving control is not executed after the end of the big hit game state of the big hit D. The jackpot E is a jackpot that is repeatedly executed 14 rounds (so-called 14 rounds) that change the second jackpot into a second state that is advantageous to the player. Further, after the end of the big hit game state of the big hit E, the time saving control is executed until the special figure game is executed 100 times or until the big hit occurs again by the time when the special figure game is executed 100 times.

In the jackpot D and the jackpot E, the jackpot to be opened is the second jackpot, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the jackpot D and the jackpot E are the jackpots to be opened. , It may be the first prize opening. That is, for the small hit game, the second big prize opening is opened, and for the big hit D and the big hit E based on the occurrence of the V prize during the small hit game, the first big hit game is replaced with the second big prize opening. All you have to do is open the big prize opening.

In the time-saving state, a small hit is more likely to occur than in the normal state because the probability of becoming a "normal figure hit" increases. For this reason, in the time saving state, a big hit may occur as a result of the fluctuation display of the second special symbol, or a big hit may occur when the game ball wins a V during the small hit game, so the big hit game state is usually It tends to occur continuously without going through the state, and it becomes a so-called continuous chan state.

In the time saving state after the big hit game of the big hit B is completed, the number of special figure games in which the time saving control is executed is set to 20 times, so that a small hit occurs during the 20 special figure games and the game ball is the first. The rate of passing through the 3-count switch (the rate at which a game ball wins a V and a big hit occurs during 20 special game games) is set to about 50%. On the other hand, in the time saving state after the big hit game of the big hit C and the big hit E, the number of special figure games in which the time saving control is executed is set to 100 times, so that a small hit occurs during the 100 special figure games. , The rate at which the game ball passes through the third count switch (the rate at which the game ball wins a V and a big hit occurs during 100 special figure games) is set to almost 100%.

In this embodiment, five types of jackpots A to E are provided as jackpot types, but the present invention is not limited to this, and six or more jackpot types may be provided, and 4 The following types may be provided.

In the jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol), when the set value is "1", 0 to 49 out of the range 0 to 299 of the determination value of MR2 is assigned to jackpot A, and 50 ~ 149 are assigned to jackpot B, and 150 to 299 are assigned to jackpot C. When the set value is "2", out of the range 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2, 0 to 99 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 100 to 249 are assigned to the jackpot B. 250 to 299 are assigned to jackpot C. When the set value is "3", out of the range 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2, 0 to 149 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 150 to 249 are assigned to the jackpot B. 250 to 299 are assigned to jackpot C. In this way, when a big hit occurs in the special figure game of the first special symbol, the ratio of determining the big hit B or the big hit C for which the time saving control is executed at the end of the big hit game is lower in the order of the set values 1, 2, and 3. I am trying to be.

In the jackpot type determination table (for the second special symbol), when the set value is "1", 0 to 29 out of the range 0 to 299 of the determination value of MR2 is assigned to jackpot A, and 30 ~ 99 are assigned to jackpot B, and 100 to 299 are assigned to jackpot C. When the set value is "2", out of the range 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2, 0 to 69 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 70 to 269 are assigned to the jackpot B. 270 to 299 are assigned to jackpot C. When the set value is "3", out of the range 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2, 0 to 199 is assigned to the jackpot A, and 200 to 269 are assigned to the jackpot B. 270 to 299 are assigned to jackpot C. In this way, when a jackpot occurs in the special symbol game of the second special symbol, the ratio of determining the jackpots B and C for which the time saving control is executed at the end of the jackpot game is the jackpot in the special symbol game of the first special symbol. Is higher than when the above occurs, and the set values are lowered in the order of 1, 2, and 3.

In this embodiment, when the set value is 1, the ratio of determining the jackpot type to jackpot C is the highest, then the percentage of determining jackpot B is high, and the percentage of determining jackpot A is high. The lowest (Big hit type determination ratio in set value 1: Big hit C> Big hit B> Big hit A). When the set value is 2, the jackpot type is determined to be jackpot B at the highest rate, followed by jackpot A at the highest rate, and jackpot C is determined at the lowest rate (set value). Big hit type determination ratio in 2: Big hit B> Big hit A> Big hit C). Further, when the set value is 3, the ratio of determining the jackpot type to jackpot A is the highest, then the percentage of determining jackpot B is the highest, and the percentage of determining the jackpot C is the lowest. (Big hit type determination ratio in set value 3: Big hit A> Big hit B> Big hit C).

Depending on the set value, there may be one or more jackpot types that have not been determined among the jackpot A, jackpot B, and jackpot C. In other words, if the determination rate of the jackpot type differs depending on the set value, one of the jackpot types should not be determined (the determination rate is 0%), or a specific jackpot type should be 100%. Included in determining by percentage.

In the small hit type judgment table, when the set value is "1", out of the range 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2, 0 to 99 are assigned to the small hit A, and 100 to 299 are small. It is assigned to hit B. When the set value is "2", out of the range 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2, 0 to 149 are assigned to the small hit A, and 150 to 299 are assigned to the small hit B. There is. When the set value is "3", out of the range 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2, 0 to 199 are assigned to the small hit A, and 200 to 299 are assigned to the small hit B. There is. In this way, when a V-winning jackpot occurs during the small hit game, the ratio of determining the jackpot E, in which the number of special figure games in which the time reduction control is executed after the jackpot game ends is 100, is 20 times. It is higher than the ratio for determining the jackpot D, and is lower in the order of the set values 1, 2, and 3.

In this embodiment, when the set value is 1, the small hit B is determined at a higher rate than the small hit A as the small hit type, so that a V prize is generated during the small hit game. The rate at which the jackpot type is determined as the jackpot E is higher than the rate at which the jackpot type is determined based on the above (the percentage of the jackpot type determined by the V prize at the set value 1: jackpot E> jackpot D). Further, when the set value is 2, small hit A and small hit B are determined at the same ratio as the small hit type, so that a V prize is generated during the small hit game. Based on the above, the ratio of the jackpot type determined to be the jackpot D and the proportion determined to the jackpot E are equal (the percentage of the jackpot type determined by the V prize in the set value 2: jackpot E = jackpot D). Further, when the set value is 3, the small hit A is determined at a higher rate than the small hit B as the small hit type, and the V prize is generated during the small hit game. The rate at which the jackpot type is determined as the jackpot D is higher than the rate at which the jackpot E is determined (the percentage of the jackpot type determined by the V prize at the set value 1: jackpot D> jackpot E).

As described above, in this embodiment, the determination ratio of the jackpot type when the variable display result is a jackpot and the determination ratio of the jackpot type when a V prize occurs are different according to the set value. That is, the type of the small hit game state controlled according to the set value may change, and the type of the big hit game state controlled when the V prize occurs may change. It is possible to improve the game entertainment.

Depending on the set value, there may be a small hit type that is not determined among the small hit A and the small hit B. That is, if the determination ratio of the small hit type differs depending on the set value, one of the small hit types is not determined (the determination ratio is 0%), that is, the other small hit. It also includes determining the type at a rate of 100%. Further, the determination ratio of the small hit type may be different depending on whether the variable special figure is the first special figure or the second special figure. When the small hit type is determined at a different ratio according to the variable special map, there may be a small hit type that is not determined among the small hit A and the small hit B, depending on the variable special map. That is, in order to determine the small hit type at different ratios according to the fluctuation special chart, one of the small hit types is not determined (the determination ratio is 0%), that is, the other small hit type is determined. It also includes determining at a rate of 100%. At least one of the big hit type and the small hit type may be determined by using MR1 which is a random value for determining the special figure display result. The larger the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the more advantageous it may be for the player. The big hit type and the small hit type are not limited to those having different determination ratios depending on the set value, and the big hit type and the small hit type may be determined by the same determination ratio for all the set values.

The game playability itself is not limited to the one that does not change regardless of the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1, and the game playability may change according to the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/320, and the probability variation state is 65%, which is the game property (so-called probability variation loop type). When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 2, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/200, and the jackpot game ends based on the game ball passing through the third count switch during the jackpot game. While controlling the later gaming state to the probabilistic state, the pachinko gaming machine 1 has a different game property (so-called V probabilistic type) in which the ratio of the game ball passing through the third count switch during the big hit game according to the fluctuation special figure. When the set value set to is 3, the jackpot probability is 1/320 and the small hit probability is 1/50, and the game ball passes through the third count switch during high base (during time reduction control). Based on this, the game property (so-called 1 type 2 type mixed type) that controls the jackpot gaming state may be used. Further, although the set values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are the same as those set in 1 to 3, the jackpot probability and the small hit probability are higher than in the case where these set values are any of 1 to 3. A setting in which the number of prize balls that can be obtained during the jackpot game is small (for example, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 4) may be provided. When the playability is changed according to the set value, a common switch may be used for different purposes. Specifically, when the set value is 1 or 4, the third count switch is used as an effect switch (a switch for executing a predetermined effect each time the game ball passes through the third count switch). When the set value is 2 or 3, the third count switch is used as a game switch (a switch for controlling the game state to the probability change state or the jackpot game state based on the game ball passing through the third count switch). You may use it.

The ROM 101 stores a variation pattern determination table for determining the variation pattern based on the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern. The variation pattern determination table is used to determine one of a plurality of types of variation patterns according to the result of prior determination. As the fluctuation pattern judgment table, it is determined in advance that the fluctuation pattern judgment table for big hits used when it is decided in advance that the fluctuation display result is "big hit" and the fluctuation display result is "small hit". A variation pattern determination table for jackpots used at the time of occurrence and a variation pattern determination table for deviation used when it is determined in advance that the variation display result is "out of place" are prepared in advance.

FIG. 8-9 is an explanatory diagram showing a large hit variation pattern determination table and a small hit variation pattern determination table. The jackpot variation pattern determination table is referred to for determining the variation pattern based on the random number value MR3 for the variation pattern determination when it is determined that the variation display result is the jackpot symbol. The variation pattern determination table for small hits is referred to for determining the variation pattern based on the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern when it is determined that the variation display result is to be a small hit symbol.

FIG. 8-9 (A) shows a fluctuation pattern determination table for jackpot A (for jackpot A). The jackpot variation pattern determination table (for jackpot A) is referred to when the jackpot type is jackpot A. In the jackpot fluctuation pattern judgment table (for jackpot A), when the set value is "1", the normal reach jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB1-1) is from 0 to 300 in the range 0 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3. ), And 301 to 800 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α jackpot (PB1-2), and 801 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β jackpot (PB1-3). ing. When the set value is "2", out of the range 0 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 0 to 350 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-1) of the normal reach jackpot, and 351 to 825 are assigned. It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α jackpot (PB1-2), and 826 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β jackpot (PB1-3). When the set value is "3", out of the range 0 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 0 to 400 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-1) of the normal reach jackpot, and 401 to 850 are assigned. It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α jackpot (PB1-2), and 851 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β jackpot (PB1-3).

FIG. 8-9 (B) shows a fluctuation pattern determination table for jackpots (for jackpot B and jackpot C). The jackpot variation pattern determination table (for jackpot B and jackpot C) is referred to when the jackpot type is jackpot B or jackpot C. In the jackpot fluctuation pattern judgment table (for jackpot B and jackpot C), when the set value is "1", the fluctuation pattern of the normal reach jackpot is from 0 to 100 in the range 0 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3 (for jackpot B and jackpot C). It is assigned to PB1-1), 101-350 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach α jackpot (PB1-2), and 351 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach β jackpot (PB1-3). Is assigned to. When the set value is "2", out of the range 0 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 0 to 150 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-1) of the normal reach jackpot, and 151 to 450 are assigned. It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α jackpot (PB1-2), and 451 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β jackpot (PB1-3). When the set value is "3", out of the range 0 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 0 to 200 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-1) of the normal reach jackpot, and 201 to 550 are assigned. It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α jackpot (PB1-2), and 551 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β jackpot (PB1-3).

The fluctuation pattern judgment table for jackpot (for jackpot A) and the fluctuation pattern judgment table for jackpot (for jackpot B and jackpot C) include the fluctuation pattern of normal reach jackpot (PB1-1) and the fluctuation pattern of super reach α jackpot (PB1-). 2) For each fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation pattern (PB1-3) of the super reach β jackpot, a predetermined random number value within the range that the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern can take is assigned as a determination value. When the jackpot A is won in the special figure game, the ratio of determining the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α jackpot (PB1-2) is higher than the ratio of determining the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β jackpot (PB1-3). In addition, the set values are lowered in the order of 1, 2, and 3. Further, when the jackpot B or the jackpot C is won in the special figure game, the ratio of determining the fluctuation pattern (PB1-3) of the super reach β jackpot determines the fluctuation pattern (PB1-2) of the super reach α jackpot. It is higher than the ratio and lowers in the order of set values 1, 2, and 3. In this embodiment, the super reach β is easily determined when the jackpot type is “big hit B” or “big hit C”, and the super reach α is determined when the jackpot type is “big hit A”. By assigning the judgment value so that it is easy to be played, the player's expectation that the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β will be "big hit B" or "big hit C" is raised. Can be done.

FIG. 8-9 (C) shows a variation pattern determination table for small hits. In the variation pattern determination table for small hits, regardless of whether the set value is "1", "2", or "3", 0 to 997 out of the range 0 to 997 of the determination value of MR3 is a small hit. Is assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PC1-1) of. In the small hit variation pattern determination table, a predetermined random number value within the range that the variation pattern determination random number value MR3 can take is assigned as the determination value to the variation pattern of the small hit variation pattern (PC1-1). Has been done. Although only PC1-1 is provided as the variation pattern of the small hit in the present invention, the present invention is not limited to this, and two or more variation patterns are provided as the variation pattern of the small hit. With the set values "1", "2", and "3", the fluctuation pattern of the small hit may be determined from a plurality of fluctuation patterns at different ratios.

FIG. 8-10 is an explanatory diagram showing a variation pattern determination table for detachment. The deviation pattern determination table is referred to for determining the variation pattern based on the random value MR3 for determination of the variation pattern when it is determined that the variation display symbol is to be the detached symbol.

FIG. 8-10 (A) shows the deviation pattern determination table A. The deviation pattern determination table A is referred to when the number of reserved storages is 1 or less in the low base state in which the game state is not subjected to the time reduction control. In the deviation pattern determination table A, the non-reach deviation variation pattern without shortening (PA1-1), the normal reach deviation variation pattern (PA2-1), the super reach α deviation variation pattern (PA2-2), and the super A predetermined random number value within the range that the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern can take is assigned as the determination value to the variation pattern (PA2-3) out of reach β.

FIG. 8-10 (B) shows the deviation pattern determination table B. The deviation pattern determination table B is referred to when the total number of reserved storages is 2 to 4 in the low base state. In the deviation pattern determination table B, the shortened non-reach out-of-reach variation pattern (PA1-2), the normal reach out-of-reach variation pattern (PA2-1), and the super reach α corresponding to the total number of reserved storages of 2 to 4 are shown. A predetermined random number value is assigned as a determination value within the range that the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern can take for the deviation pattern (PA2-2) and the deviation pattern (PA2-3) of the super reach β. There is.

FIG. 8-10 (C) shows the deviation pattern determination table C. The deviation pattern determination table C is referred to when the total number of reserved storages is 5 to 8 in the low base state. In the deviation pattern determination table C, the shortened non-reach deviation variation pattern (PA1-3), the normal reach deviation variation pattern (PA2-1), and the super reach α corresponding to the total number of reserved storages of 5 to 8 are obtained. A predetermined random number value is assigned as a determination value within the range that the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern can take for the deviation pattern (PA2-2) and the deviation pattern (PA2-3) of the super reach β. There is.

FIG. 8-10 (D) shows the deviation pattern determination table D. The deviation pattern determination table D is referred to when the gaming state is a high base state in which time reduction control is performed. In the deviation pattern determination table D, the shortening non-reach deviation variation pattern (PA1-4), the normal reach deviation variation pattern (PA2-1), and the super reach α deviation variation pattern (PA2) corresponding to the time reduction control are shown. -2), A predetermined random number value is assigned as a determination value within the range that the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern can take for the variation pattern (PA2-3) out of the super reach β.

When the deviation pattern determination tables A to D are used, the ratio of determining the non-reach variation pattern or the normal reach variation pattern is higher than that of determining the super reach variation pattern, and is lower in the order of set values 1, 2, and 3. It is supposed to be. When the deviation pattern determination tables A to D are used, 701 to 900 of the determination values are the fluctuation patterns of the super reach α deviation, and 901 to 997 are the deviation patterns of the super reach β, regardless of the fluctuation pattern determination table. If each variation pattern is assigned, that is, if the variation display result is out of alignment, the super reach variation pattern is determined at a common decision rate regardless of the set value, so the super reach variation pattern It is possible to prevent the effect from being lowered due to the fact that the variable display is not executed.

The "common decision rate" is one in which the decision rate is completely the same with different set values (this embodiment) and one in which the decision rate is the same with different set values (for example, the set value). The determination rate of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach differs by about 1% between 1 and the set value 3). If the variation display result is out of order, it is not limited to the form in which the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach is the same regardless of the set value, and if the variation display result is out of order, Regardless of the set value, the determination ratio of all the fluctuation patterns of non-reach, normal reach, and super reach may be the same, and only the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern of any of non-reach and normal reach may be the same. It may be the same. If the fluctuation display result is out of order, the set value is set so that both the determination rate of the fluctuation pattern of Super Reach α and the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern of Super Reach β are set regardless of the set value. Regardless of the form, it is not limited to the same form, and if the variation display result is out of alignment, only one of the determination rate of the variation pattern out of Super Reach α and the determination rate of the variation pattern out of Super Reach β is available. The determination ratio of is the same regardless of the set value. If the fluctuation display result is out of order, the set value is set so that both the determination rate of the fluctuation pattern of Super Reach α and the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern of Super Reach β are set regardless of the set value. Regardless of the form, it is not limited to the same form, and even when the variation display result is a jackpot, the setting value in which the determination rate of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach jackpot is set regardless of the set value. It may be the same regardless of. If the variation display result is out of alignment, it is not limited to the form in which the determination rate of the variation pattern of non-reach or normal reach differs depending on the set value, and it is not limited to the set value. Of the reach variation pattern and the normal reach variation pattern, there may be one or more undetermined variation patterns. If the determination rate of the fluctuation pattern differs depending on the set value, one of the variation patterns should not be determined (the determination rate is 0%), or a specific variation pattern is set to 100%. It is also included to decide with. It is not limited to the form in which the fluctuation pattern is determined using the deviation pattern determination table that differs depending on the total number of reserved storages, and the number of reserved storages in the special symbol to be changed (for example, the fluctuation display of the first special symbol). The variation pattern is changed using the deviation pattern determination table, which differs depending on the number of reserved memory of the first special symbol when executing, and the number of reserved memory of the second special symbol when executing the variation display of the second special symbol. May be determined.

In each deviation pattern determination table, regardless of the numerical value of 1 to 3 set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the fluctuation pattern of the super reach deviation (PA2-2 and PA2-3) is set. The range of assigned random numbers is the same. However, since the jackpot probability and the loss probability differ depending on the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the rate at which the fluctuation display is actually executed in the fluctuation pattern of the super reach loss (super reach loss). The appearance rate of the fluctuation pattern) differs depending on the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. It should be noted that the variation display is not limited to a form in which the ratio of the variation display executed in the variation pattern out of super reach differs depending on the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the jackpot probability and the jackpot probability for each set value In consideration of the probability of loss, the variation display may be executed at the same rate regardless of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the variation pattern of the super reach deviation.

FIG. 8-11 shows the game control data holding area 150. The game control data holding area 150 is provided in the RAM 102 provided in the game control microcomputer 100, and serves as an area for holding various data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. The game control data holding area 150 includes a first special figure holding storage unit 151A, a second special figure holding storage unit 151B, a normal drawing holding storage unit 151C, a game control flag setting unit 152, and a game control timer setting unit. It includes 153, a game control counter setting unit 154, and a game control buffer setting unit 155.

The first special figure reservation storage unit 151A stores the hold data related to the variable display of the first special figure in the first special symbol display 4A. As an example, the first special figure reservation storage unit 151A associates the winning order (the order of detecting the game ball) with the first starting winning opening with the holding number, and determines the first starting condition by passing (entering) the game ball. Numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the fluctuation display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like by the CPU 103 based on the establishment are set as pending data. , Store until the number of stored items reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4"). The first starting condition is established when the game ball passes (enters) the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A and a starting winning is generated. The hold data stored in the first special figure hold storage unit 151A indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is held without being started yet, and the variation display result in this special figure game. It is pending information that makes it possible to judge whether or not it will be a big hit based on (special figure display result).

The second special figure reservation storage unit 151B stores the hold data related to the variable display of the second special figure on the second special symbol display 4B. As an example, the second special figure reservation storage unit 151B associates the winning order (the order of detecting the game ball) with the holding number with the second starting winning opening, and determines the second starting condition by passing (entering) the game ball. Numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the fluctuation display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like by the CPU 103 based on the establishment are set as pending data. , Store until the number of stored items reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4"). The second starting condition is established when the game ball passes (enters) the second starting winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B and a starting winning is generated. The hold data stored in the second special figure hold storage unit 151B indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is held without being started yet, and the variation display result in this special figure game. It is pending information that makes it possible to judge whether or not it will be a big hit based on (special figure display result).

It should be noted that the hold information (first hold information) based on the establishment of the first start condition due to the game ball passing (entering) through the first start winning opening and the game ball passing (entering) through the second start winning opening. The hold information (second hold information) based on the establishment of the second start winning prize may be stored in association with the hold number in the common hold storage unit. In this case, the start port data indicating which of the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening the game ball has passed (entered) may be included in the hold information and stored in association with the hold number. ..

The normal figure hold storage unit 151C stores the hold information of the normal figure game that has not yet been started by the normal symbol display 20 even though the game ball that has passed through the passing gate 41 is detected by the gate switch 21. For example, the normal map reservation storage unit 151C associates the game ball with the hold number in the order in which it has passed through the passing gate 41, and determines the normal figure display result extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like by the CPU 103 based on the passage of the game ball. Numerical data indicating the random number value MR4 for use is set as pending data, and is stored until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”).

The game control flag setting unit 152 is provided with a plurality of types of flags whose states can be updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control flag setting unit 152 stores data indicating a flag value and data indicating an on state or an off state for each of a plurality of types of flags. The game control timer setting unit 153 is provided with various timers used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control timer setting unit 153 stores data indicating timer values for each of a plurality of types of timers. The game control counter setting unit 154 is provided with a plurality of types of counters for counting the count values used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control counter setting unit 154 stores data indicating count values for each of a plurality of types of counters. Here, the game control counter setting unit 154 may be provided with a random counter for the CPU 103 to count a part or all of the game random numbers so that they can be updated by software. The game control buffer setting unit 155 is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control buffer setting unit 155 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

Random numbers not generated by the random number circuit 104, for example, numerical data indicating random numbers MR1 to MR4 are stored as random count values in the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 154, and are stored as random count values according to the execution of software by the CPU 103. Numerical data indicating each random number value is updated periodically or irregularly. The software executed by the CPU 103 to update the random count value may be for updating the random count value separately from the operation of updating the numerical data in the random number circuit 104, or may be extracted from the random number circuit 104. It may be for updating the random count value by performing a predetermined process such as scramble processing or arithmetic processing on all or a part of the numerical data.

The totalization of game balls and the display of the accessory ratio and the like on the main board 11 of this embodiment will be described. On the main board 11, information regarding the winning of the game, for example, the number of prize balls by winning the first starting winning opening (heso), the number of winning balls by winning the second starting winning opening (electric chew), the first large The number of prize balls and the total number of prize balls due to winning in the winning opening and the second major winning opening (attacker) are input, the number of launched balls is totaled, and the display monitor 29 displays the first large winning opening and the total number of winning balls. The ratio (%), which is the ratio of the number of prize balls by winning the second major winning opening (attacker), and the number of winning balls by winning the second starting winning opening (Denchu) out of the total number of prize balls The role ratio (%), which is the ratio of the number of prize balls from winning the 1st prize opening and the 2nd prize opening (attacker), and the base (%), which is the ratio of the total number of prize balls to the number of game balls launched. Is to be displayed. The ream ratio is the ratio of the total number of prize balls to the number of prize balls (the number of consecutive winning balls below) obtained by winning the first prize opening and the second prize opening (attacker). The role ratio is the number of prize balls by winning the 2nd starting prize opening (Denchu) and the number of prize balls by winning the 1st big prize opening and the 2nd big winning opening (attacker) out of the total number of prize balls ( This is the ratio of the number of balls acquired for the following characters). The base is the ratio of the number of game balls launched to the total number of prize balls. The total number of prize balls (total number of balls won below) is based on the number of prize balls by winning the 1st prize opening and the 2nd prize opening (attacker) and the winning of the 2nd starting prize opening (Denchu). The number of prize balls and the prize balls by winning the prizes (first start prize, general prize) other than the first prize, the second prize (attacker), and the second start prize (electric chew). It is the sum of numbers and. The first large winning opening, the second large winning opening (attacker), and the second starting winning opening (electric chew) are variable accessories, and the passable width of the game ball fluctuates to win the game ball. It is a character whose assumed ratio fluctuates. In addition, the winning openings (first starting winning opening, general winning opening) other than the first major winning opening, the second major winning opening (attacker), and the second starting winning opening (electric chew) are fixed characters, and the game The passable width of the ball is fixed, and the expected winning ratio of the game ball is a fixed value.

As for the aggregation and calculation method of the information on the prizes of the game, the consecutive ratio and the role ratio are the prize balls by winning the first starting prize opening (heso) and the general winning opening (sode) in the number of prize balls of 6000. Number (number of general prize balls), number of ordinary electric prize balls (number of electric chew prize balls), which is the number of prize balls due to winning in the second starting prize opening (electric chew), first large prize opening and second large prize The number of special electric service prize balls (the number of attacker prize balls), which is the number of prize balls for winning a prize in the mouth (attacker), is totaled. The total is taken as one set, and the continuous ratio (%) and the combination ratio (%) for 10 sets, that is, 60,000 pieces are calculated. In addition, the number of prize balls (general prize balls), the number of ordinary electric role prize balls (the number of electric chew prize balls), and the special electric power by winning the first start winning opening (Heso) and the general winning opening (Sode) The number of prize balls (number of attacker prize balls) is recorded in a ring buffer provided for each set value, has a recording capacity of at least 11 sets, and is updated for each set. ing. That is, a considerable amount (for example, several bytes) of 6000 pieces of 11 sets are stored, and the cumulative ratio (%) and combination ratio (%) of them can be calculated. As for the base, the number of game balls launched for the number of prize balls of 60,000 is totaled. The total is set as one set, and the ratio (base (%)) of 60,000 prize balls to the number of launched game balls is calculated.

The display monitor 29 is a base calculated based on the 6000 consecutive ratios (%), the winning combination (%), the cumulative continuous ratio (%), the winning combination (%), and the previous 60000 prize balls ( The base 1 (%)) and the base (base 2 (%)) calculated based on the immediately preceding 60,000 prize balls can be switched and displayed at predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds). That is, six displays are switched and displayed by one display means. In this case, it takes 30 seconds to display all, but the number of prize balls by winning the first start winning opening (navel) and the second starting winning opening (electric chew), which are totaled as the game progresses, The number of prize balls by winning, the number of prize balls by winning the first prize opening and the second prize opening (attacker) will change. Then, for example, if the number of prize balls won after displaying the continuous ratio (%) of 6000 pieces is reflected in the winning ratio (%) of 60,000 pieces displayed thereafter, it is equivalent to 6000 pieces. There is a risk that there will be a discrepancy between the joint ratio (%) and the combination ratio (%) for 60,000 pieces. Therefore, the number of prize balls by winning the first start winning opening (Heso), the number of winning balls by winning the second starting winning opening (Denchu), the first big winning opening and the second big winning opening (attacker) If the number of prize balls and the total number of prize balls due to winning are input and totaled at a predetermined timing in the switching display (for example, the display timing of the ratio (%) of 6000 pieces), such a discrepancy Can be prevented.

A storage area for storing information regarding the winning of the game in this embodiment is provided for each set value, and is provided for each set value, such as a general winning ball, a first starting mouth prize ball, an ordinary electric service award ball, and a special electric service award. The balls, the total prize balls, and the total hits are stored in the storage area (ring buffer) according to the set value. Therefore, the connection ratio, the combination ratio, and the base of this embodiment can be calculated individually for each set value.

Below, as an example of the calculation method, the total number of prize balls is 60,000, and the number of prize balls by winning the second starting prize opening (Denchu) and the first and second major winning openings (attackers) The calculation method of the bonus ratio (combined ratio (%)) when the number of winning balls, which is the total number of prize balls by winning the prize, is 42,000 will be described. In the following description, the total number of acquired balls means the total total number of game media (prize balls) paid out from the pachinko gaming machine 1. In addition, the number of winning balls for a character means the cumulative number of game media paid out by winning a prize in the attacker and the electric chew. In addition, the number of consecutive winning balls is the cumulative number of game media paid out by winning a prize in the game medium to the attacker. The total number of hits is the cumulative number of game media that have been hit into the pachinko gaming machine 1 before the number of prize balls reaches 60,000. Therefore, the connection ratio can be obtained by the following equation (1). Further, the combination ratio can be obtained by the following equation (2). The base can be obtained by the following equation (3).

Ream ratio = [Number of consecutive characters acquired / Total number of acquired characters] x 100 ... (1)

Role ratio = [(Number of consecutive winning balls + Number of winning balls) / Total number of acquisitions] x 100 ... (2)

Base = [60,000 (total number of prize balls) / total number of hits] x 100 ... (3)

When the total number of prize balls is 60,000 and the number of winning balls is 42,000, the prize ratio is calculated as 0.70 (three digits after the decimal point) by dividing 42000 by 60,000. However, since the microcomputer used in the pachinko gaming machine 1 cannot perform the calculation after the decimal point, the calculation by the following method is required.

First, the first calculation method will be described. In the first calculation method, first, the number of winning balls is multiplied by 100 to obtain 4200000. Then, this 4200000 is divided by 60,000. As a result, 70 is required as a quotient. From the 70 obtained here, the accessory ratio is calculated as 70%. That is, by multiplying the divisor by 100, the calculation result up to two digits after the decimal point can be obtained. Here, when obtaining the calculation result up to three digits after the decimal point, it may be multiplied by 1000.

Next, the second calculation method will be described. In the second calculation method, first, the total number of prize balls is divided by 100 to obtain 600. Then divide 42000 by this 600. As a result, 70 is required as a quotient. From the 70 obtained here, the accessory ratio is calculated as 70%. That is, by dividing the divisor by 100, the calculation result up to two digits after the decimal point can be obtained. Here, when obtaining the calculation result up to three digits after the decimal point, it may be divided by 1000.

In the above example, the total number of prize balls is 60,000, but a 3-byte area is provided as an area for storing the total number of prize balls in order to calculate the accessory ratio for a long period of time. That is, in this example, it is stored as 00EA60h in the storage area of 3 bytes. Similarly, 00A410h is stored in the storage area of 3 bytes for the number of winning balls. The microcomputer used in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can only perform calculations between values of up to 2 bytes. Therefore, in order to facilitate the operation, the lower 1 byte may be truncated.

A third calculation method obtained by simplifying the second calculation method will be described. In the third calculation method, the lower 1 byte 60h is truncated from the total number of prize balls of 00EA60h so that the calculation by the microcomputer used in the pachinko game machine 1 can be facilitated, and the total number of prize balls is 00EAh, that is, Calculate 234 in decimal notation. Similarly, for 00A410h, which is the number of winning balls, the lower 1 byte, 10h, is rounded down, and the number of winning balls is 00A4h, that is, 164 is calculated in decimal notation. Then, in the same manner as in the second calculation method, the total number of prize balls is divided by 100 (273/100) to calculate 2. Then, this 2 is divided by 156 to obtain 78 as a quotient. From 78 obtained here, the accessory ratio is calculated as 78%. In the third calculation method, the calculation by the microcomputer used in the pachinko gaming machine 1 becomes easy, but an error of + 12% occurs. However, if the total number of prize balls and the number of winning balls are both 10 times, the error will be + 1%. That is, the error is reduced by lengthening the period for calculating the accessory ratio, and is approximated to the original value.

In the calculation of the winning combination (%), for example, assuming that the total number of acquired balls is 34321 and the number of winning balls is 19876, 34321 is divided as a divisor from 19876 to calculate the ratio. 1976/34321 = 0.57912 ..., And it is calculated that the role ratio (%) is about 57.9%. When performing calculations on the game control microcomputer 100, it is necessary to avoid calculation with a decimal point, so the calculation formula is replaced with the following formula. In the division of 1976/34321, the denominator 34321 is divided by 100 and the decimal point is rounded down so that 1976/343 = 57.9475 ... Since the part after the decimal point is rounded down, it is calculated that the ratio (%) is 57%, and it is displayed on the display monitor 29. There will be no.

The minimum value in 16 bits is 32768 (0 except for the value of the most significant bit), and the value with the maximum error is when the total number of acquired balls and the number of accessory acquired balls are 32799, respectively. When this is calculated by the above method, 32799/32799 = 100%, and when replaced with the calculation by the game control microcomputer 100, 32799/327 = 100.3%, which is an error of + 0.3%. When the calculation is performed with the decimal point truncated, for example, when the accurate value is 69.9% and the value calculated by the game control microcomputer is 70.1%, the display value is 69% → 70%. It is conceivable that an error of% is displayed, but even on the display of an error of 1%, the combination ratio (%) (or the connection ratio (%)) can be displayed with a very small error.

Further, when the above calculation method is used, the total number of acquired balls is divided by 100, so that the calculation cannot be performed when the total number of acquired balls is less than 100. Further, when it is less than 32768, the error gradually increases. If it is less than 10,000, the error may exceed 1%, resulting in a larger error. That is, the smaller the total number of acquired balls, the larger the error. Therefore, the combination ratio (%) and the connection ratio (%) may not be displayed on the display monitor until the total number of acquired balls (for example, 32768, which is the minimum value of 16 bits) of a specific number or more is totaled by the counter. , Even if the display is performed, it may be notified that the error may be large by emitting a dedicated LED, outputting a notification sound, or blinking the displayed value.

The storage area in which the information regarding the winning of the game is stored may be continuously stored without being initialized when the clear switch AK001 or the like is operated. This storage area may constitute a 10-set total buffer, a total number of prize balls buffer, etc., which is a total of information on winning a game stored in a ring buffer including a ring buffer and having 10 counters of up to 2 bytes. .. In addition, the checksum of the stored value is calculated, and if an abnormality is detected, it is initialized, or the value of the number of winning balls is larger than the value of the total number of stored prize balls, or the character is Initialization of the storage area where information related to winning a game is stored when an event that cannot occur in a situation is detected, such as when the value of the number of consecutive winning balls is larger than the value of the number of acquired balls. Processing may be performed. Further, an error display or a warning display may be performed without performing the initialization process, an error display or a warning display may be performed, or an initialization process may be performed after the error display or the warning display is performed.

When a failure occurs in the calculation of the connection ratio or the combination ratio, or when the calculation of the connection ratio or the combination ratio has to be redone, the display monitor clear switch different from the clear switch AK001 is operated. By doing so, the data used for the connection ratio and the combination ratio stored in the non-volatile storage device such as the RAM 102 or the flash memory may be cleared. The display monitor clearing switch may be arranged on the back side surface of the game board 2 at a position such as a predetermined position of the power supply board 17 that cannot be easily operated by the staff of the game hall or the like. When the display monitor clear switch is operated, a display monitor clear signal different from the clear signal is transmitted to the main board 11.

The substrate case 201 is made of a translucent material so that the main substrate 11 and the display monitor 29 can be visually recognized. The board case 201 is formed with a hole (not shown) through which a wiring connector connected to the main board 11 is inserted, and a heat radiating hole for releasing heat of an electric component of the main board 11. The display monitor 29 provided on the main board 11 is arranged at a position where the heat dissipation hole is not directly in front of the main board 11. Therefore, the heat dissipation holes do not block the visibility of the display monitor 29. The "direct front" here means a direct front with the main board 11 as a viewpoint, and means between a staff member or the like of a game hall who wants to visually recognize the main board 11 and the main board 11.

The display monitor 29 displays the combination ratio (%), the connection ratio (%), and the base (%) on 7 segments, and each value is switched and displayed every predetermined period (for example, every 5 seconds). To do. In this case, for example, while the combination ratio (%) is displayed for 5 seconds, an event occurs in which a new game medium is awarded to the electric chew or the attacker, and the value calculated accordingly is continuously compared after 5 seconds ( If it is displayed as a value of%), there is a risk that the value of the combination ratio (%) and the value of the consecutive combination (%) will deviate. Therefore, it is preferable that the combination ratio (%) and the connection ratio (%) are calculated in the same interrupt and the calculated values are sequentially displayed. When the numerical value that can be displayed in the 7-segment is double-digit (for example, when two 7-segments are provided), 100% is set as 100 and the display cannot be performed. In this case, 99 may be displayed instead of 100. Although the display monitor 29 can display a numerical value in the lower two digits, even in this case, the numerical value may be displayed without using the upper two digits. Alternatively, under certain conditions, a numerical value may be displayed in a part of the upper two digits. It should be noted that the attacker is not limited to a form in which the sensors provided in each of the attacker and the electric chew detect that the game medium has won a prize, and the number of each prize ball is individually totaled based on the detection result. The number of winning balls and the number of continuous winning balls are based on the detection result using the sensor provided after the discharge passages from which the winning game medium and the winning game medium are discharged are merged. May be aggregated.

The main board 11 is provided on the back surface side of the game board 2. On the back surface side of the game board 2, in addition to the main board 11, each peripheral board such as the effect control board 12 is also provided. The RAM 102 in the main board 11 includes a gate passing number counter, a first starting winning number counter, a second starting winning number counter, a first general winning number counter, a second general winning number counter, a third general winning number counter, and a fourth. A general prize counter and a large prize counter are provided. It should be noted that the number of winnings of the first major winning opening and the second major winning opening (attacker) is not limited to the form of totaling with the large winning number counter, and the number of winnings to these first major winning openings is totaled. A counter for the number of first prizes and a counter for the number of prizes for the second prize, which totals the number of prizes for the second prize, are separately provided, and the number of prizes for the first prize and the number of prizes for the second prize are set separately. The number of winnings may be totaled individually, and the total number of each of these winnings may be used as the number of winnings to the attacker.

The gate passing number counter is a counter that counts the number of game balls detected by the gate switch 21. The first start winning number counter is a counter that counts the number of game balls detected by the first start port switch 22A. The second start winning number counter is a counter that counts the number of game balls detected by the second start port switch 22B. The first general winning number counter is a counter that counts the number of game balls detected by the first general winning opening switch 26A. The second general winning number counter is a counter that counts the number of game balls detected by the second general winning opening switch 26B. The third general winning number counter is a counter that counts the number of game balls detected by the third general winning opening switch 26C. The fourth general winning number counter is a counter that counts the number of game balls detected by the fourth general winning opening switch 26D. The large prize number counter is a counter that counts the number of game balls detected by the first count switch 23 and the second count switch 24A.

FIG. 8-12 shows the arrangement and display contents of the display monitor 29. The main board 11 is housed in the board case 201. A caulking pin 11B is attached to the board case 201. By providing the caulking pin 11B, the main board 11 is completely enclosed in the board case 201, and fraudulent acts on the main board 11 are prevented. The substrate case 201 is a crimped substrate case (hereinafter, also referred to as a “crimped substrate case”). The display monitor 29 is provided on the main board 11. Further, a sealing sticker 11S is attached to the substrate case 201 to prove that the main substrate 11 is enclosed. The sealing sticker 11S is attached, for example, across the removed portion of the substrate case 201. The sealing sticker 11S is arranged at a position away from the main board 11, and is arranged at a position different from the position where the visibility of the display monitor 29 is obstructed, such as directly in front of the display monitor 29. In this way, the display monitor 29 is arranged at a position not hidden by the sealing sticker 11S.

As shown in FIG. 8-12 (A), the display monitor 29 includes a first display unit 29A, a second display unit 29B, a third display unit 29C, a fourth display unit 29D, and a fifth display unit 29E. .. The first display unit 29A to the fifth display unit 29E are each composed of seven segments composed of seven segments drawing the character "8" and dots arranged on the lower right side of the seven segments. These first display units 29A to fifth display units 29E can be lit and blinked in various colors such as red, blue, green, yellow, and white, respectively. It is also possible to display different colors or so-called rainbows while changing these colors in a very short cycle.

As shown in FIG. 8-12 (B), each item of display Nos. 1 to 6 is displayed on the display monitor 29. The aggregated set values (1 to 3) are displayed on the first display unit 29A of the first digit, and the aggregation period is displayed on the second display unit 29B of the second digit and the third display unit 29C of the third digit. Then, the numerical value is displayed as a percentage on the fourth display unit 29D of the fourth digit and the fifth display unit 29E of the fifth digit. The display No. 1 displays the short-term continuous ratio, and the display No. 2 displays the short-term combination ratio. Display No. 3 displays the total cumulative ratio, and display No. 4 displays the total cumulative combination ratio. Further, in the display No. 5, the base (base 1) calculated based on the previous 60000 prize balls is displayed, and in the display No. 6, the base (base 2) calculated based on the previous 60000 prize balls is displayed. Will be done. The short term here means a period in which the number of prize balls paid out (the number of acquired balls) was 6000. The period for obtaining the total cumulative total means the total period after the calculation of the continuous ratio and the combination ratio is started, or the total period after the calculation of the continuous ratio and the combination ratio is once reset. In the above example, the continuous ratio, the combination ratio, and the base are calculated regardless of the gaming state, but may be calculated in consideration of the gaming state. For example, the continuous ratio may be the ratio of the total number of prize balls to the number of prize balls due to winning a prize in the big prize opening during the big hit game state. In addition, the role ratio is the ratio of the number of prize balls by winning the second starting winning opening in the high base state and the number of winning balls by winning the big winning opening in the big hit game state to the total number of prize balls. May be good. Further, the base may be calculated individually for the low base state and the high base state.

When the short-term continuous ratio of display No. 1 is displayed, "y6." Is displayed on the second display unit 29B and the third display unit 29C, and when the short-term combination ratio of display No. 2 is displayed, the second display unit "Y7." Is displayed on the display unit 29B and the third display unit 29C. When the short-term connection ratio of display No. 1 is displayed, the short-term connection ratio is displayed as a percentage (% display) on the fourth display unit 29D and the fifth display unit 29E, and the short-term combination ratio of display No. 2 is displayed. In this case, the short-term combination ratio is displayed as a percentage (% display) on the fourth display unit 29D and the fifth display unit 29E. When the total cumulative ratio of display No. 3 is displayed, "A6." Is displayed on the second display unit 29B and the third display unit 29C, and when the total cumulative combination ratio of display No. 4 is displayed, "A7." Is displayed on the second display unit 29B and the third display unit 29C. When the total cumulative ratio of display No. 3 is displayed, the total cumulative ratio is displayed as a percentage (% display) on the 4th display unit 29D and the 5th display unit 29E, and the total cumulative combination ratio of display No. 4 is displayed. When it is displayed, the total cumulative combination ratio is displayed as a percentage (% display) on the fourth display unit 29D and the fifth display unit 29E. When the base 1 of the display No. 5 is displayed, "bL." Is displayed on the second display unit 29B and the third display unit 29C, and when the base 2 of the display No. 4 is displayed, the second display unit is displayed. "B6." Is displayed on 29B and the third display unit 29C. When the base 1 of the display No. 5 is displayed, the total cumulative ratio is displayed as a percentage (% display) on the fourth display unit 29D and the fifth display unit 29E, and the base 2 of the display No. 6 is displayed. In the fourth display unit 29D and the fifth display unit 29E, the total cumulative combination ratio is displayed as a percentage (% display).

In calculating the joint ratio, the combination ratio, and the base, the main board 11 has a first large winning opening, a second large winning opening (attacker), a first starting winning opening, a second starting winning opening, and a first general winning opening. The number of game balls that have entered the 4th general winning opening and the number of game balls that have been discharged from the discharge port are totaled. In the main processing, the CPU 103 includes a gate switch 21, a first start port switch 22A and a second start port switch 22B, a first count switch 23, a second count switch 24A, and a first general winning opening switch 26A to a fourth general. Switch processing is performed to confirm the status (presence / absence of detection signal) of each switch of the winning port switch 26D and the discharging port switch 70. In the switch processing, it is specified which approach area the game ball has entered based on the detection signal output from each switch. Then, when the detection signal is output from the gate switch 21, the value of the gate passing number counter is added, and when the detection signal is output from the first start port switch 22A and the second start port switch 22B, the detection signal is output. The values of the first start winning number counter and the second starting winning number counter are added, and when the detection signal is output from the count switch 23, the value of the large winning number counter is added, and the first general winning opening switch 26A , 2nd general winning opening switch 26B, 3rd general winning opening switch 26C, 4th general winning opening switch 26D, when a detection signal is output, the 1st general winning number counter, the 2nd general winning number counter, the second The values of the 3 general winning number counter and the 4th general winning number counter are added, and when the detection signal is output from the outlet switch 70, the value of the driving number counter is added to enter each approach area. The number of game balls entering (the number of game balls winning into each winning opening) is totaled. The value of each counter is stored in the RAM 102. In this way, the step for totaling the number of game balls entering each approach area is executed together in a series of processes for confirming the state of the switch corresponding to each approach area (switch state confirmation process). By including it in the switch processing), it is possible to count the number of game balls entering each entry area without executing a separate counting program, that is, without causing the problem of capacity shortage due to an increase in the number of execution programs. It has become.

FIG. 8-13 shows a storage area for storing the number of prize balls to each winning opening. The CPU 103 of the main board 11 calculates the number of winning balls by winning each winning opening based on the total number of winning balls to each winning opening, and stores the calculated number of winning balls in the RAM 102 for each winning opening. Let me. The number of prize balls due to winning a game ball is calculated by multiplying the number of game balls paid out by one prize for the winning opening by the number of winnings to the winning opening. The number of winning balls for winning a game ball is predetermined for each winning opening. The number of prize balls for each winning opening is the general winning opening prize ball (the first general winning opening to the fourth general winning opening (sode) winning ball), the first starting winning opening winning ball (the first). 1 With the number of prize balls of the starting prize ball (prize ball by winning the starting prize), the ordinary electric role prize ball (the prize ball by winning the electric chew), and the special electric role prize ball (the prize ball by winning the attacker) is there. The RAM 102 also stores the total number of prize balls and the number of game balls hit. In the CPU 103, the number of winning balls to the general winning opening and the number of winning balls to the first starting winning opening are individually totaled, but the number of winning balls to the general winning opening and the first starting The number of game ball winnings to the winning opening may be aggregated. In addition, the number of prize balls of the general winning opening prize ball and the number of prize balls of the first starting winning opening prize ball are calculated separately, but the number of prize balls of the general winning opening prize ball and the first starting winning opening The number of prize balls may be calculated together with the number of prize balls.

The RAM 102 includes a ring buffer and an active buffer for storing the number of prize balls and the number of shots. The ring buffer includes ten first storage areas to tenth storage areas including a counter of a maximum of 2 bytes for storing the number of prize balls by winning a prize in each winning opening for each number of 6000 prize balls. As described above, the ring buffer has a storage area of a predetermined unit (maximum 2 bytes). Further, the active buffer includes a 0th storage area including a counter of up to 2 bytes for storing the number of prize balls by winning a prize in each winning opening for each number of 6000 prize balls. The number of prize balls for each winning opening, which increases as the game progresses, is added to the 0th storage area. The 11 storage areas from the 0th storage area to the 10th storage area can store 256 × 256 = 65536 data, and up to 6000 data can be stored with a margin. Further, the RAM 102 is provided with a storage area of the total number of prize balls (for 10 sets) and the number of hits stored in the first storage area to the tenth storage area and the total cumulative total for each winning opening. There is. The total storage area for 10 sets and the total storage area are composed of counters of up to 3 bytes. Therefore, 256 × 256 × 256 = 16777216 data can be stored, and up to 60,000 data can be stored with a margin. I can remember.

The RAM 102 stores a ratio combination storage area for storing 10 sets and the total cumulative combination ratio and ratio, a base for 10 sets (base 2), and a base for the previous 10 sets (base 1). A base storage area is provided. In the CPU 103 of the main board 11, the winning ratios and consecutive ratios of 10 sets and the total cumulative total are calculated based on the number of winning balls based on the number of winning balls to each winning opening for 10 sets and the total cumulative total, and the 10 sets And the total cumulative combination ratio and connection ratio are stored in the connection ratio combination storage area. The continuous ratio combination storage area for storing the combination ratios and the total totals of 10 sets and the total cumulative ratio is composed of a counter having a maximum of 1 byte. The winning ratios and linkage ratios for 10 sets and the total cumulative total can be stored with a margin at a counter of up to 1 byte, for example, when storing them as integers. In the CPU 103 of the main board 11, the base for 10 sets is calculated based on the number of hits for the number of winnings of the game ball into each winning opening for 10 sets, and the calculated base for 10 sets (base 2) and the previous time. The base (base 1) calculated by the number of hits for the number of winnings of the game ball into each winning opening for 10 sets of the above is stored in the base storage area. When the base 1 and the base 2 are stored as integers, for example, they can be stored with a margin by a counter of up to 1 byte.

FIG. 8-14 shows a memory map of the CPU 103 on the main board 11. The CPU 103 has a memory space for accessing the built-in register, ROM 101, RAM 102, and the like. The address / data signal line of the ROM 101 is assigned to the built-in ROM area which is the ROM area of the memory space (in the present embodiment, 0000H to 2FFFH; 2FC0H to 2FFFH is the program management area), and the CPU 103 Data is read from ROM 101 by designating this ROM area. Further, in this embodiment, the ROM area is divided into eight areas from the first area to the eighth area for management, and the first area is an area starting from 0000H. The address / data signal line of the built-in register is assigned to the built-in register area (FE00H to FEBFH in this embodiment) of the memory space, and the CPU 103 reads data from the built-in register or goes to the register via this built-in register area. Write the data of. The address / data signal line of the RAM 102 is assigned to the built-in RAM area which is the RWM area (F000H to F3FFH in this embodiment) of the memory space, and the CPU 103 specifies this RWM area to read data from the RAM 102. Data is written to the RAM 102. The other areas of the memory space (3000H to EFFFH, F400H to FDFFH, FEC0H to FFFFH in this embodiment) are regarded as unused areas.

FIG. 8-15 shows an RWM area that serves as a built-in RAM area. The built-in RAM area corresponding to the storage area of the RAM 102 is composed of a RAM control area, an unused area, a RAM data area, and other areas. The storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to the RAM control area is composed of instruction data (opcode) corresponding to each of a plurality of types of instructions executed by the CPU 103 and supplementary data (operands) required for the CPU 103 to execute each instruction. Data for the control program to be used (sometimes referred to simply as control program data) is temporarily stored. Reference data (for example, various lottery data) referred to by the control program is temporarily stored in the storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to the RAM data area.

The data used for displaying the connection ratio and the combination ratio is temporarily stored in the storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to the unused area or the storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to the other area. For example, the storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to the unused area is provided with a storage area for storing the total total number of prize balls for each winning opening and a continuous ratio storage area for the total total. The storage areas of the RAM 102 corresponding to the other areas include an active buffer having a 0th storage area for each winning opening, a ring buffer having 1st to 10th storage areas, and the number of winning balls for each winning opening (10 sets). ) Is provided, and a storage area for 10 sets is provided. The storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to the unused area and the storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to the other area store data in which the start addresses of the subroutines are different from each other. 1 byte (8 bits) of data can be stored in the storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to each address in the built-in RAM area, and each data (instruction data, supplementary data, reference data, management data) stores 1 byte. When the data exceeds the number of bytes (for example, 2 bytes), the data is divided and stored in the storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to a plurality of consecutive addresses in the RAM control area. ..

FIG. 8-16 shows an example of display control on the display monitor 29. The main board 11 controls the display monitor 29 to display the connection ratio, the combination ratio, and the base. On the display monitor 29, a plurality of items are sequentially displayed.

FIG. 8-16 (A) is a time chart showing an mode of display change on the display monitor 29. When the display on the display monitor 29 is started, the short-term continuous ratio of the display No. 1 is first displayed. The display of the short-term continuous ratio of display No. 1 is displayed in green. When the display of display No. 1 continues for 5 seconds, the short-term combination ratio of display No. 2 is displayed. The display of the short-term continuous ratio of display No. 2 is displayed in red. When the display of display No. 2 continues for 5 seconds, the total cumulative ratio of display No. 3 is displayed. The display of the total cumulative ratio of display No. 3 is displayed in red. When the display of display No. 3 continues for 5 seconds, the total cumulative combination ratio of display No. 4 is displayed. The display of the total cumulative combination ratio of display No. 4 is displayed in red. When the display of the display No. 4 continues for 5 seconds, the base 1 of the display No. 5 is displayed. The display of the base 1 of the display No. 5 is displayed in red. When the display of the display No. 5 continues for 5 seconds, the base 2 of the display No. 6 is displayed. The display of the base 2 of the display No. 6 is displayed in red. Then, when the display of the display No. 6 continues for 5 seconds, the short-term continuous ratio of the display No. 1 is displayed. After that, from the short-term continuous ratio of display No. 1 to the base 2 of display No. 6, each display is sequentially changed and displayed every 5 seconds. As for the color of the display, only the short-term continuous ratio of the display No. 1 is green, and the short-term combination ratio of the display No. 2 to the base 2 of the display No. 5 is red. In this way, the display monitor 29 switches between the short-term continuous ratio, the short-term combination ratio, the total cumulative combination ratio, the total cumulative combination ratio, the base 1 and the base 2 every 5 seconds for display.

FIG. 8-16 (B1) shows a case where the short-term continuous ratio of display No. 1 is displayed. In this case, the set value "1" is displayed on the first display unit 29A, the character "y" is displayed on the second display unit 29B, and the character "6." is displayed on the third display unit 29C. Is displayed. Further, the short-term continuous ratio is displayed on the fourth display unit 29D and the fifth display unit 29E. For example, when the short-term continuous ratio is 41%, the character "4." is displayed on the fourth display unit 29D, and the character "1." is displayed on the fifth display unit 29E.

FIG. 8-16 (B2) shows a case where the short-term combination ratio of display No. 2 is displayed. In this case, the set value "1" is displayed on the first display unit 29A, the character "y" is displayed on the second display unit 29B, and the character "7." is displayed on the third display unit 29C. Is displayed. Further, the short-term combination ratio is displayed on the 4th display unit 29D and the 5th display unit 29E. For example, when the short-term combination ratio is 63%, the character "4." is displayed on the fourth display unit 29D, and the character "3." is displayed on the fifth display unit 29E.

FIG. 8-16 (B3) shows a case where the total cumulative ratio of display No. 3 is displayed. In this case, the set value "1" is displayed on the first display unit 29A, the character "A" is displayed on the second display unit 29B, and the character "6." is displayed on the third display unit 29C. Is displayed. Further, the total cumulative ratio is displayed on the 4th display unit 29D and the 5th display unit 29E. For example, when the total cumulative ratio is 58%, the character "5." is displayed on the fourth display unit 29D, and the character "8." is displayed on the fifth display unit 29E.

FIG. 8-16 (B4) shows a case where the total cumulative combination ratio of display No. 4 is displayed. In this case, the set value "1" is displayed on the first display unit 29A, the character "A" is displayed on the second display unit 29B, and the character "7." is displayed on the third display unit 29C. Is displayed. Further, the total cumulative combination ratio is displayed on the 4th display unit 29D and the 5th display unit 29E. For example, when the total cumulative combination ratio is 68%, the character "6." is displayed on the fourth display unit 29D, and the character "8." is displayed on the fifth display unit 29E.

FIG. 8-16 (B5) shows a case where the base 1 of the display No. 5 is displayed. In this case, the set value "1" is displayed on the first display unit 29A, the character "b" is displayed on the second display unit 29B, and the character "L." is displayed on the third display unit 29C. Is displayed. Further, the fourth display unit 29D and the fifth display unit 29E display the base 1 calculated based on the previous 60,000 prize balls. For example, when the base 1 is 40%, the character "4." is displayed on the fourth display unit 29D, and the character "0." is displayed on the fifth display unit 29E.

FIG. 8-16 (B6) shows a case where the base 2 of the display No. 6 is displayed. In this case, the set value "1" is displayed on the first display unit 29A, the character "b" is displayed on the second display unit 29B, and the character "6." is displayed on the third display unit 29C. Is displayed. Further, the fourth display unit 29D and the fifth display unit 29E display the base 2 calculated based on the immediately preceding 60,000 prize balls. For example, when the base 2 is 42%, the character "4." is displayed on the fourth display unit 29D, and the character "2" is displayed on the fifth display unit 29E.

The display of the short-term continuous ratio, short-term combination ratio, total cumulative ratio, total cumulative combination ratio, base 1 and base 2 can be sequentially changed for each set value based on the operation of the display changeover switch 30. There is. For example, when the set value is "1" and the short-term connection ratio, short-term combination ratio, total cumulative combination ratio, total cumulative combination ratio, base 1 and base 2 are displayed, the display changeover switch 30 is operated. As a result, the numerical value displayed on the first display unit 29A is updated to "2", and the short-term continuous ratio, short-term combination ratio, and total cumulative ratio displayed on the fourth display unit 29D and the fifth display unit 29E, The display of the total cumulative combination ratio, base 1 and base 2 is changed to the display corresponding to the case where the set value is "2". When the set value is "2" and the short-term connection ratio, short-term combination ratio, total cumulative combination ratio, total cumulative combination ratio, base 1 and base 2 are displayed, the display changeover switch 30 is operated. The numerical value displayed on the first display unit 29A is updated to "3", and the short-term continuous ratio, short-term combination ratio, total cumulative ratio, and total cumulative total displayed on the fourth display unit 29D and the fifth display unit 29E. The display of the combination ratio, base 1 and base 2 is changed to the display corresponding to the case where the set value is "3". When the set value is "3", the short-term connection ratio, short-term combination ratio, total cumulative combination ratio, total cumulative combination ratio, base 1 and base 2 are displayed, and by operating the display changeover switch 30. The numerical value displayed on the first display unit 29A is updated to "1", and the short-term continuous ratio, short-term combination ratio, total cumulative ratio, and total cumulative total displayed on the fourth display unit 29D and the fifth display unit 29E. The display of the combination ratio, base 1 and base 2 is changed to the display corresponding to the case where the set value is "1".

In the display monitor 29, the connection ratio, the combination ratio, and the base in each set value are not limited to the form in which the display is possible, and only one value among these comparisons, combination ratios, and the base is used, or Only the numerical value of any 2 may be displayed. The connection ratio, the combination ratio, and the base, which are information based on the number of prize balls given, are calculated, and the connection ratio, the combination ratio, and the base are not limited to the form of being displayed on the display monitor 29. The history of the number of prize balls given may be displayed on the display monitor 29 without calculating the winning ratio and the base. On the display monitor 29, only the short-term continuous ratio is displayed in red, and the short-term combination ratio, the total cumulative ratio, the total cumulative combination ratio, the base 1 and the base 2 are not limited to those displayed in green, and the short-term continuous ratio is used. The short-term combination ratio, total cumulative combination ratio and total cumulative role ratio are displayed in the same color, and base 1 and base 2 are the same as the short-term combination ratio, short-term combination ratio, total cumulative combination ratio, and total cumulative role ratio. It may be displayed in color.

FIG. 8-17 shows an example of executing an update in the active buffer and the ring buffer. In the main board 11, when the total number of prize balls in the 0th storage area in the active buffer reaches 6000, which is a predetermined capacity, the storage in the 0th storage area to the 10th storage area in the ring buffer is updated. Further, the storage area of the total sum and the total total of 10 sets and the storage area of the continuous ratio combination storage area for storing the combination ratio and the connection ratio of the 10 sets and the total total are updated, respectively. At this time, the numerical values stored in the 0th storage area of the active buffer are moved to the 1st storage area of the ring buffer, and the numerical values stored in the 1st to 9th storage areas of the ring buffer are each second. Move to the storage area to the tenth storage area. For example, the number of prize balls of the general winning opening prize balls in the 0th storage area to the 9th storage area is "27", "81", "120", "36", "225", "87", "66", "117", and "45", respectively. It is "21". At this time, when the total number of prize balls in the 0th storage area of the active buffer reaches 6000, the number of prize balls of the general winning opening prize balls in the 100 millionth area to the 10th storage area is changed to "27", "81", and "120", respectively. "36" "225" "87" "66" "117" "45" "21" is updated. Along with this, the number of prize balls in the 0th storage area is set to "0", and the number of prize balls in the 10th storage area is erased. When updating the number of prize balls stored in the 0th storage area to the 10th storage area, the stored number of prize balls may be erased once and then a new number of prize balls may be stored. Alternatively, a new number of prize balls may be stored by overwriting the stored number of prize balls.

(Explanation of game control regarding other feature parts)
FIG. 8-18 is a flowchart showing an example of the main process executed by the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100 in this embodiment. This main process may be executed instead of the game control main process. In the main process, the CPU 103 first sets interrupt prohibition (step Sa1). Next, the interrupt mode is set to the interrupt mode 2 (step Sa2), and the stack pointer designated address is set in the stack pointer (step Sa3). Then, after initializing the built-in device (initializing the built-in device (built-in peripheral circuit) CTC (counter / timer) and PIO (parallel input / output port), etc.) (step Sa4), the RAM 102 can be accessed. (Step Sa5). In the interrupt mode 2, the address synthesized from the value (1 byte) of the specific register (I register) built in the CPU 103 and the interrupt vector (1 byte: least significant bit 0) output by the built-in device is This mode indicates the interrupt address.

Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the clear switch AK001 is ON based on the clear signal which is the output signal of the clear switch AK001 (step Sa6). If the clear switch AK001 is off, it is determined whether or not the power failure detection process has been executed (step Sa7). When the power failure detection process is executed, it is determined whether or not the execution result of the parity check is normal (step Sa8). If the check result is normal, the start address of the backup setting table is set in the pointer (step Sa41), and the initial value is set in the work area based on the contents (step Sa42). As a result, the memory contents at the time of power failure regarding the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are restored.

When the power failure is restored in step Sa42, it is determined whether or not the lock switch 51 is on based on the lock switch signal which is the output signal of the lock switch 51 (step AKS001). When the lock switch 51 is turned on in step AKS001, the set value can be confirmed by executing the setting confirmation process (step AKS002). In the setting confirmation process, it is possible to confirm the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 by the display of the display monitor 29. After the lock switch AK002 is turned off in step AKS001 or the setting confirmation process is executed in step AKS002, the process proceeds to step Sa14. When the lock switch AK002 is turned off in step AKS001, the command 9200H, which is a power failure recovery designation command, may be transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 182.

When the execution of the setting confirmation process is started in step AKS002, the setting confirmation state in which the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be confirmed is set, and the setting confirmation is started from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. The command 9400H, which is a command, is transmitted. When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the setting confirmation state, it may be in the gaming stop state in which the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped. When the game is stopped, the launch of the game ball by the operation of the hitting ball operation handle 30, the detection of the game ball by various switches, etc. are stopped, and the first special symbol display 4A and the second special symbol display 4B, normal The symbol display 20 may be controlled so that the missing symbol or the like is stopped and displayed, or the display corresponding to the game stop state different from the missing symbol is performed. When the execution of the setting confirmation process in step AKS001 is completed, the setting confirmation state and the game stop state associated therewith are ended, and the command 9401H, which is a setting confirmation end command, is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. Will be done.

If the clear switch AK001 is turned on in step Sa6, the power failure detection process is not executed in step Sa7, or the check result is not normal in step Sa8, the predetermined RAM is cleared. The process is executed to clear the data other than the set value stored in the backup storage area of the RAM 102 (step Sa9). The storage area in which the information regarding the winning of the game is stored may not be cleared in step Sa9. Following step Sa9, the start address of the initialization setting table is set in the pointer (step Sa10), and the initial value is set in the work area based on the contents (step Sa11). As a result, the stored contents regarding the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are initialized. When the clear switch AK001 is turned on in step Sa6, the stored contents of the RAM 102 are initialized (cleared) by steps Sa9 and Sa10. Therefore, the clear switch AK001 detects an operation of pressing the ON switch. , The operation related to the initialization of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be detected.

When the stored contents are initialized in step Sa11, it is determined whether or not the lock switch 51 is on based on the lock switch signal (step Sa12). When the lock switch 51 is turned on in step Sa12, the set value can be changed by executing the setting change process (step Sa13). In the setting change process, it is possible to confirm the change status of the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 by the display of the display monitor 29. After the lock switch 51 is turned off in step Sa12 or the setting change process is executed in step Sa13, the process proceeds to step Sa14.

When the lock switch 51 is turned off in step Sa12, the command 9000H, which is a RAM clear notification command, may be transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. The setting change process is not limited to the mode in which the setting change process is executed on the condition that the lock switch 51 is on, and the setting change process is executed on the condition that the gaming machine frame 3 is open. The set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be changed.

When the execution of the setting change process is started in step Sa13, the setting change state is set as a change permission state in which the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be changed, and the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 Then, the command 9100H, which is the setting change start command, is transmitted. When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the setting change state, the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be put into the game stop state as in the setting confirmation state. When the execution of the setting change process in step Sa13 is completed, the setting change state and the game stop state associated therewith are ended, and the command 93XXH, which is a setting change end command, is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. Will be done. In addition to the case where the clear switch AK001 is on, it is set if the lock switch 51 is on when the power failure inspection process is not executed or when the execution result of the parity check is not normal. The mode is not limited to executing the change process, and the setting change process may be executed if the lock switch 51 is on only when the RAM 102 is cleared when the clear switch AK001 is on.

After that, the set value stored in the backup area of the RAM 102 is read out (step Sa14), and the set value is used as the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1. At this time, the random number circuit 104 is initially set by the random number circuit setting process (step Sa15). In addition, a setting is made to generate a periodic timer interrupt every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step Sa16). Then, the interrupt prohibition setting (step Sa17), the display random number update process (step Sa18), the initial value random number update process (step Sa19), and the interrupt permission setting (step Sa20) are repeatedly executed.

When the special symbol normal process is executed in the special symbol process process, the CPU 103 is based on a display result determination table according to a set value and numerical data indicating a random number value MR1 for determining a variable display result. Whether or not the variable display result of the special symbol or the effect symbol is "big hit" or "small hit" is determined (predetermined) before the variable display result is derived and displayed. Further, when the fluctuation pattern setting process is executed, any of a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns can be selected by using the fluctuation pattern judgment table according to the set value and the numerical data indicating the random value MR3 for the fluctuation pattern judgment. You just have to decide. In this way, the game can be advanced so that the advantage for the player is different by determining the variable display result at a different ratio according to the set value.

In this embodiment, when the clear switch AK001 is turned on in step Sa6 of the main process, the stored contents of the RAM 102 are initialized (cleared) in steps Sa9 to Sa11, and then in steps Sa12 and Sa13. The set value can be changed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the stored contents of the RAM 102 may be initialized (cleared) after the state in which the set value can be changed ends. .. That is, when the clear switch AK001 is on in step Sa6, it is determined in step Sa12 whether or not the lock switch 51 is on, and if it is off, the process proceeds to steps Sa9 to Sa11, so that the RAM 102 When the stored contents are initialized (cleared) and the lock switch 51 is turned on in step Sa12, the setting change process is executed in step Sa13, and after the process is completed, steps Sa9 to You may proceed to Sa11. For example, when the RAM clear notification command is transmitted in response to the initialization (clearing) of the stored contents of the RAM 102, the initialization notification is started in accordance with the reception of the RAM clear notification command on the effect control board 12. There are times. Therefore, if steps Sa9 to Sa11 are executed before step Sa13, the initialization notification is executed and the setting is made when the setting change process is executed in step Sa13 and the set value can be changed. There is a risk that the work of changing the value will be hindered. On the other hand, after the setting change process of step Sa13 is completed, the stored contents of the RAM 102 are initialized (cleared) by steps Sa9 to Sa11, so that the initialization notification and the like are started after the change of the set value is completed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the operation of changing the set value from being hindered.

FIG. 8-19 shows a display mode of the display monitor 29 in the setting change process of step Sa13. As shown in FIG. 8-19 (A), the power switch AK002 is operated by a staff member of the amusement park when the continuous ratio, the combination ratio, the base, etc. are displayed on the display monitor 29, and the power is supplied by shutting off the power. When stopped, the display on the display monitor 29 ends, as shown in FIG. 8-19 (B). After that, when a staff member of the amusement park or the like presses the clear switch AK001 and operates the power switch AK002 while switching the lock switch 51 on, the power supply is started by turning on the power. As shown in -19 (C), the display monitor 29 displays the set value stored in the backup area of the RAM 102 in the first display unit 29A. When the setting changeover switch 52 is pressed by a staff member of the amusement park or the like while this set value is displayed, the numerical value displayed on the first display unit 29A is sequentially updated each time the operation is detected. To display. For example, when the pressing operation of the setting changeover switch 52 is detected, if "1" is displayed on the first display unit 29A, it is updated to "2", and if "2" is displayed, it is changed to "3". It suffices if the display of the first display unit 29A can be sequentially and sequentially updated between "1" and "3" by updating and updating to "1" if "3" is displayed. After that, when the lock switch 51 is pushed in by a staff member of the game hall or the like, the operation is detected and the set value displayed on the first display unit 29A is stored in the backup area of the RAM 102 (update storage). To do. At this time, by blinking the first display unit 29A, a staff member of the amusement park or the like can recognize that a new set value has been stored.

When the setting change process is executed in step Sa13, the stored contents of the RAM 102 are initialized in step Sa9. Therefore, when the set value is changed, the hold storage based on the hold data in the first special figure hold storage unit 151A and the second special figure hold storage unit 151B is deleted. When a switching operation for turning off the lock switch 51 is performed by a staff member of the amusement park or the like, the setting change process is terminated because the operation is detected. The CPU 103 is in a state where the game can be played by executing the processes after step Sa14 in the main process. As a result, for example, the variable display result, the jackpot type, the lottery for determining the variable pattern, the payout of the prize ball, and the like can be executed. The setting change process is not limited to displaying the stored value stored in the backup area of the RAM 102 as the initial display to be displayed on the display monitor 29. For example, the setting value most advantageous for the player. A predetermined setting value such as "1" or "3", which is the most disadvantageous setting value for the player, may be displayed.

In the setting change process, the control of sequentially updating and displaying the numerical value displayed on the first display unit 29A of the display monitor 29 is limited to the form of updating each time the pressing operation of the setting changeover switch 52 is detected. For example, each time a pressing operation of the clear switch AK001 is detected, the display may be sequentially updated and displayed. For example, in the display monitor 29, when the clear switch AK001 is pressed while the set value stored in the backup area of the RAM 102 is displayed on the first display unit 29A, the first display unit 29A displays "1". If "" is displayed, it is updated to "2", if "2" is displayed, it is updated to "3", and if "3" is displayed, it is updated to "1". It suffices if the display of the display unit 29A can be periodically and sequentially updated between "1" and "3". In this case, the clear switch AK001 used for initializing the stored contents of the RAM 102 can be commonly used for changing the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1. As a result, it is possible to prevent an increase in manufacturing cost due to an increase in the device configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

FIG. 8-20 shows a display mode of the display monitor 29 in the setting confirmation process of step AKS002. As shown in FIG. 8-20 (A), the power switch AK002 is operated by a staff member of the amusement park when the continuous ratio, the combination ratio, the base, etc. are displayed on the display monitor 29, and the power is supplied by shutting off the power. When stopped, the display on the display monitor 29 ends, as shown in FIG. 8-20 (B). After that, the power supply is started by turning on the power by operating the power switch AK002 while switching the lock switch 51 on without pressing the clear switch AK001 by a staff member of the amusement park. As shown in 8-20 (C), the display monitor 29 displays the set value stored in the backup area of the RAM 102 in the first display unit 29A. In the state where this set value is displayed, even if the setting changeover switch 52 is pressed by a staff member of the game hall or the like, the value displayed on the first display unit 29A cannot be updated and displayed. After that, when a switching operation for turning off the lock switch 51 is performed by a staff member of the game hall or the like, the setting confirmation process is terminated because the operation is detected. The CPU 103 is in a state where the game can be played by executing the processes after step Sa14 in the main process. As a result, for example, the variable display result, the jackpot type, the lottery for determining the variable pattern, the payout of the prize ball, and the like can be executed.

As described above, the display monitor 29 included in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can display information on the game value that enables confirmation of adjustment of the number of prize balls after the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed. The display monitor 29 can display information on set values for advancing the game so that the advantage for the player is different by changing the probability of being controlled to the jackpot gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Therefore, since it is not necessary to provide a display device for displaying the set value separately from the display device for displaying the information on the game value, it is possible to prevent an increase in the manufacturing cost due to an increase in the device configuration in the pachinko gaming machine 1. it can.

In this embodiment, the display monitor 29 is used to display the set values stored in the backup area of the RAM 102, and to display the connection ratio, the combination ratio, the base, and the like. The display monitor 29 is used to display the connection ratio, the combination ratio, the base, etc., while the setting display unit different from the display monitor 29 is used to display the set value. May be good. As a result, the control for displaying the connection ratio, the combination ratio, the base, etc. using the display monitor 29 and the control for displaying the set value using the setting display unit can be clearly separated. The processing by the control program or the like can be distributed and simplified, and the control load can be reduced. In this way, when a setting display unit different from the display monitor 29 is used, the setting display unit may be arranged on a board different from the board on which the display monitor 29 is arranged, or the display monitor 29 may be arranged. The setting display unit may be arranged on a board common to the board.

(Explanation of modified examples related to the configuration and game control in other feature parts)
FIG. 8-21 shows a display mode of the display monitor 29 in a modified example in which the setting change process can be executed during the game. The set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not limited to a form that can be changed when the power is turned on, and the change of the set value may be executed during the game. In this case, after the CPU 103 starts the processing after step Sa16 in the main processing, the gaming machine frame 3 is opened by a staff member of the game hall, and the clear switch AK001 is performed together with the switching operation of turning on the lock switch 51. When the pressing operation of turning on is performed, those operations are detected, so that the display monitor 29 displays the set value set in the current pachinko game machine 1 on the first display unit 29A. When the setting changeover switch 52 or the clear switch AK001 is pressed by a staff member of the game hall in the state where this set value is displayed, it is displayed on the first display unit 29A every time the operation is detected. Numerical values are updated and displayed sequentially. Then, when the lock switch 51 is pushed in by a staff member of the game hall or the like, the operation is detected, and the set value displayed on the first display unit 29A is set as a new set value of the pachinko game machine 1. , Stored (updated and stored) in the backup area of the RAM 102.

The set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is limited to a form that can be changed when the power is turned on, based on the detection of the operation of switching the lock switch 51 on and the detection of the operation of pressing the clear switch AK001 on. It may be possible to change the power at the time of turning on the power, at least based on the detection of the operation of switching the lock switch 51 on. For example, even if there is no detection of the operation of pressing the clear switch AK001 on when the power is turned on, the stored contents of the RAM 102 are not initialized (cleared) based on the detection of the operation of switching the lock switch 51 on. The set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be changed based on the detection of an operation of restoring the stored contents at the time of a power failure and then pressing the clear switch AK001 on. In this way, even if the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not initialized by initializing (clearing) the stored contents of the RAM 102 with the start of power supply by turning on the power, the pachinko gaming machine 1 at the time of turning on the power Control may be performed to change the set value.

When a new set value is stored, by clearing the game control data holding area 150, the special figure holding memory, the normal figure holding memory, the game control flag setting unit 152, the game control timer setting unit 153, and the game control counter are stored. Various flags and data stored in the setting unit 154, the game control buffer setting unit 155, and the like may be deleted. In this way, by clearing the game control data holding area 150, a new hold memory in which the variable display result becomes a big hit is generated as the set value is changed, and a new normal variable winning ball device 6B Can be prevented from being released (a hit on a normal figure occurs) and an unreasonably large hit on the variable display result during execution. Further, by clearing the game control data holding area 150, the big winning opening is closed during the big hit game, and the normal variable winning ball device 6B is closed when the normal variable winning ball device 6B is open. This can prevent the player from gaining inappropriate profits. Further, when the setting change process is interrupted without setting a new setting value, it is possible to prevent the hold memory from being deleted even though the new setting value is not set. It should be noted that the setting value is not limited to the form of clearing the hold memory based on the setting of a new setting value in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the setting value originally set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is reset. In some cases, the hold memory may be cleared. The hold storage may be cleared at the timing when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is displayed on the display monitor 29, that is, when the setting change process is executed by the CPU 103. As a result, it is possible to reliably prevent the change in the set value from being accurately reflected in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

The pachinko game machine 1 is not limited to the form in which the first prize opening and the second prize opening are closed based on the new set value set in the pachinko game machine 1. The first prize opening and the second prize opening may be closed at the timing when the set setting value is displayed, that is, when the setting change process is executed by the CPU 103. As a result, it is possible to reliably prevent the change in the set value from being accurately reflected in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

FIG. 8-22 shows a display mode in a modified example in which the first display unit 29A capable of displaying the set value on the display monitor 29 is not provided. The display monitor 29 is provided with five display units from the first display unit 29A to the fifth display unit 29E, and the continuous ratio, the combination ratio, and the base displayed by the second display unit 29B to the fifth display unit 29E. The form is not limited to displaying the set value on the first display unit 29A, and it is not necessary to provide a display unit for displaying the continuous ratio, the combination ratio, and the base set value being displayed. In FIG. 8-22 (A), the display unit corresponding to the second display unit 29B to the fifth display unit 29E of the display monitor 29 displays the connection ratio, the combination ratio, and the base, and corresponds to the first display unit 29A. The set value is not displayed by the display unit.

FIG. 8-22 (B) shows an example of display control of the connection ratio, the combination ratio, and the base when the display unit for displaying the set value is not provided. In this case, the ratio, combination ratio, and base at the set value 1 are red, the ratio, combination ratio, and base at the setting value 2 are green, and the ratio, combination ratio, and base at the setting value 3 are blue. To display. By displaying the joint ratio, the combination ratio, and the base with different display colors according to the set value, it is possible to easily grasp which set value is the numerical value. In this display control example as well, as in the above embodiment, the connection ratio, the combination ratio, and the base in the set value 1 can be switched and displayed every 5 seconds, and the set value 1 is set for each operation of the display changeover switch 30. The switching display of the connection ratio, combination ratio, and base at 5-second intervals is changed to the connection ratio, combination ratio, and base switching display at 5-second intervals at the set value 2, and further, the connection ratio and combination ratio at the setting value 3 It suffices if it can be cyclically changed to the switching display of the base at 5-second intervals. Alternatively, the switching display of the connection ratio at the set value 1, the connection ratio at the set value 2, and the connection ratio at the set value 3 at 5-second intervals, the combination ratio at the set value 1, the combination ratio at the set value 2, and the combination value 3 The switching display of the role ratio at 5-second intervals, the base at the set value 1, the base at the set value 2, and the switching display at the base at the set value 3 at 5-second intervals are cyclically displayed for each operation of the display changeover switch 30. Changes may be possible.

The display monitor 29 is not limited to a form in which the connection ratio, combination ratio, and base for each set value can be displayed, and the connection ratio and combination according to the set value of any one of the set value 1 to the set value 3. Only the ratio and the base may be displayed. For example, the connection ratio, the combination ratio, and the base are calculated for each of the set values 1 to 3, and the highest or lowest value or the longest or shortest measurement time among the calculated comparison ratio, combination ratio, and base is calculated. Only the values and the like need to be displayed on the display monitor 29. Further, among the calculated ratios, combination ratios, and bases, the highest or lowest value and the longest or shortest measurement time value are set as the initial display on the display monitor 29, and the initial display is changed by operating the display changeover switch 30. The display of the display monitor 29 may be switchable to the value of.

The display monitor 29 has two or more of the connection ratio, combination ratio, and base at the set value 1, the connection ratio, combination ratio, and base at the set value 2, and the connection ratio, combination ratio, and base at the set value 3. It is possible to calculate the connection ratio, combination ratio, and base in the set values, and in addition to or in place of the connection ratio, combination ratio, and base for each set value, the connection ratio, combination ratio, and base in these two or more set values can be calculated. It may be possible to display on the display monitor 29. In this way, by making it possible to display the continuous ratio, the combination ratio, and the base in the set values of 2 or more on the display monitor 29, it is possible to grasp the state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in more detail. It should be noted that the composite information is not limited to a form in which the combined ratio, combination ratio, and base of two or more set values can be calculated and displayed on the display monitor 29, and the continuous ratio at two or more set values is not limited. , The combination ratio, and the average value of the base may be calculated and displayed on the display monitor 29.

The display monitor 29 may be able to display only the connection ratio, the combination ratio, and the base according to the set set value. Further, in the display monitor 29, the connection ratio, the combination ratio, and the base according to the set set value are displayed as the initial display, and the initial display is changed to another set value according to the operation of the display changeover switch 30. You may switch to the display of the ratio, the combination ratio, and the base. The display monitor 29 may be able to display numerical values other than the continuous ratio, the winning ratio, and the base, such as the number of prize balls per predetermined time (for example, 1 hour), as predetermined information according to the set value.

For example, under specific conditions such as immediately after the end of a big hit game or during a time saving state, by using a special fluctuation pattern judgment table different from the fluctuation pattern judgment table in the normal time, the fluctuation display with a specific fluctuation pattern than in the normal time ( For example, the shortened non-reach variation pattern (PA1-4)) may be facilitated. When it is possible to determine the variation pattern using the special variation pattern determination table, the determination of the variation pattern using the special variation pattern determination table is completed and switched to the normal determination according to the set value. The timing may be different. Specifically, when the set value is 1, the fluctuation pattern is determined using the special fluctuation pattern determination table up to the 15th fluctuation display after the jackpot game ends, and 16 after the jackpot game ends. From the second time onward, the fluctuation pattern is determined using the fluctuation pattern judgment table at the normal time, and if the set value is 2, the special fluctuation pattern judgment table up to the 10th fluctuation display after the end of the big hit game. The fluctuation pattern is determined using, and after the 11th time after the jackpot game is completed, the fluctuation pattern is determined using the fluctuation pattern determination table at the normal time, and if the set value is 3, the jackpot game is played. If the fluctuation pattern is determined using the special variation pattern judgment table up to the 5th variation display after the end, and after the 6th time after the end of the big hit game, the variation pattern is determined using the fluctuation pattern determination table at the normal time. Good.

After the initialization (clearing) of the RAM 102 is executed in step Sa9 in the main process, or after the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is changed, in the first 10th variation, a special variation pattern is used. When the variable display is executed, it is suggested that a setting value advantageous to the player (for example, setting value 1) is set, and after the initialization (clearing) of the RAM 102 is executed, or after the pachinko game machine is executed. After the setting value set to 1 is changed, when the variation display is executed with a special variation pattern at the 30th variation, a setting value advantageous to the player (for example, setting value 1) is set. It may be a game property that pays attention to whether or not the fluctuation display is executed in a special fluctuation pattern at a specific timing or a specific number of fluctuation displays, such as confirming that the game is present. When the pachinko gaming machine 1 has such a game property, when the set setting value is 1, the RAM 102 is initialized (cleared) or set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. After the set value is changed, the rate at which fluctuations are executed in a special fluctuation pattern is the highest in the first 10 fluctuations, and when the set setting value is 3, the RAM 102 is initialized ( Clear) is executed, or after the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is changed, the rate at which fluctuations are executed in a special fluctuation pattern at the first 10 fluctuations is the lowest. Only when the set value is 1, after the initialization (clearing) of the RAM 102 is executed, or after the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is changed, the first time. The fluctuation may be executed in a special fluctuation pattern at the 30th fluctuation.

The switching condition (number of fluctuations until the table is switched) for switching the fluctuation pattern judgment table for determining the fluctuation pattern from the special fluctuation pattern judgment table to the normal fluctuation pattern judgment table differs depending on the set value. It may be determined by a ratio. The determination rate of a specific variation pattern (for example, shortened non-reach (PA1-4)) decreases due to different switching conditions for switching the variation pattern determination table for determining the variation pattern according to the set value. Since the player can be noticed at the timing, the effect of the fluctuation pattern can be enhanced.

After the initialization (clearing) of the RAM 102 is executed, or after the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is changed, until a predetermined time (for example, 1 hour) elapses, or a predetermined number of times ( For example, until the fluctuation display of 100 times) is executed, each fluctuation pattern determination table in which the determination ratio of the fluctuation display of a specific fluctuation pattern (for example, the fluctuation display of the fluctuation pattern of super reach) is normal is used. It may be increased or decreased as compared with the case of determining the fluctuation pattern. In this case, even if the execution of the fluctuation display of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach is decided at different determination ratios depending on whether the set setting value is 1, 2, or 3. Good. As a result, after the initialization (clearing) of the RAM 102 is executed, or after the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is changed, until a predetermined time (for example, 1 hour) elapses, or Since the player can pay attention to the number of times the fluctuation display of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach is executed until the fluctuation display of a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) is executed, the effect of the fluctuation display of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach is produced. Can be enhanced. Further, after the initialization (clearing) of the RAM 102 is executed, or after the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is changed, until a predetermined time elapses, or a predetermined number of times of variation display is executed. A fluctuation pattern that can be determined only until is set is provided for each set value, and the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is set for the player by executing the fluctuation display according to the fluctuation pattern according to these set values. It may be possible to notify.

After the initialization (clearing) of the RAM 102 is executed, or after the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is changed, until a predetermined time (for example, 1 hour) elapses, or a predetermined number of times ( For example, until the fluctuation display of 100 times) is executed, the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern other than the super reach such as non-reach and normal reach differs depending on the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Alternatively, depending on the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, a fluctuation pattern different from the normal fluctuation pattern such as non-reach, normal reach, super reach, etc. (for example, the fluctuation time is extremely short such as 0.1). The determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern or the extremely long fluctuation pattern such as 10 minutes may be different.

After the initialization (clearing) of the RAM 102 is executed, or after the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is changed, until a predetermined time (for example, 1 hour) elapses, or a predetermined number of times ( For example, in the specific period until the variation display (100 times) is executed, the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be suggested at the rate at which the specific effect is executed. For example, it is possible to execute a high setting suggestion effect that suggests that the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is an advantageous setting value for the player, and the setting set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 for a specific period. When the value is 1 (the setting value most advantageous to the player), the high setting value suggestion effect is most likely to be executed, and the setting value set to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 3 (the setting value most disadvantageous to the player). ), The high setting value suggestion effect should be the most difficult to execute. In a specific period, at least one of non-reach, normal reach, and super reach, depending on whether or not the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been changed since the last time the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 was stopped. The determination rate of the fluctuation pattern may be different.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 is configured as a pachinko gaming machine capable of controlling the gaming state to a probabilistic state after the jackpot game ends, and the game after the jackpot game ends based on the fact that the game ball passes the third count switch during the jackpot game. The state may be controllable to a probabilistic state. In this case, as the jackpot type, the jackpot type that opens the second jackpot during the jackpot game, that is, the jackpot type that allows the game ball to pass through the third count switch during the jackpot game (hereinafter, jackpot X). The second big prize opening is not opened during the big hit game, that is, the big hit type (hereinafter, big hit Y) in which the game ball cannot pass through the third count switch during the big hit game is provided, and the determination ratio of these big hit X and the big hit Y is provided. May be different depending on the set value. By doing so, the rate at which the game state is controlled to the probabilistic state after the end of the big hit game can be changed according to the set value, so that the game interest can be improved.

In addition to or instead of the rate at which the variable display result becomes a big hit and the rate at which the big hit type is determined are different, the number of prize balls when the game ball wins each winning opening, and the large number in each round during the big hit game. The maximum number of winnings of the game ball to the winning opening may be made different according to the set value. Further, the opening patterns of the first big winning opening and the second big winning opening during the big hit game may be made different according to the set value. As a result, the number of prize balls given in the big hit game state can be made different according to the set value, so that the game entertainment can be improved.

A movable body may be provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and it may be possible to execute a movable body effect in which the movable body is operated during a game such as a variable display or a big hit game. When such a movable body is provided, variable winning initialization control such as confirmation of advance / retreat operation of the regulating member inside the second large winning opening can be executed, and at the same time, confirmation of the operation of the movable body and the movable body at the initial position When the movable body initialization control to be moved can be executed by the effect control CPU 120 and a new set value is set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on or the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on). When a new set value is set in 1), the variable prize initialization control and the movable body initialization control may be executed. As a result, the new set value can be accurately reflected in the movement of the regulating member or the movable body. The variable winning initialization control and the movable body initialization control may be executed after the execution of step Sa13 or step Sa14 in the main process. For example, variable winning initialization control or movable body initialization control may be executed at the timing when the first timer interrupt occurs. When the variable prize initialization control and the movable body initialization control can be executed, the variable prize initialization control may be started at a timing prior to the movable body initialization control. Alternatively, the variable winning initialization control and the movable body initialization control may be started at the same time, and the variable winning initialization control may be terminated before the movable body initialization control. As a result, the initialization control related to the winning of the game ball can be appropriately performed.

The determination rate of the super reach fluctuation pattern may differ depending on the set value. The specific variable display pattern may be a fluctuation pattern different from the fluctuation pattern of the super reach. The setting of which variation pattern is used as the specific variable display pattern can be arbitrarily changed according to the specifications of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

8-23 and 8-24 show a modified example in which the lock switch 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 are installed on the side of the main board 11. By providing the lock switch 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 on the back side of the pachinko game machine 1, the lock switch 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 cannot be operated unless the staff of the game hall or the like opens the frame 3 for the game machine. is there. In addition to this, by providing a security cover 500A that covers the lock switch 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 from the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when the gaming machine frame 3 is closed, the pachinko machine frame 3 is closed when the gaming machine frame 3 is closed. It may be possible to prevent an illegal change of the set value of the game machine 1.

The security cover 500A is attached to the lower part of the right side of the outer frame 1a. As a result, when the gaming machine frame 3 is closed, the security cover 500A approaches the lock switch 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 from the back side of the pachinko game machine 1, so that the lock switch 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 cannot be operated. Can be. On the other hand, when the gaming machine frame 3 is opened, the security cover 500A is separated from the lock switch 51 and the setting changeover switch 52, so that the lock switch 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 can be operated. The lock switch 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 are covered with a cover body from the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the cover body is covered with a security cover 500A from the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when the gaming machine frame 3 is closed. By covering from the back side of the gaming machine 1 (pressing the cover body forward with the security cover 500A), it is more powerful to change the illegal set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when the gaming machine frame 3 is closed. It may be possible to prevent it. When the setting changeover switch 52 is replaced by the clear switch AK001, the clear switch AK001 may be covered with a cover body or a security cover 500A instead of the setting changeover switch 52.

FIG. 8-25 shows a modified example in which the security cover is provided on the gaming machine frame 3. Specifically, the security cover 500B may be provided so as to be slidable in the left-right direction with respect to the gaming machine frame 3. When the game machine frame 3 is closed, the right end of the security cover 500B is sandwiched between the right side of the outer frame 1a and the game machine frame 3, and the security cover 500B is held on the back of the lock switch 51 and the setting changeover switch 52. It suffices to make it immovable from the state of being covered from the side. Then, when the gaming machine frame 3 is opened, the lock switch 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 may be operated by sliding the security cover 500B. When the setting changeover switch 52 is replaced by the clear switch AK001, the clear switch AK001 may be covered with the security cover 500B instead of the setting changeover switch 52.

FIG. 8-26 shows a modified example in which the security cover is rotatably provided. Specifically, the left end portion of the security cover 500C may be rotatably supported with respect to a pivot axis facing in the vertical direction provided on the back surface side of the gaming machine frame 3. In such a case, when the gaming machine frame 3 is closed, the right end of the security cover 500C is sandwiched between the right side of the outer frame 1a and the gaming machine frame 3, and the security cover 500C is set as the lock switch 51. The changeover switch 52 may be made immovable from the state of being covered from the back side. Then, when the gaming machine frame 3 is opened, the lock switch 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 may be operated by rotating the security cover 500C around a pivot axis (not shown). When the setting changeover switch 52 is replaced by the clear switch AK001, the clear switch AK001 may be covered with the security cover 500C instead of the setting changeover switch 52.

When these security covers are provided so as to overlap the main board 11, the security covers are made of a transparent resin material or the like so as not to interfere with the visibility of the mounting surface of the main board 11 and the seal. May be good.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 may have different playability such as a probabilistic loop type and a V probabilistic type. In the case of the probabilistic loop type or V probabilistic type, a function (so-called small hit time) that can increase the number of balls held by a small hit that targets the first big winning opening after the end of a specific big hit game is provided. You may have it. In the case of a gaming machine having a small hit time function, the jackpot probability is made different according to the set value (for example, in the case of the set value 1, the jackpot probability in the normal state is set to 1/200 and the jackpot probability in the probability variation state is set. Is set to 1/20, and in the case of the set value 2, the jackpot probability in the normal state is set to 1/300 and the jackpot probability in the probability variation state is set to 1/30), so that one of the set values is set. , Since the initial hit probability is higher than when other set values are set, it is easier to enter the small hit time, but the probability of becoming a big hit during probability variation control is also higher than when other set values are set. Is also high, so the small hit time is likely to end. In other words, when a pachinko machine capable of performing probability variation control is equipped with a small hit time function, the higher the setting value with a higher jackpot probability in the normal state, the higher the probability of entering the small hit time, while the smaller the probability. It is difficult for the hit time to continue, and the lower the set value with the lower jackpot probability in the normal state is set, the lower the probability of entering the small hit time, but the easier it is for the small hit time to continue. For this reason, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the probabilistic loop type and the V probabilistic type, not only the range of the game can be expanded by installing the small hit time function, but also a set value with a low big hit probability is set. Even the pachinko gaming machine 1 that is used can motivate the player to play a game.

In the V-probability variation type pachinko gaming machine 1, the opening pattern of the probability variation control determination large winning opening in the probability variation control determination round is a long-term opening pattern (the opening pattern in which the game ball easily wins the probability variation control determination grand prize opening). ) And the short-term opening pattern (opening pattern in which the game ball is difficult to win in the large winning opening for probability variation control), these long-term opening patterns and short-term opening patterns are set according to the set values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. By deciding at different ratios, the actual probability of entering the probability variation (probability variation jackpot ratio) may be different.

A gate for determining the jackpot type is provided at a predetermined position in the game area (for example, a position above the second big winning opening), and the game ball passes through the jackpot type determination gate after the special symbol is derived and displayed in a combination indicating the jackpot. The random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type may be extracted at the same timing, and the jackpot game according to the jackpot type determined based on the extracted MR2 value may be started. When the jackpot type determination gate is provided in this way, the jackpot type is determined at different ratios according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, 16 round jackpot and 4 round jackpot are provided as jackpot types). If this is the case, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, the ratio of being controlled to the jackpot gaming state of 16 rounds jackpot is the highest, and the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 When is 3, the ratio of being controlled to the jackpot gaming state of 16 rounds jackpot is the lowest).

The lock switch 51, the setting changeover switch 52, or the clear switch AK001 may be provided on the front side of the gaming machine frame 3. When the lock switch 51, the setting changeover switch 52, or the clear switch AK001 is provided on the front side of the gaming machine frame 3 in this way, the lock switch 51, the setting changeover switch 52, or the clear switch AK001 is used on the ball striking operation handle or the ball striking launcher. By providing it in the vicinity, the glass door frame 3a may not be operated unless it is opened.

It is only necessary to determine whether or not to control to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, such as a jackpot gaming state, at least in a different ratio according to the set value, and the jackpot type and The fluctuation pattern may be determined at a common ratio regardless of the set value. It fluctuates at a different rate according to the set value. While deciding whether to set the display result as "big hit" or "small hit", the big hit type has a common rate regardless of the set value. And when the fluctuation pattern is determined, the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern is not changed even if the set value is changed, so that the set value is not suggested to the player or the like, or it is difficult to suggest it. When not only the fluctuation display result but also the fluctuation pattern is determined at a different ratio according to the set value, the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern is also changed when the set value is changed, so that the player etc. The setting value can be suggested, or it becomes easy to suggest.

As described above, in the game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11, the CPU 103 executes the main process when the power supply is started by turning on the power, so that the lock switch 51 and the clear switch AK001 operate. Depending on the detection result, it is possible to control any of the setting change state, setting confirmation state, initialization state, and power failure recovery state. The setting change state is a change permission state that permits the change of the set value by the operation of the setting changeover switch 52 or the clear switch AK001. The setting confirmation state is a state in which the set value can be confirmed on the display monitor 29. The initialization state is a state in which the stored contents of the RAM 102 are initialized (cleared), unlike the setting change state and the setting confirmation state. The power failure recovery state is a state in which the stored contents of the RAM 102 are restored to the contents at the time of the power failure.

FIG. 8-27 shows an example of state control according to the switch detection when the power is turned on. If the lock switch 51 is on and the clear switch AK001 is on when the power supply is started by turning on the power based on the operation of the power switch AK002, the setting change process is performed in step Sa13 of the main process. By being executed, the setting change state is controlled. In this case, the stored contents of the RAM 102 are initialized in step Sa9 of the main process. On the other hand, when the lock switch 51 is on and the clear switch AK001 is off when the power supply is started, the setting confirmation process is executed in the main process step AKS002 to set the settings. Control the confirmation status. In this case, step Sa9 of the main process is not executed, and the stored contents of the RAM 102 are restored to the contents at the time of power failure by steps Sa41 and Sa42. When the lock switch 51 is off and the clear switch AK001 is on when the power supply is started, the stored contents of the RAM 102 are initialized in step Sa9 of the main process, so that the initialization state is established. To control. In this case, since it is determined in step Sa12 of the main process that the lock switch 51 is off, the setting change process of step Sa13 is not executed. When the lock switch 51 is off and the clear switch AK001 is off when the power supply is started, the stored contents of the RAM 102 are restored to the contents at the time of a power failure by the main processing steps Sa41 and Sa42. By doing so, the power failure recovery state is controlled. In this case, since it is determined in step AKS001 of the main process that the lock switch 51 is off, the setting confirmation process of step AKS002 is not executed. In this way, along with the power-on operation using the power switch AK002, the lock switch 51 and the clear switch AK001 detect various operations such as on / off switching operation and pressing operation by the staff of the amusement park. , It is possible to control the state according to the detection results.

(Explanation of means related to the above feature section)
The above embodiment includes the following feature parts. That is, conventionally, as a pachinko gaming machine in which a set value can be set, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. However, the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 is provided with a dedicated setting value display means for displaying the set setting value, thereby preventing the cost increase of the gaming machine. There was a problem that it could not be done. Therefore, as a game machine of means 1 related to a feature unit for solving this problem,
It is a gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of playing a game using a gaming medium (for example, a gaming ball) and can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
A setting means (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes the setting change process of Sa13) that can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, one of the setting values 1 to the setting value 3), and
A game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process process) capable of executing the control of the advantageous state based on the set set value, and
A game in which a game value is given based on the game medium entering a predetermined area (for example, a general winning opening, a first starting winning opening, a second starting winning opening, a first major winning opening, a second major winning opening, etc.). Value-imparting means (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the processing during the jackpot opening),
An information display means (for example, a display monitor 29) capable of displaying information on the game value given by the game value giving means, and
With
The information display means can display the set value set by the setting means (for example, display by the first display unit 29A of the display monitor 29).
A game machine characterized by the above is described, and according to this means 1, it is not necessary to individually provide a display device for displaying the set set value, so that the cost increase of the game machine can be prevented. Can be done.

As a game machine of means 2 of the above-mentioned feature part,
The information display means can display predetermined information according to a set value (for example, a portion capable of displaying a continuous ratio, a combination ratio, a base, etc. on the display monitor 29).
The gaming machine described in the means 1 characterized by the above is described, and in this means 2, the state of the gaming machine can be easily grasped.

As a game machine of means 3 of the above-mentioned feature part,
The information display means can sequentially display predetermined information of each set value (for example, the display monitor 29 displays short-term continuous ratio, short-term combination ratio, total cumulative continuous ratio, total cumulative combination ratio, base 1 and base 2). (Parts that are displayed sequentially at 5-second intervals, etc.)
The gaming machine described in the means 2 characterized by the above is described, and in the means 3, it is possible to easily grasp the predetermined information of each set value.

As a game machine of means 4 of the above-mentioned feature part,
The information display means can display predetermined information of each set value in different display modes (for example, the set value 1 displays the joint ratio, the combination ratio, and the base in red, and the set value 2 shows the continuous ratio. The role ratio and base are displayed in green, and at the setting value 3, the continuous ratio, role ratio, and base are displayed in blue, etc.)
The gaming machine according to the means 2 or the means 3 is described, and the means 4 can easily grasp the predetermined information of each set value.

As a game machine of means 5 of the above-mentioned feature part,
Equipped with an operating means (for example, display changeover switch 30)
The information display means can switch and display predetermined information of each set value according to the operation of the operation means (for example, by operating the display changeover switch 30, the connection ratio, the combination ratio, and the base of the set value 1 can be displayed. The part that switches the display to the display of the set value 2 connection ratio, combination ratio, and base, and the display of the setting value 2 connection ratio, combination ratio, and base are changed to the connection ratio, combination ratio, and base display of setting value 3. (Switching part, etc.)
The game machine described in any one of the means 2 to the means 4 is described, and the means 5 can easily grasp the predetermined information of each set value.

As a game machine of means 6 of the above-mentioned feature part,
The information display means displays predetermined information according to a set value set by the setting means (for example, a portion capable of displaying only a connection ratio, a combination ratio, and a base according to a set set value. Such)
The gaming machine described in any one of the means 2 to the means 5 characterized by the above is described, and in this means 6, the work of confirming the predetermined information of the set value set by the setting means is easily performed. be able to.

As a game machine of means 7 of the above-mentioned feature part,
A calculation means capable of calculating information on the game value given by the game value giving means (for example, a connection ratio (%), a combination ratio (%) for 6000 CPU 103s, and a cumulative ratio (%), a combination. The part for calculating the ratio (%) and the base (base 1 (%)) calculated based on the previous 60000 prize balls, and the base (base 2 (%)) calculated based on the previous 60000 prize balls. Etc.)
The calculation means can individually calculate the information for each set value (for example, a general prize ball, a first starting opening prize ball, an ordinary electric prize ball, a special electric prize ball, a total prize ball, etc. The total input is stored in the storage area (ring buffer) according to the set value, so that it can be calculated individually for each set value, etc.),
The information display means displays only the information corresponding to the specific set value of any one of the set values (for example, the continuous ratio according to the set value of any one of the set value 1 to the set value 3). Role ratio, part where only the base can be displayed, etc.)
The gaming machine according to any one of the means 1 to the means 6 is described, and the information can be easily confirmed in the means 7.

As a game machine of means 8 of the above-mentioned feature part,
A calculation means capable of calculating information on the game value given by the game value giving means (for example, a connection ratio (%), a combination ratio (%) for 6000 CPU 103s, and a cumulative ratio (%), a combination. The part for calculating the ratio (%) and the base (base 1 (%)) calculated based on the previous 60000 prize balls, and the base (base 2 (%)) calculated based on the previous 60000 prize balls. Etc.)
The calculation means can individually calculate individual information which is the information according to each set value, and can also calculate compound information which is the information according to two or more different set values (for example,). The total ratio, combination ratio, base calculation part, etc. of 2 or more set values),
The information display means can display the information and the composite information (for example, a portion that calculates a connection ratio, a combination ratio, and a base in two or more set values and can display them on the display monitor 29).
The gaming machine according to any one of the means 1 to the means 7 is described, and according to the means 8, the state of the gaming machine can be grasped in more detail.

(Explanation of production control for other feature parts)
FIG. 8-28 is a flowchart showing an example of the effect control main process executed by the effect control CPU 120 in the embodiment including the above-mentioned feature unit. It suffices that this effect control main process can be executed instead of the effect control main process in the above embodiment. In the effect control main process of this embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 executes the same initialization process (step AKS011) as in the above embodiment, and then, unlike the above embodiment, performs a power-on command process (step). AKS012) is executed. After executing the command processing at power-on, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is on (step AKS013), and if it is off (step AKS013; No), as in the above embodiment. The process of step AKS013 is repeatedly executed and waits. On the other hand, when the timer interrupt flag is on (step AKS013; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared and turned off (step AKS014), the command analysis process (step AKS015), and the effect control process process. (Step AKS016) and the effect random number update process (step AKS017) are executed in order.

FIG. 8-29 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step AKS012 as the command process at power-on. For example, the effect control CPU 120 acquires the effect control command transmitted from the main board 11 with the start of power supply as a receive command, and determines the content thereof. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the reception command is the command 9000H which is the RAM clear notification command (step AKS021). If it is not a RAM clear notification command (step AKS021; No), it is determined whether or not the reception command is the command 9200H, which is a power failure recovery designation command (step AKS022). If it is not a power failure recovery stop command (step AKS022; No), it is determined whether or not the reception command is the command 9100H that is the setting change start command (step AKS023). If it is not the setting change start command (step AKS023; No), it is determined whether or not the received command is the command 9400H which is the setting confirmation start command (step AKS024). If it is not the setting confirmation start command (step AKS024; No), the process returns to step AKS021, and steps AKS021 to AKS024 are repeatedly executed and waited until the reception command is acquired. If the reception command cannot be acquired and a predetermined error determination time has elapsed, it may be notified that an error of the reception command has occurred.

If it is determined in step AKS023 that the reception command is a setting change start command (step AKS023; Yes), the game stop state start processing is executed (step AKS025). In the process at the start of the game stop state, the progress of the effect control accompanying the progress of the game is stopped in response to the game stop state in which the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped. In the game stop state start processing executed in step AKS025, for example, among the effect control commands transmitted from the main board 11, commands other than the setting change end command are set to invalidate reception. do it. As a result, it is sufficient to regulate so that various effects accompanying the progress of the game, such as a variable display of the effect symbol and an effect display during a big hit, are not executed. When the setting change start command is received, various effects associated with the progress of the game that can be executed when the game is in the game stop state corresponding to the setting change state and not in the game stop state are not executed. There is a limit as a range or a limit.

After the game stop state start processing is executed in step AKS025, control is performed to start the setting change notification (step AKS026). For example, the effect control CPU 120 causes the effect display device 5 to display the setting change notification screen based on the control data prepared in advance in response to the setting change notification, and outputs the setting change notification sound from the speakers 8L and 8R. In addition, control should be performed. After the control of the setting change notification is started in this way, it is determined whether or not to end the setting change (step AKS027). In step AKS027, when the command received from the main board 11 is the command 93XXH which is the setting change end command, it may be determined that the setting change is completed. If the setting change end command is not received and the setting change is not completed (step AKS027; No), step AKS027 is repeatedly executed and waits.

When it is determined in step AKS027 to end the setting change (step AKS027; Yes), control is performed to end the setting change notification (step AKS028). For example, the effect control CPU 120 may perform control so as to end the display of the setting change notification screen in the effect display device 5 and end the output of the setting change notification sound by the speakers 8L and 8R. After the control of the setting change notification is completed in this way, the processing at the end of the game stop state is executed (step AKS029). In the process at the end of the game stop state, it is sufficient to set to enable command reception from the main board 11, which has been invalidated. As a result, the regulation may be lifted so that various effects as the game progresses, such as a variable display of the effect symbol and an effect display during a big hit, can be executed.

After that, control is performed to execute the initialization notification (step AKS030). For example, the effect control CPU 120 initializes to the effect display device 5 in the initialization notification period until a predetermined initialization notification time elapses, based on the control data prepared in advance in response to the initialization notification. Control may be performed so that the notification screen is displayed and the initialization notification voice is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. Even if it is determined in step AKS021 that the reception command is a RAM clear notification command (step AKS021; Yes), the initialization notification may be executed by proceeding to step AKS030. In this way, it is possible to notify that the stored contents of the RAM 102 have been initialized (cleared) in response to the case where an operation of pressing the clear switch AK001 is detected with the start of power supply by turning on the power.

If it is determined in step AKS024 that the reception command is the setting confirmation start command (step AKS024; Yes), the game stop state start processing is executed (step AKS031). In the game stop state start processing executed in step AKS031, for example, among the effect control commands transmitted from the main board 11, commands other than the setting confirmation end command are set to invalidate reception. do it. As a result, it is sufficient to regulate so that various effects accompanying the progress of the game, such as a variable display of the effect symbol and an effect display during a big hit, are not executed. When the setting confirmation start command is received, various effects associated with the progress of the game that can be executed when the game is in the game stop state corresponding to the setting confirmation state and the game is not in the stop state are not executed. There is a limit as a range or a limit.

After the game stop state start processing is executed in step AKS031, control is performed to start the setting confirmation notification (step AKS032). For example, the effect control CPU 120 causes the effect display device 5 to display the setting confirmation notification screen based on the control data prepared in advance in response to the setting confirmation notification, and outputs the setting confirmation notification voice from the speakers 8L and 8R. In addition, control should be performed. After the control of the setting confirmation notification is started in this way, it is determined whether or not to end the setting confirmation (step AKS033). In step AKS033, when the command received from the main board 11 is the command 9401H which is the setting confirmation end command, it may be determined that the setting confirmation is completed. If the setting confirmation end command is not received and the setting confirmation is not completed (step AKS033; No), step AKS033 is repeatedly executed and waits.

When it is determined in step AKS033 that the setting confirmation is completed (step AKS033; Yes), control is performed to end the setting confirmation notification (step AKS034). For example, the effect control CPU 120 may perform control so as to end the display of the setting confirmation notification screen on the effect display device 5 and end the output of the setting confirmation notification sound by the speakers 8L and 8R. In this way, after the control of the setting confirmation notification is completed, the game stop state end processing is executed (step AKS035). As a result, the regulation may be lifted so that various effects as the game progresses, such as a variable display of the effect symbol and an effect display during a big hit, can be executed.

After that, control may be performed to execute the power failure recovery notification. For example, the effect control CPU 120 causes the effect display device 5 to display the power failure recovery notification screen based on the control data prepared in advance in response to the power failure recovery notification, and outputs the power failure recovery notification sound from the speakers 8L and 8R. In addition, control may be performed. Even when it is determined in step AKS022 that the received command is a power failure recovery designation command (step AKS022; Yes), the power failure recovery notification may be executed. In these cases, if it is possible to notify that the stored contents of the RAM 102 have been restored to the contents at the time of a power failure in response to the case where the operation of pressing the clear switch AK001 is not detected when the power supply is started by turning on the power. Good.

FIG. 8-30 shows the priority of control with respect to notification by effect control, screen display, and the like in this embodiment. The pachinko game machine 1 is in a game stop state in which the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped when the setting change state or the setting confirmation state is controlled with the start of the power supply by turning on the power. Correspondingly, the effect control CPU 120 executes the game stop state start processing in the step AKS025 and the step AKS031 of the power-on command processing. After the game stop state start processing is executed, the reception of commands different from the setting change end command and the setting confirmation end command is invalidated, and the control related to the normal effect is restricted from being executed. Therefore, the priority AKP01 of the setting change notification and the setting confirmation notification is the highest priority among the priorities related to the effect control. For example, the priority AKP02 of the setting screen such as the power saving function has a lower priority than the priority AKP01 of the setting change notification and the setting confirmation notification. The power saving function setting screen displays the power saving function when the switch position of the output amount changeover switch provided on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (game machine frame 3) is set to a predetermined position as a specific position. It is a screen that can be displayed on the effect display device 5 in order to enable the presence / absence, type, setting of the current date / time by RTC, and the like. Since the priority AKP03 for the magnet error notification and the like has a lower priority than the priority AKP02 for the power saving function and the like setting screen, the priority is lower than the priority AKP01 for the setting change notification and the setting confirmation notification. Since the priority AKP0Z of the normal game screen corresponding to the progress of the game in the normal time is the lowest priority among the priorities related to the effect control, the priority is lower than the priority of the setting change notification and the setting confirmation notification AKP01. It becomes a degree.

In this way, the priority AKP01 of the setting change notification and the setting confirmation notification is higher than the priority AKP02 of the setting screen such as the power saving function, so that the control to start the setting change notification is performed by the step AKS026 of the command processing at power-on. If the setting is changed or the setting confirmation notification is started by step AKS032, the switch position of the output amount changeover switch is temporarily switched to a specific position before the setting change or the setting confirmation is completed. Even if this happens, the display of the power saving function setting screen is not started by switching the output amount changeover switch. In this way, the display related to the setting value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 such as the setting change notification screen and the setting confirmation notification screen is displayed with priority over the display related to the output amount or output control of the effect such as the power saving function setting screen. As a result, the display related to the set value is appropriately displayed, and it is possible to prevent the operation of changing the set value from being hindered.

(Explanation of a modified example of effect control in other feature parts)
FIG. 8-31 is a flowchart showing an example of the effect control main process executed in the modified example in which the setting confirmation process can be executed during the game. The set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not limited to a form that can be confirmed when the power is turned on, and the confirmation of the set value may be executed during the game. In this case, after the CPU 103 starts the processing after step Sa16 in the main processing, the gaming machine frame 3 is opened by the staff of the game hall or the like, and the switching operation of turning on the lock switch 51 is performed. When the operation is detected, the display monitor 29 causes the first display unit 29A to display the set value set in the current pachinko gaming machine 1. This display is not changed even if the setting changeover switch 52 or the clear switch AK001 is pressed by a staff member of the game hall, and is a display for confirming the set value set in the current pachinko game machine 1. There is. When the execution of the setting confirmation process is started during the game, the setting confirmation state in which the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be confirmed is set, and the setting confirmation start command is sent from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. Command 9400H is transmitted. When the execution of the setting confirmation process ends, the setting confirmation state ends, and the command 9401H, which is a setting confirmation end command, is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. In the effect control main process in the modified example, after executing the effect random number update process in step AKS017, the ongoing setting confirmation process (step AKS01A) is executed, and then the process returns to step AKS013.

FIG. 8-32 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step AKS01A as the ongoing setting confirmation process. For example, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the setting is being confirmed so that the set value can be confirmed on the display monitor 29 (step AKS051). In step AKS051, for example, it may be determined that the setting is being confirmed during the period from the control in step AKS058 to the control in step AKS060. If the setting is not being confirmed (step AKS051; No), it is determined whether or not the setting confirmation start command transmitted from the main board 11 has been received (step AKS052). At this time, when the setting confirmation start command is received (step AKS052; Yes), it is determined whether or not the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in progress (step AKS053). In step AKS053, it is determined that the game is not in progress during the period from receiving the customer waiting demo designation command transmitted from the main board 11 to receiving the first fluctuation start command and the second fluctuation start command. In other periods, it may be determined that the game is in progress.

If it is determined in step AKS053 that the game is in progress (step AKS053; Yes), the in-progress setting confirmation flag is set to the on state (step AKS054). The in-progress setting confirmation flag is a flag indicating that the setting confirmation start command has been received while the game is in progress. Waiting for customers sent from the main board 11 after determining that the setting confirmation start command has not been received in step AKS052 (step AKS052; No) or after turning on the ongoing setting confirmation flag in step AKS054. It is determined whether or not the demo designation command has been received (step AKS055). At this time, if the customer waiting demo designation command is not received (step AKS055; No), the ongoing setting confirmation process ends.

When it is determined in step AKS055 that the customer waiting demo designation command has been received (step AKS055; Yes), it is determined whether or not the in-progress setting confirmation flag is on (step AKS056). At this time, if the in-progress setting confirmation flag is off (step AKS056; No), the in-progress setting confirmation process ends. On the other hand, when the in-progress setting confirmation flag is on (step AKS056; Yes), the in-progress setting confirmation flag is cleared and turned off (step AKS057), and then the setting confirmation notification is started. (Step AKS058). Even if it is determined in step AKS053 that the game is not in progress (step AKS053; No), the process proceeds to step AKS058, and control is performed to start the setting confirmation notification. As a result, when the setting confirmation start command is received while the game is in progress, the setting confirmation notification can be started after receiving the customer waiting demo designation command.

If it is determined in step AKS051 that the setting is being confirmed (step AKS051; Yes), it is determined whether or not the setting confirmation end command has been received (step AKS059). At this time, if the setting confirmation end command has not been received (step AKS059; No), the ongoing setting confirmation process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the setting confirmation end command has been received (step AKS059; Yes), control is performed to end the setting confirmation notification (step AKS060).

By executing such an ongoing setting confirmation process, when the setting confirmation process is executed during the game and the set value set is displayed on the display monitor 29, the effect control board 12 side may display the set value. After receiving the customer waiting demo display command transmitted from the main board 11, the display of the setting confirmation notification screen and the output of the setting confirmation notification voice can be started. As a result, when the set value can be confirmed during the execution of the effect accompanying the progress of the game, the inconvenience due to the confirmation of the set value can be prevented by preventing the effect being executed from being canceled.

When the setting confirmation process is executed during the game on the side of the main board 11, the setting confirmation state may be controlled after the customer waiting demo designation command can be transmitted. In this case, for example, a setting confirmation start command may be transmitted to the effect control board 12 together with the customer waiting demo designation command. Alternatively, instead of sending the setting confirmation start command together with the customer waiting demo designation command, a dedicated command corresponding to the setting confirmation during the game is sent, and the set value set after the progress of the game is completed. You may want to control the state in which you can confirm.

Alternatively, the set set value is displayed on the display monitor 29 provided on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the effect display device 5 does not need to display the set value. Therefore, when the setting confirmation process is executed during the game, the display monitor 29 displays a display on which the setting value can be confirmed without transmitting a setting confirmation start command or the like from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. Control to start may be performed. In this case, the effect control board 12 may be controlled by the effect control CPU 120 or the like so that the effect is continuously executed as the game progresses.

In addition to the setting change notification and the setting confirmation notification, the setting change end notification and the setting confirmation end notification may be executed. For example, in the command processing at power-on, the setting change notification ends by the control in step AKS028, the setting change end notification starts with the start of the setting change end notification period, and the setting change end notification period ends. The setting change end notification may be terminated. Further, in the command processing at power-on, the setting confirmation notification ends by the control in step AKS034, the setting confirmation end notification starts with the start of the setting confirmation end notification period, and the setting confirmation end notification period ends. The setting confirmation end notification may be terminated.

In the setting change notification, control may be performed so that the setting change notification voice is output from the speakers 8L and 8R without displaying the setting change notification screen on the effect display device 5. In the setting confirmation notification, control may be performed so that the setting confirmation notification voice is output from the speakers 8L and 8R without displaying the setting confirmation notification screen on the effect display device 5. Alternatively, in the setting change notification, in addition to the display of the setting change notification screen and the output of the setting change notification voice, or in place of part or all, a part or all of the light emitting members of the game effect lamp 9, or the game effect lamp 9 Control may be performed to cause an arbitrary light emitting member such as a notification lamp provided separately from the notification lamp to emit light in a predetermined setting change notification mode. In the setting confirmation notification, in addition to the display of the setting confirmation notification screen and the output of the setting confirmation notification voice, or in place of part or all, part or all of the game effect lamp 9, a part of the game effect lamp 9. Alternatively, control may be performed so that all the light emitting members or any light emitting member such as a notification lamp provided separately from the game effect lamp 9 is made to emit light in a predetermined setting confirmation notification mode. As described above, the setting change notification may be performed by using an arbitrary effect device or a notification device different from the effect device to notify that the set value can be changed. The setting confirmation notification may be performed by using an arbitrary production device or a notification device different from the production device to notify that the set value can be confirmed. The form is not limited to the form in which the setting change notification and the setting confirmation notification are performed, and one or both of the setting change notification and the setting confirmation notification may not be performed.

The command 93XXH, which is the setting change end command, and the 9401H, which is the setting confirmation end command, are not limited to the prepared form, and a common setting end time command is used as the setting change end command and the setting confirmation end command. It may be something that can be done. In this case, in the power-on command processing, it is determined in step AKS027 that the setting change is completed when the setting end command is received, and the setting confirmation is finished when the setting end command is received in step AKS033. Then, it should be judged.

(Explanation of feature 71AK)
FIG. 8-33 shows a configuration example of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001 provided on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 with respect to the feature portion 71AK of this embodiment. The output amount changeover switch 71AK001 may be provided on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the upper right portion of the effect control board 12 on which the effect control CPU 120 is mounted. The output amount changeover switch 71AK001 can be operated from the outside through an opening formed in the substrate case for accommodating the effect control substrate 12. The output amount changeover switch 71AK001 may be a rotary switch capable of detecting a predetermined operation such as a switch changeover operation for initializing a predetermined effect output or the like. The effect output initially set by the output amount changeover switch 71AK001 may include at least the volume of the speakers 8L and 8R. Further, the amount of light emitted from a light emitting member such as the game effect lamp 9 may be included. For example, when the staff of the game hall opens the frame 3 for the game machine, the output amount changeover switch 71AK001 becomes operable. As described above, the output amount changeover switch 71AK001 is required to open the gaming machine frame 3 as a condition for changing the initial setting of the effect output. The output amount changeover switch 71AK001 initially sets the effect output to one of a plurality of stages. Further, depending on the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001, it is possible to switch whether to allow or prohibit the change adjustment of the effect output by the player using the stick controller 31A or the like. The effect control CPU 120 may store data indicating such effect output settings in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 or the like as output setting information.

As shown in FIG. 8-33 (B), the output amount changeover switch 71AK001 has a total of 16 channels from “0” to “F”, and the knob 71AK002 can be turned into a channel by rotating the knob 71AK002. The corresponding switch position can be switched. In this embodiment, the volume is initially set to one of the six stages according to which of the "0" to "F" the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001 is, and the volume is adjusted by the player. Whether to allow or not is switched. The output amount changeover switch 71AK001 is connected to the effect control CPU 120 directly or via a predetermined circuit, and a changeover switch signal indicating the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001 is input to the effect control CPU 120 to correspond to a channel. The switch position can be specified.

FIG. 8-34 shows the initial setting control 71AKC01 such as the effect output according to the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001. In this initial setting control 71AKC01, for example, when the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001 is "5", the volume of the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R is set according to "volume 6 (maximum)". The upper limit volume is initially set to "97.0", and the volume can be set (adjusted) by the player (permitted). It should be noted that the volume of the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R is not limited, and the output amount of an arbitrary effect device such as the light amount of the game effect lamp 9 may be initially set according to the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001. .. When the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001 is any of "6" to "F", the volume setting (adjustment) by the player is disabled (prohibited), so the effect is produced by the initially set effect output. Is executed. Further, corresponding to the case where the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001 is "F", the effect display device 5 can display the setting screen for the power saving function, etc., and the presence / absence and type (power saving mode) of the power saving function, and The RTC126 can set (change) a value indicating the current date and time.

As described above, the output amount changeover switch 71AK001 is provided on the effect control board 12 on which the effect control CPU 120 is mounted, and the operation related to the adjustment of the effect output is received by the knob 71AK002, based on the detection of the operation of switching the switch position. , It is possible to control the output amount of the effect to any of multiple stages. In the effect control CPU 120, a process for controlling the output amount of the effect to any one of a plurality of stages is executed based on the switch signal capable of specifying the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001.

FIG. 8-35 shows an execution example of the setting change notification, the setting confirmation notification, and the initialization notification with respect to the feature unit 71AK. In this execution example, as the setting change notification, as shown in FIG. 8-35 (A), the setting change notification screen 71AKD01 is displayed on the effect display device 5, and the setting change notification voice 71AKE01 is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. .. Further, as the setting confirmation notification, as shown in FIG. 8-35 (B), the setting confirmation notification screen 71AKD02 is displayed on the effect display device 5, and the setting confirmation notification voice 71AKE02 is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. As the initialization notification, as shown in FIG. 8-35 (C), the initialization notification screen 71AKD03 is displayed on the effect display device 5, and the initialization notification voice 71AKE03 is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. In the feature unit 71AK, the command process at power-on is executed in the step AKS012 of the effect control main process, as in the above embodiment. In this power-on command process, the setting change notification is started by the control in step AKS026, and the setting change notification is finished by the control in step AKS028. Further, the control in step AKS032 starts the setting confirmation notification, and the control in step AKS034 ends the setting confirmation notification. Further, by the control in step AKS030, the initialization notification is started with the start of the initialization notification period, and the initialization notification is ended with the end of the initialization notification period. The setting change notification screen 71AKD01, the setting confirmation notification screen 71AKD02, and the initialization notification screen 71AKD03 are not limited to the mode of being displayed on the entire display area of the effect display device 5, and are a part of the display area of the effect display device 5. It may be the mode shown in. Further, the setting change notification is provided on the side of the main board 11 in addition to the display on the effect display device 5 performed on the side of the effect control board 12 and the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, or in addition to this. The display on the symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B may be performed by setting a light emitting mode different from that during the normal game. According to this, in addition to the notification in the effect display device 5, the special symbol display device can also be notified, and it is possible to preferably notify that the setting is being changed.

The feature unit 71AK is configured to include an output amount changeover switch 71AK001, and can perform initial setting such that the effect output such as volume is set to one of a plurality of stages corresponding to the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001. On the other hand, the audio output in the setting change notification, the setting confirmation notification, and the initialization notification is the maximum volume that can be output by the pachinko gaming machine 1 regardless of the initial setting of the volume corresponding to the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001. Output may be performed at a certain "volume 6 (maximum)" (upper limit volume "97.0"). For example, in the setting change notification, the setting change notification voice 71AKE01 that notifies the message "setting is being changed" is output from the speakers 8L and 8R at the maximum volume. In the setting confirmation notification, the setting confirmation notification voice 71AKE02, which notifies the message "setting is being confirmed", is output from the speakers 8L and 8R at the maximum volume. In the initialization notification, the initialization notification voice 71AKE03, which notifies the message "initialized", is output from the speakers 8L and 8R at the maximum volume.

In this way, according to the operation of switching the switch position in the output amount changeover switch 71AK001, the operation related to the adjustment of the effect output is detected, and the output amount of the effect is controlled to one of a plurality of stages based on the detection. In the setting change notification, which is a notification regarding the change of the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the setting change notification voice 71AKE01 is notified by the maximum volume which is a common output amount regardless of the detection of the operation related to the adjustment of the effect output. .. Also in the setting confirmation notification and the initialization notification, the setting confirmation notification voice 71AKE02 and the initialization notification voice 71AKE03 may be notified at the maximum volume which is a common output amount regardless of the detection of the operation related to the adjustment of the effect output. In this way, since the notification is performed by the common output amount, it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts due to the change and confirmation of the set value and the initialization (clearing) of the stored contents in the RAM 102.

FIG. 8-36 shows a display example when the player volume adjustment, the power saving function setting, and the like are performed with respect to the feature unit 71AK. For example, when the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001 is "0" and the effect output has not yet been adjusted by the player, the volume setting is "volume 1 (minimum)". FIG. 8-36 (A) shows the player volume adjustment screen 71AKD11 displayed on the effect display device 5 corresponding to this case. The player volume adjustment screen 71AKD11 includes an effect image showing six memories corresponding to six levels of volume, and the display color of each memory is changed according to the current volume. For example, when the volume setting is "Volume 1 (minimum)", one memory is displayed in the first display color (for example, red), while the remaining five memories are displayed in the second display color (for example, white). .. At this time, in response to the detection of the operation of tilting the operation stick (lever) of the stick controller 31A to the right, the volume setting is changed to "volume 2" and the first on the player volume adjustment screen 71AKD11. Increases the display color memory by one. In this way, each time the first operation of tilting the operation stick (lever) of the stick controller 31A in the first direction (right direction, etc.) is detected, a multi-step effect is produced until the effect output setting reaches the maximum. The output amount may be changed to increase step by step. On the other hand, each time the second operation of tilting the operation stick (lever) of the stick controller 31A in the second direction (left direction) is detected, the effect output amount in multiple stages is increased until the effect output setting reaches the minimum. It may be changed so as to decrease one step at a time.

When the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001 is "F", the power saving function and the value of RTC126 can be set. FIG. 8-36 (B) shows a power saving function setting screen 71AKD12 displayed on the effect display device 5 corresponding to this case. The power saving function setting screen 71AKD12 includes a display area for setting the power saving function and a display area for setting the value of the current date and time (current time) by the RTC126. When the power saving function setting screen 71AKD12 is displayed, the presence / absence and type of the power saving function (power saving mode), depending on the detection of the operation of the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B by the staff of the amusement park or the like. Then, the RTC126 sets (changes) a value indicating the current date and time. In the effect control CPU 120, a process for setting (changing) the power saving function or the like is executed based on the display of the power saving function setting screen 71AKD12 and the detection of the operation of changing each setting. For example, when it is set to select "power saving mode A" on the display of the power saving function setting screen 71AKD12, the control to activate the power saving function is performed only during the customer waiting demonstration in which the demo screen is displayed. Anything that is done will do. In addition, when it is set to select "power saving mode B" on the display of the power saving function setting screen 71AKD12, for example, the brightness of the game effect lamp 9 during the execution of the variable display in addition to the customer waiting demonstration. Anything that can be controlled to activate the power saving function, such as reducing (light emission amount), may be used.

FIG. 8-37 is a flowchart showing an example of the effect control main process executed by the effect control CPU 120 with respect to the feature unit 71AK. It suffices that this effect control main process can be executed in place of the effect control main process in the above embodiment. In the effect control main process of the feature unit 71AK, the effect control CPU 120 executes the initialization process (step 71AKS011) and the power-on command process (step 71AKS012) in the same manner as in the above embodiment. The initialization process of step 71AKS011 is a process corresponding to the initialization process of step AKS011 in the above embodiment, and the power-on command process of step 71AKS012 is a process corresponding to the power-on process of step AKS012 in the above embodiment. It should be. After executing the power-on command process in step 71AKS012, the start output switching process (step AKS013) is executed unlike the above embodiment. After that, as in the above embodiment, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is on (step 71AKS014), and if it is off (step 71AKS014; No), the process of step 71AKS014 is repeatedly executed. And wait. On the other hand, when the timer interrupt flag is on (step 71AKS014; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared to the off state (step 71AKS015), the command analysis process (step 71AKS016), and the effect control process process. (Step 71AKS017) and the effect random number update process (step 71AKS018) are executed in order. Further, in the effect control main process of the feature unit 71AK, the ongoing output change process (step 71AKS019) is executed, and then the process returns to step 71AKS014.

FIG. 8-38 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step 71AKS013 as the output switching process at the start. In the start output switching process, the effect control CPU 120 specifies the switch position based on the changeover switch signal from the output amount changeover switch 71AK001 (step 71AKS031). At this time, it is determined whether or not the specified switch position is “F” (step 71AKS032). Then, when the switch position is other than "F" (step 71AKS032; No), control is performed to switch the initial setting of the output amount by adjusting the effect output according to the switch position (step 71AKS033), and the output at the start. The switching process ends. In step 71AKS033, for example, initial output setting data indicating that the switch position corresponding to the channel can be specified may be stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122.

When it is determined in step 71AKS032 that the switch position is "F" (step 71AKS032; Yes), control is performed to start setting the power saving function and the like (step 71AKS034). For example, the effect control CPU 120 may control the effect display device 5 to display the power saving function setting screen 71AKD12 based on the control data prepared in advance corresponding to the setting of the power saving function or the like. After the control for setting the power saving function or the like is started in this way, it is determined whether or not the setting is completed (step 71AKS035). In step 71AKS035, when the selection of the item indicating "end" is confirmed on the power saving function setting screen 71AKD12, it may be determined that the setting is completed. If this setting is not completed (step 71AKS035; No), the corresponding control is performed during the setting of the power saving function and the like (step 71AKS036), and the process returns to step 71AKS035. In step 71AKS036, the display on the power saving function setting screen 71AKD12 can be changed according to the detection of the operation of tilting the operation stick (lever) of the stick controller 31A, the detection of the operation of pressing the push button 31B, and the like. As you can see, control should be performed.

When it is determined in step 71AKS035 that the setting is completed (step 71AKS035; Yes), control is performed to end the setting such as the power saving function (step 71AKS037), and the output switching process at the start is ended. In step 71AKS037, for example, the effect control CPU 120 stores power saving function data indicating the presence / absence and type (power saving mode) of the power saving function in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 or the like. When the setting to change the value of RTC126 is made, the data indicating the changed value is set in RTC126.

FIG. 8-39 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step 71AKS019 as the ongoing output change process. In the in-progress output change process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the switching permission condition is satisfied (step 71AKS051). The switching permission condition may be predetermined as a condition for permitting the adjustment of the effect output using the output amount changeover switch 71AK001 during the execution of the effect control accompanying the progress of the game control in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the switching permission condition may be satisfied when the gaming machine frame 3 is opened. When such a changeover permission condition is satisfied (step 71AKS051; Yes), the switch position is detected based on the changeover switch signal from the output amount changeover switch 71AK001 (step 71AKS052). Based on this detection result, it is determined whether or not the switch position has been changed (step 71AKS053). For example, when the effect control CPU 120 compares the switch position shown in the initial output setting data stored in the predetermined area of the RAM 122 with the switch position specified from the changeover switch signal, and the comparison results do not match. , It may be determined that the switch position has been changed.

If it is determined in step 71AKS053 that the switch position has been changed (step 71AKS053; Yes), it is determined whether or not the changed switch position is "F" (step 71AKS054). At this time, if the switch position is other than "F" (step 71AKS054; No), control for switching the initial setting of the output amount is performed by adjusting the effect output according to the switch position (step 71AKS055). In step 71AKS055, for example, initial output setting data indicating that the switch position corresponding to the channel can be specified may be stored (updated) in a predetermined area of the RAM 122.

When it is determined in step 71AKS054 that the switch position is "F" (step 71AKS054; Yes), control is performed to start setting the power saving function and the like (step 71AKS056). In this case, the same processing as in steps 71AKS034 to 71AKS037 of the output switching process at the start may be executed. That is, it is determined whether or not the setting is completed (step 71AKS057), if it is not completed (step 71AKS057; No), the corresponding control is performed during the setting of the power saving function and the like (step 71AKS058), and step 71AKS057. Return to. After that, when the setting is completed (step 71AKS057; Yes), control is performed to end the setting of the power saving function and the like (step 71AKS058).

Control is performed when the switching permission condition is not satisfied in step 71AKS051 (step 71AKS051; No), when the switch position is not changed in step 71AKS053 (step 71AKS053; No), or in step 71AKS055 or step 71AKS059. After that, it is determined whether or not the volume and the like can be adjusted by the player based on the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001 (step 71AKS060). In step 71AKS060, when the current switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001 is any of "0" to "5", the volume can be set (adjusted) by the player (permission). , It may be determined that the adjustment by the player is possible. If adjustment by the player is not possible (prohibited) (step 71AKS060; No), the ongoing output change process is terminated. The switch position is not limited to the one that determines whether or not the switching permission condition is satisfied in step 71AKS051, and the switch position may be detected by step 71AKS052 without making the determination in step 71AKS051.

When it is determined in step 71AKS060 that the adjustment by the player is possible (step 71AKS060; Yes), it is determined whether or not an operation for changing the output amount of the effect is detected (step 71AKS061). In step 71AKS061, for example, when the player volume adjustment screen 71AKD11 is displayed, the detection of the operation of changing the effect output amount in a plurality of stages is detected based on the detection result of the operation of operating the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B. It is sufficient to judge whether or not there was. If such an operation is not detected (step 71AKS061; No), the ongoing output change process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the operation has been detected (step 71AKS061; Yes), the output amount is adjusted according to the detection result (step 71AKS062), and the ongoing output change process is terminated. In step 71AKS062, when the operation of pressing the push button 31B is detected on the player volume adjustment screen 71AKD11, the update output setting data indicating the changed volume setting and the like is stored (updated) in a predetermined area of the RAM 122. Just let me do it.

(Explanation of a modified example of the feature 71AK)
FIG. 8-40 shows the priority of control with respect to the notification by the effect control, the screen display, and the like in the modified example of the feature unit 71AK. The pachinko gaming machine 1 is in a game stop state in which the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped when the setting is changed when the power supply is started by turning on the power. On the other hand, when the power supply is started by turning on the power and the setting is confirmed, the game may be controlled so as not to stop the game. Correspondingly, the effect control CPU 120 does not execute the game stop state start processing in the power-on command processing step AKS031, and when the setting is confirmed, for example, the output amount changeover switch 71AK001 The input of the changeover switch signal that can specify the switch position may be enabled. In this case, the priority 71AKP11 of the setting change notification is the highest priority among the priorities related to the effect control, and is higher than the priority 71AKP12 of the power saving function setting screen and the like. On the other hand, the priority 71AKP13 of the setting confirmation notification has a lower priority than the priority 71AKP12 of the setting screen such as the power saving function. Since the priority 71AKP1Z of the normal game screen corresponding to the progress of the game in the normal time is the lowest priority among the priorities related to the effect control, the priority AKP11 of the setting change notification, the power saving function setting screen, etc. The priority is lower than the priority 71AKP12 and the setting confirmation notification priority AKP13.

As described above, the priority 71AKP11 of the setting change notification is higher than the priority 71AKP12 of the power saving function setting screen, etc., and therefore, when the control to start the setting change notification is performed by the step AKS026 of the command processing at power-on. Is involved in detecting the operation of switching the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001 even if the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001 is switched to a specific position of "F" before the setting change is completed. The display of the power saving function setting screen 71AKD12 is not started. On the other hand, the priority 71AKP13 of the setting confirmation notification is lower than the priority 71AKP12 of the power saving function setting screen, etc., so that when the control to start the setting confirmation notification is performed by the step AKS032 of the command processing at power-on. Is power saving based on the detection of the operation of switching the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001 when the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001 is switched to the specific position of "F" before the setting confirmation is completed. The display of the function setting screen 71AKD12 may be started. In this way, while the control for switching the initial setting of the output amount of the effect is not executed when the set value is changed, the control for switching the initial setting of the output amount of the effect may be executed when the set value is confirmed. .. As a result, it is possible to appropriately control the stage of the output amount of the effect while confirming the set value in order to prevent the setting value change work from being hindered.

By executing the power-on command process in step 71AKS012 and then executing the start output switching process in step 71AKS013, it is possible to detect the operation of changing the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001 when the setting is changed. Regardless of this, it is not limited to the form of restricting the control of the output amount of the effect so as not to be executed, and whether or not the operation of changing the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001 is detected by the command processing at power-on. When the judgment is possible and the operation is detected, the information indicating the switch position can be specified is stored, and after the setting change state is completed, the output amount of the effect is controlled based on the stored information. It may be something to do. For example, in the power-on command process of the above embodiment, when it is determined in step AKS027 that the setting change is not completed, the switch position is specified based on the changeover switch signal from the output amount changeover switch 71AK001. At this time, information indicating the specific result of the switch position is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122. After that, in step 71AKS031 of the output switching process at the start, the switch position of the output amount switching switch 71AK001 may be specified based on the information indicating the specifying result of the switch position. Also in this case, when the setting is changed, it is possible to limit the control of the output amount of the effect regardless of the detection of the operation of changing the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001.

Alternatively, when the setting is changed, it is determined whether or not the switch position is a specific switch position, such as whether or not the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001 is "F", and the switch position is a specific switch position. The control of displaying the setting change notification screen 71AKD01 on the effect display device 5 may be prioritized over the control of displaying the power saving function setting screen 71AKD 12 on the effect display device 5. In this case, when the setting change notification is completed by the control in step AKS028 of the command processing at power-on, the control for displaying the setting change notification screen 71AKD01, which has been prioritized, on the effect display device 5 is also terminated. It suffices if the display device 5 can start displaying the power saving function setting screen 71AKD12.

Unlike the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B, a detection device capable of detecting an operation performed by the player is provided, and the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be changed based on the detection of the operation by the detection device. May be good. For example, together with or in place of the lock switch 51 and the clear switch AK001, a setting value change switch capable of detecting an operation such as a switching operation or a pressing operation by the player is provided, and the operation of the player is detected by the setting value changing switch. Based on the above, the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be changed in the same manner as when the operation is detected by the clear switch AK001.

As described above, in the effect control main process of the feature unit 71AK, the power-on command process is executed in step 71AKS012 as in the above embodiment, and then the start output switching process is executed in step 71AKS013. In the power-on command process, for example, in step AKS025 and step AKS031, the game stop state start process is executed. After the game stop state start processing is executed, the reception of commands different from the setting change end command and the setting confirmation end command is invalidated, and the control related to the normal effect is restricted from being executed. In this case, the input of the changeover switch signal that can specify the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001 is also invalid, so that the effect output is adjusted according to the switch position and the power saving function setting screen 71AKD12 is not displayed. , Control based on the detection of the operation of changing the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001 is restricted (prohibited). In this way, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled to the setting change state that allows the change of the set value with the start of the power supply by turning on the power, the effect is produced regardless of the detection of the operation related to the adjustment of the output amount of the effect. Execution of control to switch the initial setting of the output amount of is restricted (prohibited). As a result, the control for changing the set value has priority over the control for switching the initial setting of the output amount of the effect, so that it is possible to prevent the operation of changing the set value from being hindered. Therefore, the set value can be set appropriately.

The effect control CPU 120 controls the execution of the effect according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. The effect control CPU 120 is provided on the effect control board. The output amount changeover switch 71AK001 is provided on the effect control board 12 on which the effect control CPU 120 is mounted, and the knob 71AK002 receives an operation related to the adjustment of the output amount of the effect. As a result, the initial setting of the output amount of the effect can be appropriately switched in order to prevent the work of changing the set value from being hindered. Therefore, the set value can be set appropriately.

In the effect control main process of the feature unit 71AK, after executing the power-on command process in step 71AKS012, the start output switching process is executed in step 71AKS013. In the output switching process at the start of step 71AKS013, step 71AKS033 controls to switch the initial setting of the effect output according to the switch position, or steps 71AKS034 to 71AKS037 controls to set the power saving function and the like. In this way, when the setting change state as the change permission state is controlled with the start of the power supply, if there is a detection of the operation of changing the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001 before the setting change state ends, After the setting change state is completed, the output amount stage of the effect is controlled based on the detection of the operation of changing the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001. As a result, the initial setting of the output amount of the effect can be appropriately switched in order to prevent the work of changing the set value from being hindered. Therefore, the set value can be set appropriately.

When setting change notification is performed by the display screen of the effect display device 5 or the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, the setting change notification sound 71AKE01 is irrespective of the initial setting of the volume corresponding to the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001. , It is output at the maximum volume that can be output by the pachinko gaming machine 1. In this way, when notifying with a common output amount regardless of the detection of the operation of changing the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001, it is possible to prevent the operation of changing the set value from being hindered. Can also be prevented. Therefore, the set value can be set appropriately.

(Explanation of means related to feature 71AK)
Regarding the above-mentioned feature portion 71AK, as a gaming machine that can be changed to a plurality of settings having different advantages for the player, for example, there is one described in JP-A-2010-2010902. Further, as a gaming machine whose settings related to the effect can be changed, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-29614. However, in the techniques described in JP-A-2010-200902 and JP-A-2015-29614, control when changing the setting of the effect is not considered while changing a plurality of settings having different advantages. It was. Therefore, there is a possibility that the work of changing to a plurality of set values having different advantages for the player may be hindered. Therefore, as a game machine of means 1 according to the feature unit 71AK for providing a game machine capable of preventing the work of changing the set value from being hindered.
It is a gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can play a game and can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
A setting means that can be set to any of a plurality of setting values (for example, one of the setting values 1 to 3) (for example, a CPU 103 that executes the setting change process in step Sa13) and
A game control means (for example, CPU 103 that executes the special symbol process process in step S25) capable of advancing the game so that the advantage for the player differs based on the set value, and
A setting control means (for example, CPU 103 that executes steps Sa6 and Sa12) that can be controlled to a change permission state that allows the setting value to be changed by the setting means when the power supply is started, and
A production adjustment detection means (for example, an output amount changeover switch 71AK001) that can detect an operation related to the adjustment of the output amount of the effect, and
Output amount control means for controlling the output amount of the effect to any of a plurality of stages based on the detection of the operation by the effect adjustment detection means (for example, the output switching process at the start of step 71AKS013 and the ongoing output change process of step 71AKS019). CPU 120 for production control to be executed) and
In the change permission state, the limiting means for limiting the execution of control by the output amount control means regardless of the detection of the operation by the effect adjusting detection means (for example, as a command process at power-on in step 71AKS012, step AKS012 A CPU 120 for effect control that executes processing, etc.)
It may be a game machine characterized by this.
According to such a configuration, the execution of control by the output amount control means is restricted when the change permission state is set, so that it is possible to prevent the operation of changing the set value from being hindered.

As a game machine of means 2 related to the feature unit 71AK,
An effect control means (for example, an effect control CPU 120) that controls the execution of an effect according to the progress of the game, and
It is provided with an effect control board (for example, an effect control board 12) provided with the effect control means.
The effect control board is further provided with a receiving means (for example, a knob 71AK002 of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001) that receives an operation that can be detected by the effect adjusting detection means.
It may be the gaming machine of the means 1 according to the feature unit 71AK characterized by the above.
In such a configuration, it is possible to prevent an obstacle in the work of changing the set value while appropriately controlling the output amount of the effect.

As a game machine of means 3 related to the feature unit 71AK,
When the output amount control means detects an operation by the effect adjusting detection means before the change permission state ends, the output amount control means operates after the change permission state ends. Control the output amount stage of the effect based on the detection of (for example, execution of the output switching process at the start in step 71AKS013).
It may be a gaming machine of means 1 or means 2 according to the feature unit 71AK.
In such a configuration, it is possible to prevent an obstacle in the work of changing the set value while appropriately controlling the stage of the output amount of the effect.

As a game machine of means 4 related to the feature unit 71AK,
It is equipped with an initialization detection means (for example, clear switch AK001) that can detect an operation related to the initialization of the game machine, unlike the operation during the game by the player.
In the change permission state, the set value by the setting means can be changed according to the detection of the operation by the initialization detection means (for example, when the clear switch AK001 is used instead of the setting changeover switch 52). ),
It may be any of the gaming machines of means 1 to means 3 according to the feature unit 71AK.
In such a configuration, it is possible to prevent an obstacle in the work of changing the set value without separately providing a configuration for changing the set value.

As a game machine of means 5 related to the feature unit 71AK,
A change notification means (for example, effect display device 5, speakers 8L, 8R, etc.) for notifying a change of a set value by the setting means is provided.
The change notification means performs notification (for example, output of the setting change notification voice 71AKE01) by a common output amount regardless of the detection of the operation by the effect adjusting detection means.
It may be any of the gaming machines of means 1 to means 4 according to the feature unit 71AK.
In such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the setting value from being changed due to fraudulent activity and to prevent the setting value from being changed.

As a game machine of means 6 related to the feature unit 71AK,
A setting confirmation control means (for example, a CPU 103 that executes the setting confirmation process of step AKS002) that can control the setting confirmation state for confirming the setting value set by the setting means is provided.
The output amount control means
In the setting confirmation state, it is possible to control the stage of the output amount of the effect based on the detection of the operation by the effect adjustment detection means (for example, the power saving function setting screen higher than the setting confirmation notification priority 71AKP13). Priority 71AKP12, etc.),
In the change permission state, the stage of the output amount of the effect based on the detection of the operation by the effect adjusting detection means is not controlled (for example, the priority of the setting change notification higher than the priority 71AKP12 of the setting screen such as the power saving function). 71AKP11 etc.),
It may be any of the gaming machines of means 1 to means 5 according to the feature unit 71AK.
In such a configuration, it is possible to check the set value and control the stage of the output amount of the effect, but when changing the set value, the stage of the output amount of the effect is not controlled. It is possible to prevent problems from occurring.

(Explanation of feature 72AK)
FIG. 8-41 shows an execution example of the power-on operation by the movable member driven by the operation motors AK011 to AK014. The movable member driven by the operation motors AK011 to AK014 includes a first movable member serving as a first movable effect device and a second movable member serving as a second movable effect device. The first movable member stops at the lower left position of the effect display device 5 as the origin position (retracted position). An operation effect of ascending diagonally upward to the right from the evacuation position, stopping at an advance position overlapping the front side of the display screen of the effect display device 5, and then returning to the evacuation position is performed. The first movable member includes a rotation mechanism, first to third split pieces, and a slide mechanism. The first to third split pieces are provided at the tip of the rotating mechanism. The first to third split pieces form a predetermined figure at the origin position when the united closed state is set. The rotation mechanism of the first movable member is rotated by the operation motor AK011 from the retracted position, which is the origin position, to the advanced position in the center of the display screen of the effect display device 5. As a result, after the first movable member advances to the central portion of the display screen of the effect display device 5, the first to third split pieces are split by the operation motor AK012. On the other hand, when the first movable member is in the origin position, the first to third split pieces cannot be opened. The slide mechanism of the first movable member is slid laterally by the operation motor AK013 after the rotation mechanism of the first movable member and the first to third split pieces are rotated to the advanced positions. The slide mechanism of the first movable member has the rotation mechanism and the first to third split pieces on the left side of the effect display device 5 with the origin position when the first movable member is in the center of the display screen of the effect display device 5. It suffices if it can be slid between the position and the right position.

The second movable member stops with the position above the effect display device 5 as the origin position (retracted position). After descending from the retracted position and stopping at an advance position overlapping on the front side of the display screen of the effect display device 5, an operation effect of returning to the retracted position is performed. The second movable member is lowered by the operation motor AK014 from the retracted position, which is the origin position, to the advanced position slightly above the center of the display screen of the effect display device 5, and is raised from the advanced position to the retracted position. In this way, the second movable member performs an effect operation of simply reciprocating up and down by the driving force of the operation motor AK014.

The origin position of the rotation mechanism of the first movable member is detected by the origin sensor AK021. The origin position of the first to third split pieces of the first movable member is detected by the origin sensor AK022. The origin position of the slide mechanism of the first movable member is detected by the origin sensor AK023. The origin position of the second movable member is detected by the origin sensor AK024. The operation motor AK011 provides a driving force that enables the rotation mechanism of the first movable member to move between the origin position and the advance position. The operating motor AK012 provides a driving force that enables the first to third split pieces of the first movable member to move between the closed state and the open state at the origin position. The operation motor AK013 provides a driving force that enables the slide mechanism of the first movable member to move between the origin position and the left or right position of the effect display device 5. The operation motor AK014 provides a driving force that makes the second movable member movable between the origin position and the advance position.

The power-on operation by the first movable member and the second movable member includes a long initial operation and a short initial operation. The long initial motion is an initial motion that performs the same motion as a normal effect motion during the execution of the effect accompanying the progress of the game. By executing the long initial operation, it is possible to confirm whether or not a problem occurs in the normal production operation. The short initial operation is an operation in which some operations in the normal effect operation are omitted, and is a return operation for returning the first movable member and the second movable member to the origin position.

When the long initial operation is executed as the operation when the power is turned on, first, as shown by the solid line arrow 72KM01, the rotation mechanism of the first movable member is moved to the origin position (retract position) by the driving force of the operation motor AK011. It is moved to an overlapping position on the front side of the center of the display screen in the effect display device 5 which is the advance position. Subsequently, as shown by the broken line arrow 72AKM02, the first to third split pieces of the first movable member are moved from the closed state to the open state at the origin position by the driving force of the operation motor AK012. After that, as shown by the broken line arrow 72AKM03, the first to third split pieces of the first movable member are moved from the open state to the closed state (origin position) by the driving force of the operation motor AK012. Next, as shown by the solid line arrows 72AKM04 to 72AKM06, the slide mechanism of the first movable member is moved from the origin position to the movable position in the right direction by the driving force of the operation motor AK013, and then moved to the movable position in the left direction. After that, return to the origin position. Then, as shown by the solid line arrow 72AKM07, the rotation mechanism of the first movable member is returned from the advance position to the origin position (retract position) by the driving force of the operation motor AK011. After that, as shown by the broken arrow arrows 72AKM08 and 72AKM09, the second movable member is moved from the origin position (retract position) to the advance position by the driving force of the operation motor AK014, and then returned to the origin position (retract position).

When a short initial operation is executed as an operation when the power is turned on, a part of the long initial operation may be omitted. For example, among the operations indicated by the arrows 72AKM01 to 72AKM09, the control for executing the operations indicated by the dashed arrows 72AKM02, 72AKM03, 72AKM08, and 72AKM09 is performed. In this case, the first to third split pieces of the first movable member cannot be moved from the closed state to the open state unless the rotation mechanism of the first movable member moves to the advanced position. Therefore, even in the short initial operation, the operation indicated by the solid line arrows 72AKM01 and 72AKM07 is required. Further, in the long initial operation, the operation of the first to third split pieces and the second movable member of the first movable member is performed so that the movement amount is larger than the operation indicated by the broken line arrows 72AKM02, 72AKM03, 72AKM08, 72AKM09. It may be done. In the short initial operation, the slide mechanism of the first movable member may be moved so that the amount of movement is smaller than the operation indicated by the solid line arrows 72AKM04 to 72AKM06.

In the short initial operation, at least a part of the operation may be omitted or added depending on the detection result by the origin sensors AK021 to AK024. For example, when the origin sensor AK022 is off and the other origin sensors are on, the broken line arrow 72AKM03 is used to move the first to third split pieces of the first movable member to the closed state, which is the origin position. The operation motor AK012 is driven so as to move in the direction. Then, when the origin sensor AK022 is turned on, the drive of the operation motor AK012 may be stopped. After that, by moving the rotation mechanism of the first movable member so as to be smaller than the movement amount indicated by the solid line arrows 72AKM01 and 72AKM07, the origin sensor AK021 is once turned off and then turned on. Drive the motor AK021. Further, the second movable member may be moved as indicated by the broken line arrows 72AKM08 and 72AKM09 to drive the operation motor AK024 so that the origin sensor AK024 is once turned off and then turned on.

FIG. 8-42 shows a control pattern used to drive a movable member by the operating motors AK011 to AK014. The pattern data constituting these control patterns may be stored in advance in a predetermined area of the ROM 121 mounted on the effect control board 12. In this embodiment, a short initial control pattern 72AKP01, a long initial control pattern 72AKP02, an effect operation A control pattern 72AKP11, and an effect operation B control pattern 72AKP12 are prepared in advance as control patterns for the movable member.

The short initial control pattern 72AKP01 is a control pattern used to execute the short initial operation. The long initial control pattern AKP02 is a control pattern used to execute the long initial operation. The effect A control pattern 72AKP11 is a control pattern used to execute an operation of a movable member included in a first effect executed with the progress of a game, such as a reach effect. The effect B control pattern 72AKP12 is a control pattern used to execute an operation of a movable member included in a second effect different from the first effect executed as the game progresses, such as a notice effect. .. As the control pattern of the movable member, more control patterns may be prepared, or some control patterns may be prepared. The effect control CPU 120 may determine the drive contents of the operation motors AK011 to AK014 based on the pattern data read from the ROM 121, and control the operation of the movable member.

FIG. 8-43 is a flowchart showing an example of a power-on command process executed by the effect control CPU 120 with respect to the feature portion 72AK of this embodiment. It suffices that this power-on command process can be executed in step AKS012 of the effect control main process in the above embodiment. In the command processing at power-on of the feature unit 72AK, the effect control CPU 120 determines the received command from the main board 11 in the same manner as in the above embodiment (steps 72AKS001 to 72AKS004). When the reception command is determined to be the setting change start command in step 72AKS003 (step 72AKS003; Yes), the game stop state start processing is executed (step 72AKS005) and the setting is changed in the same manner as in the above embodiment. Control to start the notification (step 72AKS006).

After the control in step 72AKS006 is performed, the control for executing the short initial operation is performed, unlike the above embodiment (step 72AKS007). For example, the effect control CPU 120 reads the pattern data of the short initial control pattern 72AKP01 from the predetermined area of the ROM 121, and executes the operation control of the movable member by the operation motors AK011 to AK014 based on the read data. By executing the control in step 72AKS007, it is possible to perform the control to execute the return operation of returning the movable member to the origin position when the setting is changed as the change permission state. Even in the period after proceeding to step 72AKS008 or later, the control in step 72AKS007 may be continuously executed until the short initial operation period ends, and the control to execute the short initial operation may be performed.

Following the control by step 72AKS007, it is determined whether or not to end the setting change in the same manner as in the above embodiment (step 72AKS008). If the setting change is not completed (step 72AKS008; No), step 72AKS008 is repeatedly executed and waits. When it is determined in step 72AKS008 that the setting change is completed (step 72AKS008; Yes), the setting change notification is controlled to end (step 72AKS009), and the game stop state end processing is executed (step 72AKS010).

After executing the game stop state end processing in step 72AKS010, unlike the above embodiment, control for executing the long initial operation is performed (step 72AKS011), and the process proceeds to step 72AKS014. In step 72AKS011, for example, the effect control CPU 120 reads the pattern data of the long initial control pattern 72AKP02 from the predetermined area of the ROM 121, and executes the operation control of the movable member by the operation motors AK011 to AK014 based on the read data. By executing the control in step 72AKS011, it is possible to perform the control to execute the long initial operation which is the initial operation of the movable member after the setting change state as the change permission state is completed. Further, since the long initial operation can be executed by the control in step 72AKS011, the long initial operation which is the initial operation is executed following the short initial operation which is the return operation when the setting is changed as the change permission state. It is possible to prevent control. Even after proceeding to step 72AKS014, the control in step 72AKS011 may be continuously executed until the end of the long initial operation period, and the control to execute the short initial operation may be performed.

When the reception command is determined to be the RAM clear notification command in step 72AKS001 (step 72AKS001; Yes), control is performed to execute the short initial operation (step 72AKS012), and then control to execute the long initial operation. (Step 72AKS013). In step 72AKS013, the control for executing the long initial operation may be started after the short initial operation controlled by the control in step 72AKS012 is completed. By executing the control in steps 72AKS012 and 72AKS013, when the setting change state as the change permission state is not controlled due to the start of power supply, the short initial operation which is the return operation is followed by the long initial which is the initial operation. You can control the execution of operations. Even after proceeding to step 72AKS014, the control in step 72AKS013 may be continuously executed until the end of the long initial operation period, and the control to execute the short initial operation may be performed. The control in step 72AKS011 and the control in step 72AKS013 may be executed by a common process using a common long initial control pattern 72AKP02. Alternatively, the control in step 72AKS011 and the control in step 72AKS013 may be executed by different processes while using the common long initial control pattern 72AKP02.

After that, control is performed to execute the initialization notification (step 72AKS014). It should be noted that the control for executing the initialization notification may be performed, and then the control for executing the long initial operation may be performed. When the reception command is determined to be the RAM clear notification command in step 72AKS001, the control to execute the initialization notification may be performed before the control to execute the short initial operation is performed by step 72AKS012. ..

If the reception command is determined to be the setting confirmation start command in step 72AKS004 (step 72AKS004; Yes), the game stop state start processing is executed (step 72AKS015) in the same manner as in the above embodiment, and the setting confirmation is performed. Control to start the notification (step 72AKS016). Subsequently, unlike the above embodiment, control is performed to execute the short initial operation (step 72AKS017). By executing the control in step 72AKS017, the control for executing the return operation of returning the movable member to the origin position when the setting confirmation state for confirming the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is executed. It can be performed. Even in the period after proceeding to step 72AKS018 or later, the control in step 72AKS017 may be continuously executed until the short initial operation period ends, and the control to execute the short initial operation may be performed.

Following the control by step 72AKS017, it is determined whether or not to end the setting confirmation as in the above embodiment (step 72AKS018). If the setting confirmation is not completed (step 72AKS018; No), step 72AKS018 is repeatedly executed and waits. When it is determined in step 72AKS018 that the setting confirmation is completed (step 72AKS018; Yes), the setting confirmation notification is controlled to end (step 72AKS019), and the game stop state end processing is executed (step 72AKS020).

After executing the game stop state end processing in step 72AKS020, unlike the above embodiment, control for executing the long initial operation is performed (step 72AKS021), and the power-on command processing is ended. By executing the control in step 72AKS021, after the setting confirmation state for confirming the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is completed, the long initial operation which is the initial operation of the movable member is executed. Control can be performed. Further, since the long initial operation can be executed by the control in step 72AKS021, when the setting confirmation state for confirming the set value is in the setting confirmation state, the long initial operation which is the initial operation is followed by the short initial operation which is the return operation. Can be prevented from controlling to execute. Even after the command processing at power-on is completed, the control in step 72AKS021 may be continuously executed until the long initial operation period is completed, and the long initial operation may be executed.

When it is determined in step 72AKS002 that the reception command is a power failure recovery designation command (step 72AKS002; Yes), control is performed to execute the short initial operation (step 72AKS022), and then control to execute the long initial operation. (Step 72AKS023), the command processing at power-on is terminated. In step 72AKS023, the control for executing the long initial operation may be started after the short initial operation controlled by the control in step 72AKS022 is completed. By executing the control in steps 72AKS022 and 72AKS023, when the setting change state as the change permission state is not controlled due to the start of power supply, the short initial operation which is the return operation is followed by the long initial which is the initial operation. You can control the execution of operations. Even after the power-on command processing is completed, the control in step 72AKS023 may be continuously executed until the long initial operation period is completed, and the long initial operation may be executed. The control in step 72AKS021 and the control in step 72AKS023 may be executed by a common process using a common long initial control pattern 72AKP02. Alternatively, the control in step 72AKS021 and the control in step 72AKS023 may be executed by different processes while using the common long initial control pattern 72AKP02.

(Explanation of a modified example of the feature portion 72AK)
FIG. 8-44 is a flowchart showing an example of power-on command processing executed in the modified example of the feature portion 72AK. In the power-on command processing in this modified example, when the reception command is determined to be the RAM clear notification command in step 72AKS001 (step 72AKS001; Yes), and the game stop state end processing is executed in step 72AKS010. Later, control is performed to execute the short initial operation (step 72AKS031), then control is performed to execute the long initial operation (step 72AKS032), and then the process proceeds to step 72AKS014 to control execution of the initialization notification. When the reception command is determined to be the RAM clear notification command in step 72AKS001, the stored contents in the RAM 102 of the game control microcomputer 100 are initialized (cleared) with the start of power supply by turning on the power. Correspondingly, the initialization notification is executed by executing the control in step 72AKS014. When this initialization notification is executed, by executing the control in steps 72AKS031 and 72AKS032, it is possible to perform control to execute the long initial operation which is the initial operation following the short initial operation which is the return operation. .. Further, even after the game stop state end processing is executed in step 72AKS010, the control in steps 72AKS031 and 72AKS032 is executed, so that the setting change state as the change permission state is completed and then the return operation is performed. Following the initial operation, it is possible to control to execute a long initial operation which is an initial operation. In this way, when the reception command is determined to be the RAM clear notification command in step 72AKS001 and after the game stop state end processing is executed in step 72AKS010, the control in common steps 72AKS031 and 72AKS032 , It is possible to control the execution of the long initial operation following the short initial operation.

In the power-on command processing in this modified example, the case where the reception command is determined to be the power failure recovery designation command in step 72AKS002 (step 72AKS002; Yes) and the processing at the end of the game stop state are executed in step 72AKS020. Later, control is performed to execute the short initial operation (step 72AKS033), and then control is performed to execute the long initial operation (step 72AKS034), and then the power-on command processing is terminated. When the reception command is determined to be the power failure recovery designation command in step 72AKS002, the stored contents in the RAM 102 of the game control microcomputer 100 are restored to the stored contents at the time of the power failure when the power supply is started by turning on the power. .. When such a power failure recovery is executed, the control in steps 72AKS033 and 72AKS034 is executed to control the execution of the long initial operation which is the initial operation following the short initial operation which is the return operation. it can. Further, even after the game stop state end processing is executed in step 72AKS020, the control in steps 72AKS033 and 72AKS034 is executed, so that the setting confirmation for confirming the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed. After the state ends, it is possible to control the execution of the long initial operation, which is the initial operation, following the short initial operation, which is the return operation. In this way, when the reception command is determined to be the power failure recovery notification command in step 72AKS002 and after the game stop state end processing is executed in step 72AKS020, the control in common steps 72AKS033 and 72AKS034 , It is possible to control the execution of the long initial operation following the short initial operation.

The short initial operation and the long initial operation may be controlled to be executed when the initialization notification is performed, or may be controlled to be executed even if the initialization notification is not performed. Further, the short initial operation and the long initial operation may be controlled to be executed when the power failure recovery notification is performed, or may be controlled to be executed even if the power failure recovery notification is not performed. Further, after the control for executing the effect accompanying the progress of the game is started, the control for executing the short initial operation may be performed based on the establishment of the return operation condition. After the control to execute the effect accompanying the progress of the game is started, the control to execute the long initial operation may be performed based on the establishment of the initial operation condition.

The configuration of the movable member is not limited to the form including the first movable member and the second movable member, and at least a short initial operation as a return operation and a long initial operation as an initial operation can be executed. In the production accompanying the progress of the game, it is sufficient as long as it can be operated according to a predetermined operation mode. The short initial operation and the long initial operation may be arbitrarily specified according to the configuration of the movable member.

As described above, in the power-on command process of the feature unit 72AK, in step 72AKS007, control is performed to execute the short initial operation. In this way, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled to the setting change state that allows the change of the set value with the start of the power supply by turning on the power, the movable members such as the first movable member and the second movable member are placed at the origin position. Control is performed to execute the return operation to return to. As a result, when the control for changing the set value is performed, the movable member is returned to the origin position, so that the work of changing the set value is not hindered by the movable member, and the work of changing the set value is performed. It is possible to prevent the trouble from occurring. Therefore, the set value can be set appropriately.

In the command processing at power-on of the feature unit 72AK, when the reception command is determined to be the RAM clear notification command in step 72AKS001, the control in steps 72AKS012 and 72AKS013 is performed, so that the short initial operation is a return operation. Then, control is performed to execute the long initial operation which is the initial operation. On the other hand, when the short initial operation is executed by the control in step 72AKS007, the control to execute the long initial operation is not performed until it is determined in step 72AKS008 that the setting change is completed. If the long initial operation, which is the initial operation, is executed in the setting change state, the execution of the setting change notification may be hindered and appropriate notification may not be performed. Therefore, the control to execute the long initial operation is performed after the setting change state is completed, and the control to execute the long initial operation is not performed when the setting confirmation state is reached. In this way, when the setting is changed as the change permission state, the long initial operation, which is the initial operation by the movable member, is not executed so that the setting value change work is not hindered. It is possible to prevent the work of changing the value from being hindered. Therefore, the set value can be changed appropriately.

When it is determined in step 72AKS008 that the setting change is completed, control is performed in step 72AKS011 to execute the long initial operation. In this way, after the setting change state as the change permission state is completed, control is performed to execute only the long initial operation which is the initial operation. As a result, it is possible to prevent unnecessary operation of the movable member and reduce the control load for operating the movable member in the case of preventing the operation of changing the set value from being hindered. Therefore, the set value can be changed appropriately.

In the power-on command process in the modified example of the feature unit 72AK, when the reception command is determined to be the RAM clear notification command in step 72AKS001, the control in steps 72AKS031 and 72AKS032 is performed to perform the return operation. Control is performed to execute the long initial operation which is the initial operation following the short initial operation. At this time, the control in step 72AKS014 is performed to control the execution of the initialization notification. In this way, the stored contents in the RAM 102 are initialized (cleared) with the start of the power supply by turning on the power, and when the initialization related to the game control in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed, the initialization notification is sent. When the initialization notification is executed and the initialization notification is executed, the control is performed to execute the long initial operation which is the initial operation following the short initial operation which is the return operation. Further, even when it is determined in step 72AKS008 that the setting change is completed, the control in steps 72AKS031 and 72AKS032 is performed to execute the long initial operation which is the initial operation following the short initial operation which is the return operation. Take control. As a result, when it is possible to prevent the operation of changing the set value from being hindered, it is possible to standardize the operation of the movable member and reduce the control load for operating the movable member. Therefore, the set value can be changed appropriately.

In the command processing at power-on of the feature unit 72AK, in step AKS017, control is performed to execute the short initial operation. In this way, when the setting confirmation state for confirming the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled with the start of the power supply by turning on the power, the movable members such as the first movable member and the second movable member are placed at the origin position. Control is performed to execute the return operation to return to. After that, when it is determined in step 72AKS018 that the setting confirmation is completed, control is performed in step 72AKS021 to execute the long initial operation. In this way, after the setting confirmation state is completed, control is performed to execute the long initial operation which is the initial operation. If the long initial operation, which is the initial operation, is executed while the setting confirmation state is in effect, the execution of the setting confirmation notification may be hindered and appropriate notification may not be performed. Therefore, the control to execute the long initial operation is performed after the setting confirmation state is completed, and the control to execute the long initial operation is not performed when the setting confirmation state is reached. As a result, in order to prevent the setting value change work from being hindered, the set value can be easily confirmed by preventing the long initial operation, which is the initial operation by the movable member, from being executed in the setting confirmation state. To do so. Therefore, the set value can be changed appropriately.

(Explanation of means related to feature 72AK)
Regarding the above-mentioned feature portion 72AK, as a gaming machine that can be changed to a plurality of settings having different advantages for the player, for example, there is one described in JP-A-2010-2010902. Further, as a game machine for returning the movable member to the origin position, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-22154. However, in the techniques described in JP-A-2010-200902 and JP-A-2016-22154, the case where the setting change and the operation of the movable member conflict with each other has not been considered. Therefore, there is a possibility that the work of changing to a plurality of set values having different advantages for the player may be hindered. Therefore, as a game machine of means 1 according to the feature unit 72AK for providing a game machine capable of preventing the work of changing the set value from being hindered.
It is a gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can play a game and can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
A setting means that can be set to any of a plurality of setting values (for example, one of the setting values 1 to 3) (for example, a CPU 103 that executes the setting change process in step Sa13) and
A game control means (for example, CPU 103 that executes the special symbol process process in step S25) capable of advancing the game so that the advantage for the player differs based on the set value, and
A setting control means (for example, a CPU 103 that executes the processes of steps Sa6 and Sa12) that can be controlled to a change permission state that permits the change of the set value by the setting means when the power supply is started, and
Movable members that can move according to the progress of the game (for example, the first movable member operated by the operating motors AK011 to AK013, the second movable member operated by the operating motor AK014, etc.)
At least, a movable control means (for example, a step) capable of controlling a return operation (for example, a short initial operation) for returning the movable member to the origin position and a control for an initial operation (for example, a long initial operation) by the movable member. It is equipped with an effect control CPU 120 that executes command processing when the power of AKS012 is turned on.
The movable control means controls to execute the return operation (for example, execution of step 72AKS007) when the change permission state is set.
It may be a game machine characterized by this.
According to such a configuration, the return operation for returning the movable member to the origin position is executed in the change permission state, so that it is possible to prevent the operation of changing the set value from being hindered.

As a game machine of means 2 related to the feature portion 72AK
The movable control means
When the change permission state is not controlled due to the start of power supply, control is performed to execute the initial operation following the return operation (for example, execution of steps 72AKS012 and 72AKS013).
In the change permission state, the control for executing the initial operation following the return operation is not performed (for example, execution of step 72AKS008).
It may be a gaming machine of means 1 according to the feature portion 72AK characterized by the above.
In such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the initial operation by the movable member from being executed in the change permission state and prevent the operation of changing the set value from being hindered.

As a game machine of means 3 related to the feature portion 72AK,
The movable control means controls to execute only the initial operation after the change permission state ends (for example, execution of step 72AKS011).
It may be a gaming machine of means 2 according to the feature portion 72AK characterized by the above.
In such a configuration, it is possible to prevent unnecessary operation by the movable member and prevent trouble in changing the set value.

As a game machine of means 4 related to the feature portion 72AK,
When the gaming machine is initialized with the start of power supply, the effect control CPU 120 that executes the initialization notification means (for example, effect display device 5, speakers 8L, 8R, step 72AKS014) that executes initialization notification. Etc.)
The movable control means
When the initialization notification is executed, control is performed to execute the initial operation following the return operation (for example, execution of steps 72AKS031 and 72AKS032 accompanying the execution of step 72AKS014).
After the change permission state ends, control is performed to execute the initial operation following the return operation (for example, execution of steps 72AKS031 and 72AKS032 following steps 72AKS005 to 72AKS010).
It may be a gaming machine of means 2 according to the feature portion 72AK characterized by the above.
In such a configuration, it is possible to standardize the operation by the movable member to reduce the control load and prevent the operation of changing the set value from being hindered.

As a game machine of means 5 related to the feature portion 72AK,
A setting confirmation control means (for example, a CPU 103 that executes the setting confirmation process of step AKS002) that can control the setting confirmation state for confirming the setting value set by the setting means is provided.
The movable control means
In the setting confirmation state, control is performed to execute the return operation (for example, execution of step 72AKS017).
After the setting confirmation state is completed, control for executing the initial operation is performed (for example, execution of step 72AKS021).
It may be any of the gaming machines of means 1 to means 4 according to the feature unit 72AK.
In such a configuration, the set value can be easily confirmed by preventing the initial operation by the movable member from being executed in the setting confirmation state, and it is possible to prevent the operation of changing the set value from being hindered.

(Explanation of feature 73AK)
FIG. 8-45 is a flowchart showing an example of a power-on command process executed by the effect control CPU 120 with respect to the feature unit 73AK of this embodiment. It suffices that this power-on command process can be executed in step AKS012 of the effect control main process in the above embodiment. In the feature unit 73AK as well, the operation content of the short initial operation and the long initial operation may be the same as that of the feature unit 72AK of this embodiment. In the command processing at power-on of the feature unit 73AK, the effect control CPU 120 determines the received command from the main board 11 in the same manner as in the above embodiment (steps 73AKS001 to 73AKS004). When the reception command is determined to be the setting change start command in step 73AKS003 (step 73AKS003; Yes), the game stop state start processing is executed (step 73AKS005) in the same manner as in the above embodiment, and the setting change. Control to start the notification (step 73AKS006).

After performing the control in step 73AKS006, it is determined whether or not to end the setting change (step 73AKS007). If the setting change is not completed (step 73AKS007; No), step 73AKS007 is repeatedly executed and waits. When it is determined in step 73AKS007 to end the setting change (step 73AKS007; Yes), the setting change notification is controlled to end (step 73AKS008), and the game stop state end processing is executed (step 73AKS009). As described above, in the command processing at power-on of the feature unit 73AK, control is not performed to execute the short initial operation as the return operation for returning the movable member to the origin position when the setting is changed as the change permission state. ..

Control to execute the short initial operation when the reception command is determined to be the RAM clear notification command in step 73AKS001 (step 73AKS001; Yes), or after the game stop state end processing is executed in step 73AKS009. (Step 73AKS010), and then control to execute the long initial operation (step 73AKS011). In step 73AKS011, the control for executing the long initial operation may be started after the short initial operation controlled by the control in step 73AKS010 is completed. Since the control in steps 73AKS010 and 73AKS011 is performed, when the setting change state as the change permission state is not controlled due to the start of power supply, the short initial operation which is the return operation is followed by the long initial operation which is the initial operation. Can be controlled to execute. Further, when the setting change state as the change permission state is controlled with the start of the power supply, it is possible to control to execute the short initial operation which is the return operation after the setting change state is completed. Alternatively, when the setting change state is controlled as the change permission state with the start of power supply, after the setting change state is completed, the short initial operation which is the return operation is followed by the long initial which is the initial operation. It is possible to control the execution of the operation.

After that, control is performed to execute the initialization notification (step 73AKS012). It should be noted that the control for executing the initialization notification may be performed, and then the control for executing the short initial operation or the long initial operation may be performed. Alternatively, the control for executing the short initial operation may be performed, the control for executing the initialization notification may be performed, and then the control for executing the long initial operation may be performed.

If the reception command is determined to be the setting confirmation start command in step 73AKS004 (step 73AKS004; Yes), the game stop state start processing is executed (step 73AKS013) in the same manner as in the above embodiment, and the setting confirmation is performed. Control to start the notification (step 73AKS014). Subsequently, control is performed to execute the short initial operation (step 73AKS015). By executing the control in step 73AKS015, the control for executing the return operation of returning the movable member to the origin position when the setting confirmation state for confirming the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is executed. It can be performed. Even in the period after proceeding to step 73AKS016 or later, the control in step 73AKS015 may be continuously executed until the short initial operation period ends, and the control to execute the short initial operation may be performed.

Following the control by step 73AKS015, it is determined whether or not to end the setting confirmation (step 73AKS016). If the setting confirmation is not completed (step 73AKS016; No), step 73AKS016 is repeatedly executed and waits. If it is determined in step 73AKS016 that the setting confirmation is completed (step 73AKS016; Yes), the setting confirmation notification is controlled to end (step 73AKS017), and the game stop state end processing is executed (step 73AKS018). Next, control for executing the long initial operation is performed (step 73AKS019), and the command processing at power-on ends. By executing the control in step 73AKS019, after the setting confirmation state for confirming the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is completed, the long initial operation which is the initial operation of the movable member is executed. Control can be performed. Further, since the long initial operation can be executed by the control in step 73AKS019, the long initial operation which is the initial operation is followed by the short initial operation which is the return operation when the setting confirmation state for confirming the set value is in effect. Can be prevented from controlling to execute. Even after the power-on command processing is completed, the control in step 73AKS019 may be continuously executed until the long initial operation period is completed, and the long initial operation may be executed.

When it is determined in step 73AKS002 that the reception command is a power failure recovery designation command (step 73AKS002; Yes), control is performed to execute the short initial operation (step 73AKS020), and then control to execute the long initial operation. (Step 73AKS021), the command processing at power-on is terminated. In step 73AKS021, the control for executing the long initial operation may be started after the short initial operation controlled in step 73AKS020 is completed. By executing the control in steps 73AKS020 and 73AKS021, when the setting change state as the change permission state is not controlled due to the start of power supply, the short initial operation which is the return operation is followed by the long initial which is the initial operation. It is possible to control the execution of operations. Even after the command processing at power-on is completed, the control in step 73AKS021 may be continuously executed until the long initial operation period is completed, and the long initial operation may be executed. The control in step 73AKS019 and the control in step 73AKS021 may be executed by a common process using the common long initial control pattern 72AKP02 as in the case of the feature unit 72AK. Alternatively, the control in step 73AKS019 and the control in step 73AKS021 may be executed by different processes while using the common long initial control pattern 72AKP02 as in the case of the feature unit 72AK.

FIG. 8-46 shows a setting confirmation notification screen 73AKD01 displayed during execution of the setting confirmation notification for the feature unit 73AK. On the setting confirmation notification screen 73AKD01, a character image for notifying the message "setting confirmation in progress" is displayed, and the history of the set values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be displayed. The history of the set values may be cumulatively stored on the side of the effect control board 12 by storing the set value information together with the RTC information in the backup area of the RAM 122 mounted on the effect control board 12, for example. Alternatively, the history of the set value can be obtained by storing the set value information together with the RTC information in a predetermined area in a non-volatile storage device (for example, a flash memory) provided separately from the RAM 122. It may be stored cumulatively on the side. Alternatively, when the set value history is stored in the backup area together with the RTC information in the RAM 102 of the game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11, the setting confirmation start command is transmitted. By transmitting a set value history command prepared in advance as an effect control command capable of specifying the history of the set value from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12, power is supplied on the effect control board 12 side. It may be possible to identify it with the start of.

When the setting confirmation notification screen 73AKD01 is displayed and the movable member is stopped at a position deviated from the origin position, it becomes difficult to visually recognize the display screen of the effect display device 5, and the history of set values can be grasped. It becomes difficult to do. Therefore, in the command processing at power-on of the feature unit 73AK, the control in step 73AKS015 is executed, so that the pachinko game machine 1 can be moved when it is in the setting confirmation state for confirming the set value. Control is performed to execute a short initial operation, which is a return operation for returning the member to the origin position. In this way, when the setting confirmation state is controlled with the start of power supply, unlike the case where the setting change state is controlled, the short initial operation which is the return operation is executed. The history of the set values that can be displayed on the 73AKD01 can be easily grasped by the staff of the amusement park or the like. On the other hand, in the command processing at power-on of the feature unit 73AK, the long initial operation can be executed by the control in step 73AKS018, so that the setting confirmation state for confirming the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 When is, the control to execute the long initial operation which is the initial operation is not performed after the short initial operation which is the return operation. In this way, when the setting confirmation state is controlled with the start of power supply, the short initial operation that is the return operation is executed while the setting confirmation state is executed, while the long initial operation that is the initial operation is executed. Since the operation is not executed, the long initial operation is executed after the staff of the game hall can easily grasp the history of the set values that can be displayed on the setting confirmation notification screen 73AKD01. In some cases, it is possible to prevent the movable member from making it difficult to grasp the history of the set value.

Even when controlled to the setting change state, the history of the setting value may be displayable. In this case, control may be performed to execute a short initial operation for returning the movable member to the origin position when the setting is changed as the change permission state. In this way, when the history of the set value can be displayed by being controlled to the setting confirmation state when the power supply starts, the short initial operation that is the return operation is executed so that the set value is executed. The history of the above may be easily grasped.

As described above, in the power-on command processing of the feature unit 73AK, when it is determined in step 73AKS001 that the received command is a RAM clear notification command, control is performed in step 73AKS010 to execute the short initial operation. .. On the other hand, when the reception command is determined to be the setting change start command in step 73AKS003, the control for executing the short initial operation is not performed until it is determined in step 73AKS007 to end the setting change. As a result, when the control for changing the set value is performed, the short initial operation which is the return operation for returning the movable member to the origin position is not executed, so that the change work of the set value is not hindered by the return operation. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the work of changing the set value from being hindered. Therefore, the set value can be set appropriately.

In the power-on command process of the feature unit 73AK, after it is determined in step 73AKS007 that the setting change is completed, the control in step 73AKS010 is performed to control the execution of the short initial operation as the return operation. In this way, since the control is performed to execute the short initial operation that is the return operation after the setting change state as the change permission state is completed, it is movable when it is prevented that the setting value change work is hindered. It is possible to properly return the member to the origin position.

In the command processing at power-on of the feature unit 73AK, when the reception command is determined to be the RAM clear notification command in step 73AKS001, the control in steps 73AKS010 and 73AKS011 is performed to perform the short initial operation which is the return operation. Then, control is performed to execute the long initial operation which is the initial operation. At this time, the control in step 73AKS012 is performed to control the execution of the initialization notification. In this way, the stored contents in the RAM 102 are initialized (cleared) with the start of the power supply by turning on the power, and when the initialization related to the game control in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed, the initialization notification is sent. When the initialization notification is executed and the initialization notification is executed, the control is performed to execute the long initial operation which is the initial operation following the short initial operation which is the return operation. Further, even when it is determined in step 73AKS007 that the setting change is completed, the control in steps 73AKS010 and 73AKS011 is performed to execute the long initial operation which is the initial operation following the short initial operation which is the return operation. Take control. As a result, when it is possible to prevent the operation of changing the set value from being hindered, it is possible to standardize the operation of the movable member and reduce the control load for operating the movable member. Therefore, the set value can be changed appropriately.

On the setting confirmation notification screen 73AKD01, the history of the set values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be displayed. In the command processing at power-on of the feature unit 73AK, when it is determined in step 73AK004 that the reception command is a setting confirmation start command, in step 73AKS015, control is performed to execute a short initial operation. In this way, when the display of the setting confirmation notification screen 73AKD01, which is a setting confirmation display capable of displaying the history of the set value, is being executed, control is performed to execute the short initial operation which is the return operation. As a result, the setting confirmation display can be easily grasped when it is prevented that the operation of changing the set value is hindered. Therefore, the set value can be changed appropriately.

The effect control CPU 120 controls the execution of the effect according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 based on the effect control command transmitted from the main board 11. In the power-on command process of the feature unit 73AK, when the command 9100H, which is the setting change start command, is received in step 73AKS003, it is determined that the received command is the setting change start command. The command 9100H, which is a setting change start command transmitted from the main board 11, is different from the command 9000H, which is a RAM clear notification command, the command 9200H, which is a power failure recovery designation command, and the command 9400H, which is a setting confirmation start command. In this way, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled to the setting change state that allows the change of the set value with the start of the power supply by turning on the power, a command as information different from the case where the setting change state is not controlled is transmitted. Will be done. As a result, it is possible to reduce the control burden related to the effect when it is prevented that the work of changing the set value is hindered. Therefore, the set value can be changed appropriately.

(Explanation of means related to feature unit 73AK)
Regarding the above-mentioned feature unit 73AK, conventionally, as a game machine that can be changed to a plurality of settings having different advantages for the player, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. Further, as a game machine for returning the movable member to the origin position, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-22154. However, in the techniques described in JP-A-2010-200902 and JP-A-2016-22154, the case where the setting change and the operation of the movable member conflict with each other has not been considered. Therefore, there is a possibility that the work of changing to a plurality of set values having different advantages for the player may be hindered. Therefore, as a game machine of means 1 according to the feature unit 73AK for providing a game machine capable of preventing the work of changing the set value from being hindered.
It is a gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can play a game and can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
A setting means that can be set to any of a plurality of setting values (for example, one of the setting values 1 to 3) (for example, a CPU 103 that executes the setting change process in step Sa13) and
A game control means (for example, CPU 103 that executes the special symbol process process in step S25) capable of advancing the game so that the advantage for the player differs based on the set value, and
A setting control means (for example, a CPU 103 that executes the processes of steps Sa6 and Sa12) that can be controlled to a change permission state that permits the change of the set value by the setting means when the power supply is started, and
Movable members that can move according to the progress of the game (for example, the first movable member operated by the operating motors AK011 to AK013, the second movable member operated by the operating motor AK014, etc.)
At least, it is provided with a movable control means (for example, an effect control CPU 120 that executes a command process at power-on in step AKS012) capable of executing control of a return operation for returning the movable member to the origin position.
The movable control means
When the change permission state is not controlled due to the start of power supply, control is performed to execute the return operation (for example, execution of step 73AKS010).
When the change permission state is set, the control for executing the return operation is not performed (for example, execution of steps 73AKS005 to 73AKS009).
It may be a game machine characterized by this.
According to such a configuration, the return operation for returning the movable member to the origin position is not executed in the change permission state, so that it is possible to prevent an obstacle in the work of changing the set value.

As a game machine of means 2 related to the feature unit 73AK,
The movable control means controls to execute the return operation after the change permission state ends (for example, execution of step 73AKS010).
It may be the gaming machine of the means 1 according to the feature unit 73AK characterized by the above.
In such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately operate the movable member and prevent the operation of changing the set value from being hindered.

As a game machine of means 3 according to the feature unit 73AK
When the gaming machine is initialized with the start of power supply, the effect control CPU 120 that executes the initialization notification means (for example, effect display device 5, speakers 8L, 8R, step 73AKS012) that executes initialization notification. Etc.)
The movable control means
When the initialization notification is executed, control is performed to execute the initial operation by the movable member following the return operation (for example, execution of steps 73AKS010 to 73AKS012).
After the change permission state ends, control is performed to execute the initial operation following the return operation (for example, execution of step 73AKS010 following steps 73AKS005 to 73AKS009).
It may be a gaming machine of means 1 or means 2 according to the feature unit 73AK.
In such a configuration, it is possible to standardize the operation by the movable member to reduce the control load and prevent the operation of changing the set value from being hindered.

As a game machine of means 4 according to the feature unit 73AK
A setting display means (for example, an effect display device 5) capable of executing a setting confirmation display for confirming a setting value set by the setting means is provided.
The setting display means can display a history of set values set by the setting means in the setting confirmation display (for example, display of the setting confirmation notification screen 73AKD01).
When the setting confirmation display is being executed, the movable control means controls to execute the return operation and does not control to execute the initial operation (for example, execution of steps 73AKS015 and 73AKS016).
It may be any of the gaming machines of means 1 to means 3 according to the feature unit 73AK.
In such a configuration, when the setting confirmation display is being executed, the initial operation by the movable member is prevented from being executed, the setting confirmation display can be easily grasped, and the work of changing the set value is hindered. Can be prevented.

As a gaming machine of means 5 according to the feature unit 73AK
The effect control means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 that executes the command analysis process of AKS015) for controlling the execution of the effect based on the information from the game control means is provided.
When the game control means is controlled to the change permission state with the start of power supply, the game control means transmits information different from the case where the change permission state is not controlled (for example, command 9100H which is a setting change start command). ,
It may be any of the gaming machines of means 1 to means 4 according to the feature unit 73AK.
In such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the control load by the effect control means and prevent the operation of changing the set value from being hindered.

(Explanation of feature 74AK)
FIG. 8-47 shows a configuration example of the effect control pattern 74AKP01 used for executing the confirmation effect with respect to the feature portion 74AK of this embodiment. The pattern data constituting the effect control pattern 74AKP01 may be stored in advance in a predetermined area of the ROM 121 mounted on the effect control board 12. The confirmation effect is executably controlled based on the establishment of predetermined confirmation effect conditions after the power supply is started by turning on the power. The confirmation effect of the feature portion 74AK is the output of the confirmation sound that outputs the trumpet sound twice from the left speaker 8L, the output of the confirmation sound that outputs the drum sound twice from the right speaker 8R, and the stick controller 31A. It includes confirmation vibration that drives two sets of vibration motors built into the operating rod (lever) in a predetermined pattern. The effect control pattern 74AKP01 includes data indicating the confirmation effect process timer initial value 74AKJ00, and for example, the initial value of the confirmation effect process timer provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 can be set. Further, in the effect control pattern 74AKP01, the first confirmation effect control data 74AKD01 associated with the confirmation effect process timer determination value 74AKJ01 and the second confirmation effect control data 74AKD02 associated with the confirmation effect process timer determination value 74AKJ02 are confirmed. The first confirmation effect control data 74AKD03 associated with the effect process timer determination value 74AKJ03 is included. The first confirmation effect control data 74AKD01 is used to control the output of the confirmation sound that outputs the trumpet sound twice from the left speaker 8L. The second confirmation effect control data 74AKD02 is used to control the output of the confirmation sound that outputs the drum sound twice from the right speaker 8R. The third confirmation effect control data 74AKD03 is used to control the confirmation vibration that drives two sets of vibration motors built in the operation stick (lever) of the stick controller 31A in a predetermined pattern. When controlling the execution of the confirmation effect, the timer value of the confirmation effect process timer is updated, and when any of the confirmation effect process timer determination values 74AKJ01 to 74AKJ03 is matched, the first to third confirmations corresponding to the matched determination values are made. By performing control using the effect control data 74AKD03, it is possible to output a confirmation sound and execute confirmation vibration.

Further, during the execution of the confirmation effect, some or all of the light emitting members included in the game effect lamp 9 may be turned on. For example, when the confirmation effect is started, the lighting of the light emitting member is started, and the output of the confirmation sound is started from the left speaker 8L. When the output of the confirmation sound by the left speaker 8L is completed, the output of the confirmation sound is started from the right speaker 8R. When the output of the confirmation sound by the right speaker 8R is completed, the confirmation vibration by the vibration motor built in the operation stick (lever) of the stick controller 31A is started. Then, the confirmation vibration by the vibration motor built in the operation stick (lever) of the stick controller 31A ends, the light emitting member is turned off, and the confirmation effect ends. In the confirmation effect, the confirmation effect condition is satisfied by detecting the operation of pressing the push button 31B within the predetermined confirmation acceptance period after the power supply is started by turning on the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1. And the execution is started. One of the effects of the confirmation sound output by the left speaker 8L, the confirmation sound output by the right speaker 8R, and the confirmation vibration by the vibration motor built in the operation rod (lever) of the stick controller 31A. When the control to execute is performed, the control to execute other effects is not performed. As described above, when any one of the confirmation sound output and the confirmation vibration included in the confirmation effect is executed, the control may be performed so as not to execute the other effect. In this way, by executing the output of the confirmation sound and the confirmation vibration at different timings, the staff of the amusement park or the like can easily grasp whether or not the effect using each effect device can be normally executed. Can be done.

FIG. 8-48 is a flowchart showing an example of the effect control main process executed by the effect control CPU 120 with respect to the feature unit 74AK. It suffices that this effect control main process can be executed in place of the effect control main process in the above embodiment. In the effect control main process of the feature unit 74AK, the effect control CPU 120 executes the initialization process (step 74AKS011) and the power-on command process (step 74AKS012) in the same manner as in the above embodiment, and then turns on the timer interrupt flag. If it is determined (step 74AKS013) and if it is off (step 74AKS013; No), step 74AKS013 is repeatedly executed and waits. On the other hand, when the timer interrupt flag is on (step 74AKS013; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared to the off state (step 74AKS014), the command analysis process (step 74AKS015), and the effect control process process. (Step 74AKS016) and the effect random number update process (step 74AKS017) are executed in order. Further, in the effect control main process of the feature unit 74AK, the confirmation effect control process (step 74AKS018) is executed, and then the process returns to step 74AKS013.

FIG. 8-49 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step 74AKS018 as the confirmation effect control process. In the confirmation effect control process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the initialization notification has been started (step 74AKS031). For example, in the power-on command process of the above embodiment, the initialization notification is started by performing the control in step AKS030. After that, when the determination in step 74AKS031 is performed for the first time, it may be determined that the initialization notification is started. An initialization notification start flag may be provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 122, and when the initialization notification start flag is on, it may be determined that the initialization notification has started.

If it is determined in step 74AKS031 that the initialization notification has started (step 74AKS031; Yes), control is performed to start the confirmation acceptance period (step 74AKS032). The confirmation reception period starts with the start of the initialization notification, and may end with the lapse of a predetermined confirmation reception time such as 30 seconds or 1 minute.

If it is determined in step 74AKS031 that the initialization notification has not started (step 74AKS031; No), it is determined whether or not it is the confirmation acceptance period (step 74AKS033). When the confirmation acceptance period is started in step 74AKS032, or when it is determined in step 74AKS033 that the confirmation acceptance period is (step 74AKS033; Yes), it is determined whether or not the variable display is started (step). 74AKS034). For example, the effect control CPU 120 may determine that the variable display has been started by receiving the first fluctuation start command and the second fluctuation start command transmitted from the main board 11.

If it is determined in step 74AKS034 that the variable display has started (step 74AKS034; Yes), the confirmation acceptance period is controlled to be canceled (step 74AKS035), and the confirmation effect control process is terminated. In this way, if the variable display is started during the confirmation acceptance period, the confirmation acceptance period is canceled and the confirmation effect condition is restricted so as not to be satisfied. By canceling the confirmation acceptance period with the start of the variable display, it is possible to control so that the execution of the effect and the execution of the confirmation effect as the game progresses do not overlap, and the confirmation effect can be appropriately executed.

If it is determined in step 74AKS034 that the variable display is not started (step 74AKS034; No), it is determined whether or not there is an operation detection for starting the confirmation effect (step 74AKS036). In step 74AKS036, when the action of pressing the push button 31B is detected, it may be determined that the action for starting the confirmation effect has been detected. At this time, if there is no motion detection (step 74AKS036; No), the confirmation effect control process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the motion is detected (step 74AKS030; Yes), the effect control pattern 74AKP01 used for executing the confirmation effect is read from the predetermined area of the ROM 121 (step 74AKS037), and the confirmation effect process. The timer initial value 74AKJ00 is set in the confirmation effect process timer (step 74AKS038). Further, the timer value is determined by the first confirmation effect process timer determination value 74AKD01 (step 74AKS039), and the process proceeds to step 74AKS046. If it is determined in step 74AKS030 that the operation has been detected and settings for executing the confirmation effect are made, control may be performed to end the confirmation acceptance period.

If it is determined in step 74AKS033 that it is not the confirmation acceptance period (step 74AKS033; No), it is determined whether or not the confirmation effect is in progress (step 74AKS040). In step 74AKS040, for example, when the measurement of the elapsed time by the confirmation effect process timer has started, it may be determined that the confirmation effect is in progress. At this time, if the confirmation effect is not in progress (step 74AKS040; No), the confirmation effect control process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the confirmation effect is in progress (step 74AKS040; Yes), it is determined whether or not the variable display has been started (step 74AKS041). Then, when it is determined that the variable display has started (step 74AKS041; Yes), the confirmation effect is controlled to be stopped (step 74AKS042), and the confirmation effect control process is terminated. In this way, when the variable display is started during the confirmation effect, the execution of the confirmation effect is stopped so that the execution of the effect accompanying the progress of the game and the execution of the confirmation effect are controlled so as not to overlap. , The confirmation effect can be executed appropriately.

If it is determined in step 74AKS041 that the variable display has not started (step 74AKS041; No), update control of the confirmation effect process timer is performed (step 74AKS043). Next, it is determined whether or not the confirmation effect process timer has timed out (step 74AKS044). At this time, if a time-out has occurred (step 74AKS044; Yes), the confirmation effect is controlled to end (step 74AKS045), and the confirmation effect control process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the timeout has not occurred (step 74AKS044; No), it is determined whether or not the timer value of the confirmation effect process timer matches the determination value (step 74AKS046). If it does not match the determination value (step 74AKS046; No), the confirmation effect control process is terminated.

When it is determined in step 74AKS046 that the determination value is matched (step 74AKS046; Yes), the effect using the confirmation effect control data corresponding to the determination value is started (step 74AKS047). Further, after setting so that the timer value is determined by the confirmation effect process timer determination value stored next in the effect control pattern 74AKP01 (step 74AKS048), the confirmation effect control process is terminated.

FIG. 8-50 is a timing diagram showing a control example of the confirmation effect for the feature portion 74AK. In FIG. 8-50 (A), when the power supply is started by turning on the power, the operation of pressing the clear switch AK001 is detected, but the operation of switching the lock switch 51 on is not detected. Correspondingly, the case where the setting change state is not controlled is shown. FIG. 8-50 (B) detects an operation of pressing the clear switch AK001 and an operation of switching the lock switch 51 on when the power supply is started by turning on the power. Corresponds to the case where it is controlled to the setting change state. FIG. 8-50 (C) shows the control contents at each timing.

When the setting change state is not controlled due to the start of power supply by turning on the power at the timing 74AKT01, the effect control board 12 determines that, for example, the effect control CPU 120 has received the RAM clear notification command at the timing 74AKT02. .. In the power-on command process of the above embodiment, since the reception command is determined to be the RAM clear notification command in step AKS021, the control in step AKS030 is performed and the initialization notification is started. Then, in the confirmation effect control process of step 74AKS018 included in the effect control main process of the feature unit 74AK, it is determined in step 74AKS031 that the initialization notification is started, and the confirmation acceptance period is started by the control in step 74AKS032. To. When the operation of pressing the push button 31B is detected at the timing 74AKT03 within this confirmation detection period, it is determined that the start operation of the confirmation effect is detected in step 74AKS060 of the confirmation effect control process, and the confirmation effect control process. The control for executing the confirmation effect, such as steps 74AKS037 to 74AKS048, is started. By starting the control for executing the confirmation effect in this way, a plurality of types of first to third confirmation effects can be obtained by using the first to third confirmation effect control data 74AKD01 to 74AKD03 included in the effect control pattern 74AKP01. The production is executed in order. After that, when the timing 74AKT04 is reached, it is determined in step 74AKS044 of the confirmation effect control process that the confirmation effect process timer has timed out, and the control in step 74AKS045 is performed to end the confirmation effect.

On the other hand, when the setting change state is controlled due to the start of power supply by turning on the power at the timing 74AKT11, for example, the effect control CPU 120 issues a setting change start command at the timing 74AKT12 on the effect control board 12. Judge that it has been received. In the power-on command processing of the above embodiment, since the reception command is determined to be the setting change start command in step AKS023, the control of step AKS026 is performed after the game stop state start processing of step AKS025 is executed. Is performed, and the setting change notification is started. At this time, except when the setting change end command is received, the control for continuously executing the setting change notification is performed, and the control for executing the initialization notification is not started. After that, when the setting change end command transmitted from the main board 11 is received at the timing 74AKT13, it is determined that the setting change is completed in step AKS027 of the command processing at power-on, so that steps AKS028 and AKS029 are followed. , Step AKS030 is controlled, and initialization notification is started.

In this way, when the initialization notification by the control of step AKS030 is started at the timing 74AKT13, the confirmation effect control process of step 74AKS018 included in the effect control main process of the feature unit 74AK is the initialization notification at step 74AKS031. Is determined to be the start of, and the confirmation acceptance period is started by the control in step 74AKS032. Therefore, at the timing 74AKT13, the confirmation acceptance period is started with the start of the initialization notification. When the operation of pressing the push button 31B is detected at the timing 74AKT14 within the confirmation acceptance period, it is determined that the start operation of the confirmation effect is detected in step 74AKS060 of the confirmation effect control process, and the confirmation effect control process. The control for executing the confirmation effect such as steps 74AKS037 to 74AKS048 is started. By starting the control for executing the confirmation effect in this way, a plurality of types of first to third confirmation effects can be obtained by using the first to third confirmation effect control data 74AKD01 to 74AKD03 included in the effect control pattern 74AKP01. The production is executed in order. After that, when the timing 74AKT15 is reached, it is determined in step 74AKS044 of the confirmation effect control process that the confirmation effect process timer has timed out, and the control in step 74AKS045 is performed to end the confirmation effect.

The effect included in the confirmation effect may be an effect using an arbitrary effect device included in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, in addition to or instead of the confirmation vibration by driving the vibration motor built in the operation rod (lever) of the stick controller 31A, the confirmation vibration by driving the vibration motor built in the push button 31B. May be able to execute.

As described above, in the effect control main process of the feature unit 74AK, the power-on command process is executed in step 74AKS012 as in the above embodiment, and then the confirmation effect control process is executed in step 74AKS018. In the power-on command process, for example, in step AKS025 and step AKS031, the game stop state start process is executed. After the game stop state start processing is executed, the reception of commands different from the setting change end command and the setting confirmation end command is invalidated, and the control related to the normal effect is restricted from being executed. In this case, the control for executing the confirmation effect is not performed. On the other hand, when the reception command is determined to be the RAM clear notification command in step AKS021, the step AKS030 controls to execute the initialization notification. After that, in the confirmation effect control process of step 74AKS018, when the confirmation effect condition is satisfied based on the determination that the initialization notification is started in step 74AKS031, the process proceeds to step 74AKS037 or later to perform the confirmation effect. Control to execute. In this way, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled to the setting change state that allows the change of the set value with the start of the power supply by turning on the power, the control for executing the confirmation effect is not performed. As a result, the control for changing the set value has priority over the control for executing the confirmation effect, so that it is possible to prevent the operation of changing the set value from being hindered. Therefore, the set value can be set appropriately.

In the power-on command process, control in steps AKS025 to AKS030 is performed in response to the setting change state. After that, by executing the confirmation effect control process in step 74AKS018 of the effect control main process, control is performed to execute the confirmation effect according to the establishment of the confirmation effect condition after the setting change state as the change permission state is completed. Do. As a result, the confirmation effect can be appropriately executed when it is prevented that the work of changing the set value is hindered. Therefore, the set value can be set appropriately.

The push button 31B and the push sensor 35B are configured to be able to detect an operation such as a pressing operation by the player. In the confirmation effect control process of the feature unit 74AK, the confirmation effect period is reached by executing the control in step 74AKS032, and then the confirmation effect condition is satisfied by determining that the start operation was detected in step 74AKS036. .. As a result, the confirmation effect can be appropriately executed when it is prevented that the work of changing the set value is hindered. Therefore, the set value can be set appropriately.

When the confirmation effect control process is executed in step 74AKS018 of the effect control main process of the feature unit 74AK, the control in step 74AKS032 is executed, so that the stored contents of the RAM 102 are initialized (cleared) without being controlled by the setting confirmation state. ), The confirmation acceptance period will be the same as when the setting confirmation status is completed. Control is performed to execute the confirmation effect according to the establishment of the confirmation effect condition during the confirmation acceptance period. As a result, when it is possible to prevent an obstacle in the work of changing the set value, it is possible to standardize the control related to the execution of the confirmation effect and reduce the control burden of the confirmation effect. Therefore, the set value can be set appropriately.

The effect control pattern 74AKP01 used in the feature unit 74AK includes the first confirmation effect control data 74AKD01 and the second confirmation effect control data 74AKD02, thereby enabling control to output the confirmation sound from the speakers 8L and 8R. In this way, the confirmation effect includes the output of the confirmation voice by the speakers 8L and 8R which are the sound output means. As a result, the confirmation effect can be appropriately executed when it is prevented that the work of changing the set value is hindered. Therefore, the set value can be set appropriately.

(Explanation of means relating to feature 74AK)
Regarding the above-mentioned feature portion 74AK, as a gaming machine that can be changed to a plurality of settings having different advantages for the player, for example, there is one described in JP-A-2010-2010902. Further, as a game machine that controls to output a confirmation sound, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-220833. However, in the techniques described in JP-A-2010-201002 and JP-A-2016-220833, the case where the setting change and the effect for confirmation conflict with each other has not been considered. Therefore, there is a possibility that the work of changing to a plurality of set values having different advantages for the player may be hindered. Therefore, as a game machine of means 1 according to the feature unit 74AK for providing a game machine capable of preventing the work of changing the set value from being hindered.
It is a gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can play a game and can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
A setting means that can be set to any of a plurality of setting values (for example, one of the setting values 1 to 3) (for example, a CPU 103 that executes the setting change process in step Sa13) and
A game control means (for example, CPU 103 that executes the special symbol process process in step S25) capable of advancing the game so that the advantage for the player differs based on the set value, and
A setting control means (for example, a CPU 103 that executes the processes of steps Sa6 and Sa12) that can be controlled to a change permission state that permits the change of the set value by the setting means when the power supply is started, and
Production means (for example, production display device 5, speakers 8L, 8R, etc.) capable of performing production, and
After the power supply is started, with the confirmation control means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 that executes the confirmation effect control process in step 74AKS018) that can execute the control of the confirmation effect by the effect means based on the establishment of the confirmation effect condition. With
The confirmation control means
When the change permission state is not controlled due to the start of power supply, control is performed to execute the confirmation effect according to the establishment of the confirmation effect condition (for example, execution of step 74AKS018 after executing steps AKS021 and AKS030). ),
When the change permission state is set, the control for executing the confirmation effect is not performed (for example, execution of steps AKS025 to AKS029).
It may be a game machine characterized by this.
According to such a configuration, since the confirmation effect is not executed in the change permission state, it is possible to prevent an obstacle in the work of changing the set value.

As a game machine of means 2 according to the feature portion 74AK
The confirmation control means controls to execute the confirmation effect according to the establishment of the confirmation effect condition after the change permission state ends (for example, execution of step 74AKS018 after executing steps AKS025 to AKS030). ),
It may be the gaming machine of the means 1 according to the feature unit 74AK characterized by the above.
In such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately execute the confirmation effect and prevent the operation of changing the set value from being hindered.

As a gaming machine of means 3 according to the feature portion 74AK
Equipped with a game detection means (for example, push button 31B, push sensor 35B, etc.) capable of detecting the movement by the player.
The confirmation effect condition is satisfied based on the detection of the operation by the game detection means during the confirmation acceptance period (for example, execution of step 74AKS060).
It may be a gaming machine of means 1 or means 2 according to the feature unit 74AK.
In such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately execute the confirmation effect and prevent the operation of changing the set value from being hindered.

As a game machine of means 4 according to the feature portion 74AK
When the confirmation control means is initialized without being controlled by the change permission state with the start of power supply, the confirmation effect condition in the confirmation acceptance period common to the case where the change permission state ends. Control to execute the confirmation effect according to the establishment (for example, execution of steps 74AKS033 and 74AKS036).
It may be any of the game machines of means 1 to means 3 according to the feature unit 74AK.
In such a configuration, it is possible to standardize the execution of the confirmation effect and prevent the operation of changing the set value from being hindered.

As a gaming machine of means 5 according to the feature portion 74AK
Equipped with sound output means (for example, speakers 8L, 8R, etc.) capable of outputting directing sound,
The confirmation effect includes output of a confirmation voice by the sound output means (for example, execution of step 74AKS047 using the first confirmation effect control data 74AKD01 and the second confirmation effect control data 74AKD02).
It may be any of the gaming machines of means 1 to means 4 according to the feature unit 74AK.
In such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately execute the confirmation effect and prevent the operation of changing the set value from being hindered.

(Explanation of feature 75AK)
FIG. 8-51 is a flowchart showing an example of a power-on command process executed by the effect control CPU 120 with respect to the feature portion 75AK of this embodiment. It suffices that this power-on command process can be executed in step 74AKS012 of the effect control main process in the feature unit 74AK of the above embodiment. In the command processing at power-on of the feature unit 75AK, the effect control CPU 120 determines the received command from the main board 11 in the same manner as in the above embodiment (steps 75AKS001 to 75AKS004). When the reception command is determined to be the setting change start command in step 75AK003 (step 75AKS003; Yes), the game stop state start processing is executed (step 75AKS005) in the same manner as in the above embodiment, and the setting change. Control to start the notification (step 75AKS006).

After performing the control in step 75AKS006, it is determined whether or not to end the setting change (step 75AKS007). If the setting change is not completed (step 75AKS007; No), unlike the above embodiment, the setting changing confirmation effect control process is executed (step 75AKS008), and then the process returns to step 75AKS007. In this way, in the power-on command process of the feature unit 75AK, the setting change confirmation effect control process is executed in step 75AKS008, so that the setting change state is controlled as the change permission state when the power supply starts. At that time, control for executing the confirmation effect can be performed. When it is determined in step 75AKS007 to end the setting change (step 75AKS007; Yes), the setting change notification is controlled to end (step 75AKS009), and the game stop state end processing is executed (step 75AKS010).

When the reception command is determined to be the RAM clear notification command in step 75AKS001 (step 75AKS001; Yes), or after the game stop state end processing is executed in step 75AKS010, the control to execute the initialization notification is controlled. Perform (step 75AKS011), and end the command processing at power-on.

When the reception command is determined to be the setting confirmation start command in step 75AKS003 (step 75AKS003; Yes), after executing the process corresponding to the setting confirmation state (steps 75AKS012-75AKS016) as in the above embodiment. ), Ends command processing when the power is turned on. In this way, in the command processing at power-on of the feature unit 75AK, when the setting change state is controlled with the start of power supply, the setting change confirmation effect control process of step 75AKS008 is executed, while the setting confirmation state is entered. When controlled, the process corresponding to the confirmation effect control process during setting change is not executed. Therefore, while the control that enables the confirmation effect to be executed when the setting is changed is performed, the control that enables the confirmation effect to be executed when the setting is in the confirmation state is not performed.

FIG. 8-52 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step 75AKS008 as the confirmation effect control process during the setting change. In the confirmation effect control process during setting confirmation, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the confirmation effect has been completed (step 75AKS031). In step 75AKS031, for example, when the confirmation effect completion flag provided in the predetermined area of the RAM 122 is on, it may be determined that the confirmation effect has been completed. The confirmation effect completion flag may be set to the on state when the execution of the confirmation effect is completed. If the confirmation effect has been completed in step 75AKS031 (step 75AKS031; Yes), the confirmation effect control process during setting change is terminated.

If it is determined in step 75AKS031 that the confirmation effect has not been completed (step 75AKS031; No), it is determined whether or not the confirmation effect is in progress (step 75AKS032). At this time, if the confirmation effect is not in progress (step 75AKS032; No), it is determined whether or not there is an operation detection for starting the confirmation effect (step 75AKS033). If no operation is detected in step 75AKS033 (step 75AKS033; No), the setting changing confirmation effect control process is terminated. If it is determined in step 75AKS033 that an operation has been detected (step 75AKS033; Yes), the effect control pattern 74AKP01 is read out (step 75AKS034) as a setting for starting the execution of the confirmation effect, and the confirmation effect process timer is initially set. The value 74AKJ00 is set (step 75AKS035), and the first confirmation effect process timer determination value 74AKD01 is set (step 75AKS036). In this way, in the confirmation effect control process during setting change, the determination in step 75AKS033 is performed. Therefore, when the setting is changed as the change permission state, an arbitrary period such as the confirmation acceptance period is not provided. Since the operation of pressing the push button 31B is detected at the timing, the confirmation effect condition is satisfied and the execution of the confirmation effect can be started.

If it is determined in step 75AKS032 that the confirmation effect is in progress (step 75AKS032; Yes), the confirmation effect process timer is updated and controlled (step 75AKS037), and it is determined whether or not a timeout has occurred (step 75AKS038). ). At this time, if a time-out has occurred (step 75AKS038; Yes), the confirmation effect is controlled to end (step 75AKS039), and the confirmation effect control process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the timeout has not occurred (step 75AKS038; No), it is determined whether or not the timer value of the confirmation effect process timer matches the determination value (step 75AKS040). If it does not match the determination value (step 75AKS040; No), the confirmation effect control process is terminated.

When it is determined in step 75AKS040 that the determination value is matched (step 75AKS040; Yes), the effect using the confirmation effect control data corresponding to the determination value is started (step 75AKS041). Further, after setting so that the timer value is determined by the confirmation effect process timer determination value stored next in the effect control pattern 74AKP01 (step 75AKS042), the confirmation effect control process is terminated.

FIG. 8-53 is a timing diagram showing a control example of the confirmation effect with respect to the feature portion 75AK. In FIG. 8-53 (A), when the power supply is started by turning on the power, the operation of pressing the clear switch AK001 is detected, but the operation of switching the lock switch 51 on is not detected. Correspondingly, the case where the setting change state is not controlled is shown. FIG. 8-53 (B) detects the operation of pressing the clear switch AK001 and the operation of switching the lock switch 51 on when the power supply is started by turning on the power. Corresponds to the case where it is controlled to the setting change state. FIG. 8-53 (C) shows the control contents at each timing.

When the setting change state is not controlled due to the start of power supply by turning on the power at the timing 75AKT01, it is the same as the case where the setting change state is not controlled by the feature 74AK, and the RAM clear notification command is received at the timing 74AKT02. As a result, the initialization notification is started, and the confirmation acceptance period is started accordingly. When the start operation of the confirmation effect is detected at the timing 75AKT03 within the confirmation acceptance period, the control for executing the confirmation effect is started, and the first to third confirmation effect control data 74AKD01 to 74AKD03 included in the effect control pattern 74AKP01 and the like are started. Is used to sequentially execute a plurality of types of effects that are the first to third confirmation effects. After that, when the timing is 75AKT04, the confirmation effect ends.

On the other hand, when the power supply is controlled by turning on the power at the timing 75AKT11 and controlled to the setting confirmation state, the setting is changed at the timing 75AKT12, unlike the case where the feature portion 74AK controls the setting change state. By receiving the start command, it is determined in step 75AKS003 of the command processing at power-on that the received command is the setting change start command. As a result, following steps 75AKS005 and 75AKS006, it is determined whether or not to end the setting change in step 75AKS007, but if it does not end at this time, the setting changing confirmation effect control process is executed in step 75AKS008. To. In the confirmation effect control process during the setting change of the feature unit 75AK, when it is determined in step 75AKS032 that the confirmation effect is not in progress, it is determined in step 75AKS033 whether or not the start operation has been detected. In this way, the confirmation effect condition can be satisfied by detecting the operation of pressing the push button 31B when the setting is changed as the change permission state. For example, if the operation of pressing the push button 31B is detected at the timing 75AKT13 when the setting is being changed, it is determined that the start operation of the confirmation effect is detected in step 75AKS033 of the confirmation effect control process during the setting change. , Control for executing the confirmation effect such as steps 75AKS034 to 75AKS042 of the confirmation effect control process during setting change is started. In this way, using the first to third confirmation effect control data 74AKD01 to 74AKD03 included in the effect control pattern 74AKP01, a plurality of types of effects to be the first to third confirmation effects are sequentially executed. After that, when the timing is 75 AKT 14, the confirmation effect ends.

When the setting change end command transmitted from the main board 11 is received at the timing 75AKT15 after the timing is 75AKT14, it is determined that the setting change is completed in step 75AKS007 in the power-on command processing of the feature unit 75AK. As a result, following steps 75AKS009 and 75AKS010, the control of step 75AKS011 is performed, and the initialization notification is started. When this initialization notification is started, the confirmation effect control process is executed in step 74AKS018 of the effect control main process, as in the case of the feature unit 74AK, so that the confirmation acceptance period is started. Just do it. Then, when the start operation of the confirmation effect is detected during this confirmation acceptance period, the control for executing the confirmation effect may be started again.

As described above, the power-on command process of the feature unit 75AK includes the setting changing confirmation effect control process executed in step 75AKS008, and the start operation is detected in step 75AKS033 of the setting changing confirmation effect control process. If it is determined that the confirmation effect is satisfied, the process proceeds to step 74AKS037 or later when the confirmation effect condition is satisfied, and control is performed to execute the confirmation effect. In this way, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled to the setting change state that allows the change of the set value with the start of the power supply by turning on the power, the control is performed to execute the confirmation effect based on the establishment of the confirmation effect condition. Therefore, by making it possible to execute the confirmation effect when the setting is changed as the change permission state, the work of accurately checking the state of the gaming machine and confirming the state of the gaming machine will be hindered. Can be prevented.

In the command processing at power-on of the feature unit 75AK, when it is determined in step 75AKS001 that the reception command is a RAM clear notification command, the same confirmation effect control process as that of the feature unit 74AK is executed to accept confirmation. The period begins. During this confirmation acceptance period, control is performed to execute the confirmation effect according to the establishment of the confirmation effect condition. On the other hand, in the confirmation effect control process during setting change, control is performed to execute the confirmation effect when it is determined in step 75AKS033 that the start operation has been detected without providing the confirmation acceptance period. As a result, the confirmation effect can be executed at any time when the setting is changed as the change permission condition. Therefore, in order to prevent the work of confirming the state of the game machine from being hindered, the confirmation effect is performed together with the change of the set value. Can be done properly.

In the command processing at power-on of the feature unit 75AK, control in steps 75AKS005 to 75AKS011 is performed in response to the setting change state. After that, the confirmation effect control process similar to that of the feature unit 74AK is executed, so that the confirmation acceptance period is started. In this way, after the setting change state as the change permission state is completed, the confirmation effect is executed according to the establishment of the confirmation effect condition in the confirmation acceptance period, so that the work of confirming the state of the game machine is hindered. In order to prevent this, the confirmation effect can be appropriately executed.

The push button 31B and the push sensor 35B are configured to be able to detect an operation such as a pressing operation by the player. For example, in the confirmation effect control process during the setting change of the feature unit 75AK, the confirmation effect condition is satisfied by determining that the start operation has been detected in step 75AKS033. Further, by executing the confirmation effect control process similar to the feature unit 74AK, it is determined that the start operation has been detected in step 74AKS036, so that the confirmation effect condition is satisfied. As a result, the confirmation effect can be appropriately executed when it is prevented that the work of confirming the state of the game machine is hindered.

(Explanation of means related to feature 75AK)
Regarding the above-mentioned feature portion 75AK, as a gaming machine that can be changed to a plurality of settings having different advantages for the player, for example, there is one described in JP-A-2010-2010902. Further, as a game machine that controls to output a confirmation sound, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-220833. However, in the techniques described in JP-A-2010-201002 and JP-A-2016-220833, the case where the setting change and the effect for confirmation conflict with each other has not been considered. Therefore, there is a possibility that the work of checking the state of the game machine may be hindered. Therefore, as a game machine of means 1 according to the feature unit 75AK for providing a game machine capable of preventing an obstacle in the confirmation work of the state of the game machine.
It is a gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can play a game and can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
A setting means that can be set to any of a plurality of setting values (for example, one of the setting values 1 to 3) (for example, a CPU 103 that executes the setting change process in step Sa13) and
A game control means (for example, CPU 103 that executes the special symbol process process in step S25) capable of advancing the game so that the advantage for the player differs based on the set value, and
A setting control means (for example, a CPU 103 that executes the processes of steps Sa6 and Sa12) that can be controlled to a change permission state that permits the change of the set value by the setting means when the power supply is started, and
Production means (for example, production display device 5, speakers 8L, 8R, etc.) capable of performing production, and
After the power supply is started, the confirmation control means (for example, the confirmation effect control process in step 74AKS018, the confirmation effect control during the setting change in step 75AKS008) that can execute the control of the confirmation effect by the effect means based on the establishment of the confirmation effect condition. It is equipped with an effect control CPU 120 that executes processing).
The confirmation control means
When the change permission state is not controlled due to the start of power supply, control is performed to execute the confirmation effect according to the establishment of the confirmation effect condition during the confirmation acceptance period (for example, execution of the confirmation effect control process in step 74AKS018, etc.). ),
In the change permission state, control is performed to execute the confirmation effect according to the establishment of the confirmation effect condition (for example, execution of the confirmation effect control process during setting change in step 75AKS008).
It may be a game machine characterized by this.
According to such a configuration, since the confirmation effect can be executed when the change permission state is set, it is possible to accurately confirm the state of the game machine and prevent the work of confirming the state of the game machine from being hindered. ..

As a game machine of means 2 related to the feature portion 75AK
The confirmation control means
When initialization is performed without being controlled by the change permission state with the start of power supply, control is performed to execute the confirmation effect according to the establishment of the confirmation effect condition during the confirmation acceptance period (for example, step 74AKS033). , 74AKS036 execution, etc.),
In the change permission state, control is performed to execute the confirmation effect according to the establishment of the confirmation effect condition (for example, execution of step 75AKS033) without providing a confirmation acceptance period.
It may be a gaming machine of means 1 according to the feature portion 75AK characterized by the above.
In such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the work of confirming the state of the gaming machine from being hindered by appropriately executing the confirmation effect together with the change of the set value.

As a game machine of means 3 related to the feature portion 75AK
The confirmation control means controls to execute the confirmation effect according to the establishment of the confirmation effect condition in the confirmation acceptance period after the change permission state ends (for example, a step after executing steps 75AKS005 to 75AKS011). Execution of 74AKS018, etc.),
It may be a gaming machine of means 1 or means 2 according to the feature portion 75AK characterized by the above.
In such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately execute the confirmation effect and prevent the work of confirming the state of the game machine from being hindered.

As a game machine of means 4 related to the feature portion 75AK
Equipped with a game detection means (for example, push button 31B, push sensor 35B, etc.) capable of detecting an operation by a player.
The confirmation effect condition is satisfied based on the detection of the operation by the game detection means (for example, the execution of step 75AKS033).
It may be any of the gaming machines of means 1 to means 3 according to the feature unit 75AK.
In such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately execute the confirmation effect and prevent the work of confirming the state of the game machine from being hindered.

(Explanation of means common to feature units 71AK to 75AK)
As a game machine of means A according to the feature units 71AK to 75AK
Setting detection means (for example, lock switch 51) that can detect the operation related to the setting,
Initialization detection means (for example, clear switch AK001) that can detect the operation related to the initialization of the game machine,
A setting confirmation control means that can control the setting confirmation state based on the detection of an operation by the setting detection means when the power supply is started (for example, CPU 103 that executes steps AKS001 and AKS002),
A change permission control means that can control the change permission state based on the detection of an operation by the initialization detection means with the start of power supply (for example, CPU 103 that executes steps Sa6 and Sa13) is provided.
It may be a gaming machine according to the feature units 71AK to 75AK.
In such a configuration, the setting confirmation state and the change permission state can be appropriately controlled, and the setting value can be set appropriately.

As a game machine of means B related to the feature units 71AK to 75AK
Setting detection means (for example, lock switch 51) that can detect the operation related to the setting,
Initialization detection means (for example, clear switch AK001) that can detect the operation related to initialization,
When the operation is not detected by the setting detection means and the operation is detected by the initialization detection means with the start of the power supply, the initialization notification is executed at the same time as the start of the power supply, while the power supply is started. For effect control that executes the initialization notification means (for example, the command processing at power-on in step AKS012) that executes the initialization notification after the operation is not detected when the operation is detected by the setting detection means. CPU120, etc.)
It may be a gaming machine according to the feature units 71AK to 75AK.
In such a configuration, the initialization notification is appropriately executed, and the set value can be appropriately set.

As a game machine of means C according to the feature portions 71AK to 75AK
It is provided with an information display means (for example, a display monitor 29) capable of displaying information on the game value given based on the game medium entering a predetermined area.
The information display means can display the set value set by the setting means (for example, display by the first display unit 29A).
It may be a gaming machine according to the feature units 71AK to 75AK.
In such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately set the set value without separately providing a configuration for displaying the set value.

As a game machine of means D according to the feature units 71AK to 75AK
An effect detection means (for example, output amount changeover switch 71AK001) capable of detecting an operation related to the output amount of the effect, and
The display control means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 that executes step AKS026) is provided to display the display related to the set value by the setting means with priority over the display related to the output amount of the effect.
It may be a gaming machine according to the feature units 71AK to 75AK.
In such a configuration, the display related to the set value is appropriately displayed, and it is possible to prevent the operation of changing the set value from being hindered.

As a game machine of means E according to the feature portions 71AK to 75AK,
The effect control means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 that executes the command analysis process of AKS015) that controls the execution of the effect based on the information from the game control means, and
The effect control means is an information limiting means (for example, an effect control CPU 120 that executes AKS027) that restricts control based on information different from the notification information for notifying the end of the change permission state when the change permission state is in effect. ) And
It may be a gaming machine according to the feature units 71AK to 75AK.
In such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a problem and appropriately set the set value.

(Explanation related to the association of feature parts)
Each configuration relating to the feature portions 71AK to 75AK may be appropriately combined with a part or all of each configuration relating to the other feature portions. The feature portions thus combined or the individual feature portions that are not combined may be appropriately combined with a part or all of each configuration related to the other feature portions. For example, regarding the feature unit 71AK, the configuration of the effect control CPU 120 that executes the output switching process at the start in step 71AKS013 of the effect control main process, and for the feature unit 72AK, the short initial operation is performed in step 72AK007 of the command process at power-on. For effect control that does not control to execute the short initial operation until it is determined in step 73AKS007 of the command processing at power-on that the setting change is completed with respect to the configuration and feature unit 73AK of the effect control CPU 120 that controls execution. Confirmation in step 74AKS018 of the effect control main process regarding the configuration of the CPU 120 and the feature unit 74AK The setting of the configuration of the effect control CPU 120 for executing the effect control process and feature 75AK is being changed in step 75AKS008 of the command processing at power-on. The configuration of the effect control CPU 120 that executes the confirmation effect control process may be a combination of a part or all of the effect control CPU 120 as appropriate.

(Explanation of feature 87AK)
FIG. 9-1 is a flowchart showing an example of the fluctuation pattern setting process in the feature unit 87AK. In the variation pattern setting process, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the jackpot flag is on (step S261). Then, when the jackpot flag is on (step S261; Yes), the jackpot variation pattern determination table 132A is selected and set as a table to be used for determining the variation pattern to any of a plurality of types (step S262). Further, for example, by reading the jackpot type buffer value stored in the RAM 102, it is specified whether the jackpot type is "non-probability", "probability", or "probability" (step S263).

If the big hit flag is off in step S261, it is determined whether or not the small hit flag is on (step S264). Then, when the small hit flag is on (step S264; Yes), it is determined whether or not the small hit flag is on (step S264). Then, if the small hit flag is on (step S264; Yes), the small hit fluctuation pattern determination table 132B is selected and set as the table used for determining the variation pattern to any of a plurality of types (step S265). )

On the other hand, when the small hit flag is off in step S264 (step S264; No), the loss fluctuation pattern determination table 132C is selected and set as the table to be used for determining the variation pattern to any of a plurality of types. (Step S268), for example, by determining whether or not the time saving flag provided in the RAM 102 is on, it is determined whether or not the game state is in the time saving control in which the time saving control is performed in the probabilistic state or the time saving state. Identify.

After executing any of the processes of steps S263, S265, and S268, the table is set in the usage table based on, for example, numerical data indicating the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type stored in the variation random number buffer or the like. By referring to the variation pattern determination table, the variation pattern is determined to be one of a plurality of types (step S272).

FIG. 9-2 shows the variation pattern in this embodiment. In this embodiment, among the cases where the variable display result (special figure display result) is "missing", the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is "non-reach" which is not the reach mode, and the reach mode is ". A plurality of fluctuation patterns are prepared in advance corresponding to each of the cases of "reach" and to the case where the variable display result (special figure display result) becomes "big hit" or "small hit". There is. The number of fluctuations in the fluctuation pattern of pseudo-continuous fluctuation and the number of fluctuations in the fluctuation pattern of special fluctuation are the period from the start of the first variable display to the end of the last re-variation (at the time of derivation display of the fixed decorative symbol). When the reach is established in the last revariable display, the number of variable displays executed during the period from the start of the first variable display to the establishment of the reach) is shown. In the variable display effect of the pseudo-ream, a fixed decorative symbol (final stop symbol) that becomes a variable display result after the variable display of the decorative symbol is started is derived in response to the fact that the start condition of the special figure game is satisfied once. By the time, the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in all of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right", and then all the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C. At 5R, the effect display for changing (re-changing) the decorative pattern again is performed a predetermined time. Further, in the variable display effect of the special variation, the period until the temporary stop and the temporary stop period are shortened as compared with the variable display effect of the pseudo-ream, and the decorative symbol is re-variated. In addition to the fluctuation pattern shown in FIG. 9-2, there is a fluctuation pattern of the pseudo-ream that does not perform the pseudo-ream even if the pseudo-ream chance eye is temporarily stopped, and after the variable display effect of the special fluctuation, "small" There may be a fluctuation pattern that is a "hit". Further, a plurality of types of pseudo-ream fluctuation patterns having different numbers of times may be provided.

FIG. 9-3 (A) shows an example of determining the fluctuation pattern at the time of a big hit. For example, in the process of step S272 shown in FIG. 9-1, the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table prepared in advance stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 101 is referred to based on the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, and thus FIG. It suffices to determine the fluctuation pattern when the variable display result becomes a "big hit" at the determination ratio as shown in -3 (A). In the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table 132A, determination values are assigned to each variation pattern so that the ratio determined for each variation pattern differs depending on which of the plurality of types the jackpot type is determined. For example, the assignment of the determination value for each fluctuation pattern is different depending on whether the jackpot type is “non-probability” or “probability”. As a result, the proportions determined for the same fluctuation pattern can be different depending on the determination result of which of the plurality of types of jackpots is used. In this embodiment, the determination ratio is set in the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table 132A and the loss fluctuation pattern determination table 132C described later so that the probability that the variable display result becomes a “big hit” increases as the number of special fluctuations increases. ing. In this embodiment, patterns such as 12 special fluctuation patterns, 8 special fluctuation patterns, and 4 special fluctuation patterns are prepared as fluctuation patterns of special fluctuations, and 12 special fluctuation patterns> 8 special fluctuation patterns. Expectations are set such that special fluctuation pattern> 4 special fluctuation patterns.

FIG. 9-3 (B) shows an example of determining the fluctuation pattern at the time of a small hit. For example, in the process of step S272 shown in FIG. 9-1, the small hit variation pattern determination table stored in advance in a predetermined area of the ROM 101 is referred to based on the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern. The fluctuation pattern when the variable display result is "small hit" may be determined at the determination ratio as shown in 9-3 (B).

FIG. 9-3 (C) shows an example of determining the fluctuation pattern at the time of loss. For example, in the process of step S272 shown in FIG. 9-1, the loss variation pattern determination table 132C stored in advance in a predetermined area of the ROM 101 is referred to based on the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern. The fluctuation pattern when the variable display result is "missing" may be determined at the determination ratio as shown in 9-3 (C).

In the loss fluctuation pattern determination table 132C, the determination value varies depending on whether the gaming state is the normal state or the time reduction control is being performed in the probability variation state or the time reduction state so that the ratio determined for each variation pattern is different. There is a part assigned to the pattern. As a result, it is possible to make the ratio determined for the same fluctuation pattern different depending on whether the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving control is being performed in the probabilistic state or the time saving state. In the loss variation pattern determination table 132C, there is a portion in which determination values are assigned to different variation patterns depending on whether the gaming state is the normal state or the time reduction control is being performed in the probability variation state or the time reduction state. As a result, it is possible to determine different fluctuation patterns depending on whether the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving control is being performed in the probability changing state or the time saving state.

After returning to FIG. 9-1 and determining the fluctuation pattern in step S272, the special figure fluctuation time, which is the variable display time of the special symbol according to the determination result of the fluctuation pattern, is set (step S273). The special symbol fluctuation time, which is the variable display time of the special symbol, is the time required from the start of the fluctuation of the special symbol in the special symbol game until the definite special symbol, which is the variable display result (special symbol display result), is derived and displayed. Is.

After executing the process of step S273, the special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B are executed according to the fluctuation special symbol designation buffer value. A setting for starting the variation of the special symbol is made so as to start any of the special symbol games using the diagram (step S274). As an example, if the variable special figure designation buffer value is "1", a setting for transmitting a drive signal for updating the display of the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A is performed. On the other hand, if the variable special figure designation buffer value is "2", the setting for transmitting the drive signal for updating the display of the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B is performed.

Following the process of step S271, settings for transmitting various commands for starting the fluctuation of the special symbol are made (step S275). For example, when the fluctuation special figure designation buffer value is "1", the CPU 103 receives a game state designation command, a first fluctuation start command, a fluctuation pattern designation command, and a variable display result from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. In order to sequentially transmit the notification command and the first reserved storage number notification command, the setting data indicating the storage address (starting address) in the ROM 101 of the first fluctuation start command table prepared in advance is transmitted to the RAM 102. Stores in the buffer area specified by the send command pointer in the command buffer. On the other hand, when the fluctuation special figure designation buffer value is "2", the CPU 103 receives a game state designation command, a second fluctuation start command, a fluctuation pattern designation command, and a variable display result from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. In order to sequentially transmit the notification command and the second reserved storage number notification command, the setting data indicating the storage address in ROM 101 of the second fluctuation start command table prepared in advance is specified by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer. Store in the command buffer area. After that, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2", which is a value corresponding to the special symbol variation process (step S276), and then the variation pattern setting process is terminated.

Here, the first fluctuation start command is a command for designating the fluctuation start in the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A. The second fluctuation start command is a command for designating the fluctuation start in the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B. The variable pattern specification command is variably displayed in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R on the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol game. This is a variation pattern specification command that specifies a variation pattern such as a decorative pattern. The variable display result notification command is a command for designating a variable display result such as a special symbol or a decorative symbol. The game state designation command is a command for designating the current game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

Based on the command transmission setting in step S275, every time the above-mentioned command control process is executed after the variation pattern setting process is completed, the game state designation command is issued from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. 1 The variation start command or the second variation start command, the variation pattern specification command, the variable display result notification command, the first hold storage number notification command, or the second hold storage number notification command are sequentially transmitted. The order in which these effect control commands are transmitted can be changed arbitrarily. For example, after the variable display result notification command is transmitted first, the first variation start command, the second variation start command, and the variation pattern specification command are transmitted. , The game state designation command, the first hold storage number notification command, the second hold storage number notification command, and the like may be transmitted in this order.

FIG. 9-4 is a flowchart showing an example of the variable display start setting process. In the variable display start setting process, the effect control CPU 120 first reads, for example, the EXT data in the variable display result notification command transmitted from the main board 11, and whether or not the special figure display result becomes "missing". Is determined (step S521). At this time, if it is determined that the special figure display result is "missing" (step S521; Yes), for example, by reading the EXT data in the fluctuation pattern designation command, the designated fluctuation pattern is decorated. It is determined whether or not the pattern is a non-reach variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display mode of the symbol is “non-reach” (step S522).

When it is determined in step S522 that the pattern is a non-reach variation pattern (step S522; Yes), a combination of fixed decorative symbols to be the final stop symbol constituting the non-reach combination is determined (step S523). As an example, in the process of step S523, first, a random number value for determining a left-determined symbol, which is updated by an effect random counter or the like provided in a predetermined area (effect control counter setting unit or the like) of the random number circuit 124 or RAM 122, is shown. By extracting the numerical data and referring to the left confirmed symbol determination table prepared in advance stored in the ROM 121, the “left” decorative symbol display area 5L in the display area of the image display device 5 among the confirmed decorative symbols Determine the left fixed decorative pattern that is displayed as a stop. Next, the numerical data indicating the random number value for determining the right-determined symbol, which is updated by the random number circuit 124 or the random counter for effect, is extracted, and the right-determined symbol determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121 is referred to. For example, among the fixed decorative symbols, the right fixed decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed in the “right” decorative symbol display area 5R in the display area of the image display device 5 is determined. At this time, it is preferable that the symbol number of the right fixed decorative symbol is determined so as to be different from the symbol number of the left fixed decorative symbol by the setting in the right confirmed symbol determination table or the like. Subsequently, the numerical data indicating the random number value for determining the medium-determined symbol updated by the random number circuit 124 or the random counter for effect is extracted, and the medium-determined symbol determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121 and prepared is referred to. For example, among the fixed decorative symbols, the medium fixed decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed in the “middle” decorative symbol display area 5C in the display area of the image display device 5 is determined.

If it is determined in step S522 that the pattern is not a non-reach variation pattern (step S522; No), a combination of fixed decorative symbols to be the final stop symbol constituting the reach combination is determined (step S524). As an example, in the process of step S524, first, numerical data indicating a random number value for determining a left-right confirmed symbol updated by a random number circuit 124 or a random counter for effect is extracted, and left and right stored in advance in ROM 121 and prepared. By referring to the finalized symbol determination table, among the finalized decorative symbols, the symbol numbers that are stopped and displayed in the "left" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R in the display area of the image display device 5 are displayed. Determine the same decorative pattern. Further, the numerical data indicating the random number value for determining the medium-determined symbol updated by the random number circuit 124 or the random counter for effect is extracted, and the medium-determined symbol determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121 and prepared is referred to. Therefore, among the fixed decorative symbols, the medium fixed decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed in the “middle” decorative symbol display area 5C in the display area of the image display device 5 is determined. Here, for example, when the symbol number of the medium-fixed decorative symbol is the same as the symbol number of the left-fixed decorative symbol and the right-fixed decorative symbol, and the fixed decorative symbol is a jackpot combination, an arbitrary value is used. By adding or subtracting (for example, "1") to the symbol number of the medium fixed decorative symbol, the fixed decorative symbol may be a reach combination instead of a jackpot combination. Alternatively, when determining the medium-fixed decorative symbol, the difference (design difference) between the left-fixed decorative symbol and the right-fixed decorative symbol may be determined, and the medium-fixed decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol difference may be set. ..

When it is determined in step S521 that the special figure display result is not "missing" (step S521; No), it is determined whether the special figure display result is "small hit" or other cases. Determine (step S525). When it is determined to be a "small hit" (step S525; Yes), a combination of fixed decorative symbols to be the final stop symbol corresponding to the case of a "small hit" such as an opening chance eye is determined (step S527). .. As an example, in response to the case where any of the fluctuation patterns PC1-1 to PC1-3 is specified by the fluctuation pattern specification command, it is confirmed that the final stop symbol constituting one of the plurality of types of open chance eyes is used. Determine the combination of decorative patterns. In this case, numerical data indicating a random value for determining the chance eye, which is updated by a random counter or the like provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193, is extracted, and a predetermined chance eye determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121 or the like is used. It is sufficient to determine the combination of the definite decorative symbols constituting one of the opening chance eyes by referring to.

When it is determined in step S525 that the combination is "non-probability" or "probability" other than "small hit" (step S525; No), the combination of the final stop symbols constituting the jackpot combination is determined. (Step S526). As an example, in the process of step S526, first, numerical data indicating a random value for determining a big hit confirmation symbol updated by a random counter of the effect control counter setting unit 193 or the like is extracted, and then stored in advance in ROM 121 or the like. By referring to a predetermined jackpot confirmation symbol determination table or the like, the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right" are stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5. Determine decorative symbols with the same symbol number. At this time, even if a decision is made to use a different decorative symbol as the final decorative symbol, depending on whether the jackpot type is "non-probable variation" or "probable variation", and whether or not there is a promotion effect during the jackpot. Good.

As a specific example, when the jackpot type is "non-probability variation", select one of a plurality of types of normal symbols to determine the definite decorative symbol that constitutes the non-probability variation jackpot combination. Just do it. When the jackpot type is "probability variation", one of a plurality of types of normal symbols or probability variation symbols is selected to form a non-probability variation jackpot combination or a probability variation jackpot combination. You just have to decide. At this time, if the fixed decorative symbol of the non-probability change jackpot combination is determined, the notification that the probability variation state is controlled in the re-lottery effect during the variable display is not performed, and the game is executed in response to the jackpot game state. It suffices to be notified that the probabilistic state is controlled by a promotion effect during a big hit. On the other hand, when the final decoration symbol of the probability variation jackpot combination is determined, the notification that the probability variation state is controlled in the re-lottery effect during the variable display or without executing the re-lottery effect is performed.

After executing the process of step S524 or S526, it is determined whether or not the designated variation pattern is a special variation pattern, for example, by reading the EXT data in the variation pattern designation command (step S528). When it is determined in step S528 that the pattern is a special variation pattern (step S528; Yes), a predetermined effect execution setting process is performed (step 87AKS001). FIG. 9-5 is a flowchart showing an example of a predetermined effect execution setting process. In the predetermined effect execution setting process shown in FIG. 9-5, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not to execute the predetermined effect (step 87AKS002). Specifically, in the process of step 87AKS002, whether or not to execute the predetermined effect is determined according to the determination ratio shown in FIG. 9-6 based on the variable display result. The predetermined effect in this embodiment is an effect performed during the variable display effect of the special variation, and as described later, is not executed when the predetermined effect is executed at the time of the special variation before 12 times. It is a production with a higher degree of expectation than when 12 special fluctuations are made. Further, as will be described later, when the predetermined effect is executed, the later the execution timing, the higher the expectation.

Following the process of step 87AKS002, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the execution of the predetermined effect is determined to be “presence” in step 87AKS002 (step 87AKS003). When it is determined that the execution of the predetermined effect is “Yes” (step 87AKS003; Yes), the execution mode and execution timing of the predetermined effect are determined (step 87AKS004). Specifically, in the process of step 87AKS004, the variation pattern is specified based on the variation pattern designation command, and based on the identified variation pattern, the execution mode of the predetermined effect is set to "Aspect A" according to the determination ratio shown in FIG. 9-7. "Or" Aspect B ". In the example shown in FIG. 9-7, the determination ratio of the execution mode of the predetermined effect is set regardless of the number of special fluctuations, but the determination ratio is set differently depending on the number of special fluctuations. You may be. Further, as shown in FIG. 9-7, the predetermined effect of "Aspect B" is a mode that is determined only when the variable display result is "Big hit". Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's expectation that the predetermined effect of "Aspect B" is executed. In "Aspect A" in this embodiment, character A is displayed, and in "Aspect B", character B is displayed. In addition, "Aspect B" may be determined only in the case of the fluctuation pattern of "special fluctuation jackpot".

Further, in the process of step 87AKS004, if the specified fluctuation pattern is a special fluctuation pattern of 4 times, the variable display result is "big hit" or "missing" according to the determination ratio shown in FIG. 9-8 (A). The execution timing of the predetermined effect is determined according to the presence. As described above, in this embodiment, when the predetermined effect is executed, the later the execution timing, the higher the expectation. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 9-8 (A), of the four special fluctuations, the second special fluctuation is the second special fluctuation than the case where the first special fluctuation is the execution timing of the predetermined effect. The variable display result is larger in the third time than when the time is set as the execution timing of the predetermined effect, and in the fourth time, which is the final time, than when the time is set as the execution timing of the predetermined effect. The decision rate is set so that the expectation of becoming a "big hit" is high.

If the specified fluctuation pattern is a special fluctuation pattern of 8 times, in the process of step 87AKS004, whether the variable display result is "big hit" or "miss" according to the determination ratio shown in FIG. 9-8 (B). The execution timing of the predetermined effect is determined according to the above. In the example shown in FIG. 9-8 (B), unlike FIG. 9-8 (A), the execution timing is a plurality of timings such as the first or second execution timing, or the third to fifth execution timings. An example is shown in which one determination ratio is set for, but as described above, the later the execution timing, the higher the expectation level. In the example shown in FIG. 9-8 (B), the third to fifth times are the third to fifth times more than the case where the first or second special fluctuation time is set as the execution timing of the predetermined effect. The 6th or 7th time is the final time than the case where any of the special fluctuation times is set as the execution timing of the predetermined effect, and the 6th or 7th time is the final time than the case where the 6th or 7th special change time is set as the execution timing of the predetermined effect. The determination ratio is set so that the 8th round has a higher expectation that the variable display result will be a "big hit". Therefore, in the process of step 87AKS004, one of these execution timings is first determined, and then a specific execution timing is determined (determined in two steps). For example, in the case of the first or second special fluctuation, whether the execution timing is the first or the second is set, and the second time is more expected than the first time. To decide. Further, for example, in the case of any of the third to fifth special fluctuations, similarly, whether the execution timing is the third, the fourth, or the fifth is further determined as the fifth. It is decided that the expectation of the 4th time is higher than that of the 3rd time. The same applies to the case of the 6th or 7th special change. As for FIG. 9-8 (B), as in FIG. 9-8 (A), the respective determination ratios may be set for each time (1st to 8th times) (determined in one step). In this case, the decision ratio may be set so that the later the execution timing, the higher the expectation.

If the specified fluctuation pattern is a special fluctuation pattern of 12 times, in the process of step 87AKS004, whether the variable display result is "big hit" or "miss" according to the determination ratio shown in FIG. 9-8 (C). The execution timing of the predetermined effect is determined according to the above. In the example shown in FIG. 9-8 (B), as in FIG. 9-8 (B), one determination ratio is set for a plurality of timings as the execution timing. As described above, the later the execution timing, the higher the expectation. That is, also in the example shown in FIG. 9-8 (C), one of the execution timings is first determined, and then, as in the case of determining the execution timing at the determination ratio shown in FIG. 9-8 (B). A specific execution timing may be determined (determined in two steps). As for FIG. 9-8 (C), as in FIG. 9-8 (A), the respective determination ratios may be set for each time (1st to 12th times) (determined in one step). In this case, the decision ratio may be set so that the later the execution timing, the higher the expectation.

After returning to FIG. 9-5 and executing the process of step 87AKS004, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the execution timing of the predetermined effect determined in step 87AKS004 is the final round in the special variation (step 87AKS005). ). When the execution timing of the predetermined effect is not the final round (step 87AKS005; No), the effect control CPU 120 determines the effect mode after the predetermined effect is executed (step 87AKS006). As described above, when the predetermined effect is executed, the expectation is higher than when the special variation is performed 12 times without being executed. Therefore, the predetermined effect is determined at the timing before the final special variation. When the effect is executed, the player's interest in the special fluctuation after the predetermined effect is reduced. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the predetermined effect is executed at a timing prior to the special change of the final round, the special variation is performed from the execution of the predetermined effect to the period when the special change of the final round is performed. By executing an effect (extension effect) different from the variable display effect of, the time after the execution of the predetermined effect is extended. In the step 87AKS006, the execution mode of the extension effect is determined according to the execution mode of the predetermined effect according to the determination ratio shown in FIG. 9-9.

As shown in FIG. 9-9, there are "aspect 1" and "aspect 2" as the execution mode of the extension effect in this embodiment, and in the step 87AKS006, the mode of the predetermined effect to be executed is "aspect A". If "Aspect 1", the extension effect of "Aspect 1" is determined, and if "Aspect B", the extension effect of "Aspect 2" is determined as an execution mode. The extension effect of "Aspect 1" is an effect of displaying the message of "target appearance" on the image display device 5, and the extension effect of "Aspect 2" is an effect of displaying the message of "premium target acquisition" on the image display device 5. However, the effect is not limited to this, and in addition to this, the audio output or the lamp may be blinked or turned on, or the presence / absence of the audio output or the presence / absence of the lamp display may be changed depending on the mode. Good.

Returning to FIG. 9-5, after executing the process of step 87AKS006, when the execution timing of the predetermined effect is the final round (step 87AKS005; Yes), or when it is determined in step 87SKA003 that the predetermined effect is not executed (step 87AKS003). ; No), the effect control CPU 120 determines the execution mode of the explanatory effect (step 87AKS007). The explanatory effect is an effect indicating that the expectation of becoming a "big hit" is high when the predetermined effect is executed in the special variation. For example, the character A or the character corresponds to the predetermined effect of the aspect A or the aspect B. It is a production that displays such as GET B. In step 87AKS007, the execution mode of the explanatory effect is determined according to the fluctuation pattern according to the determination ratio shown in FIG. 9-10. As shown in FIG. 9-10, there are "aspect A" and "aspect B" as an execution mode of the explanatory effect in this embodiment, and "aspect A" indicates that the character A should be GET. It is an effect to be performed, and "aspect B" is an effect to display that the character B should be GET.

As described above, in the case where the predetermined effect in this embodiment is "lost", the predetermined effect in "aspect B" is not executed. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 9-10, the predetermined effect is "lost". The explanatory effect of "Aspect B" is not executed. Further, since the "big hit" is confirmed when the predetermined effect of "Aspect B" is executed, it is possible to prevent the predetermined effect of "Aspect B" from being executed to become a super reach and giving the player a feeling of delay. Therefore, as in FIG. 9-7, in the case of the fluctuation pattern of "special fluctuation jackpot" controlled by "big hit" without becoming super reach, the ratio of determining "Aspect B" is higher than that of other fluctuation patterns. Is also high. In addition, since the "big hit" is confirmed when the predetermined effect of "Aspect B" is executed, when it becomes a "big hit" via the super reach (in the case of the fluctuation pattern of the special variable super reach jackpot), it is as it is. The value given to the player may be different depending on the case of "big hit" (in the case of the special fluctuation big hit fluctuation pattern), for example, the number of rounds is different or the probability variation grant ratio is different. Further, the predetermined effect of "Aspect B" is not limited to the premium effect indicating that the "big hit" is confirmed, and may be executed even at the time of "loss". Along with this, the explanatory effect of "Aspect B" may also be executed at the time of "Loss".

Returning to FIG. 9-5, after executing the process of step 87AKS007, the effect control CPU 120 determines the character to be displayed each time in the special variation (step 87AKS008), and ends the predetermined effect execution setting process. Since the character A is displayed when the predetermined effect of "Aspect A" is executed, the character B corresponding to "Aspect B" is not displayed, and the predetermined effect of "Aspect B" is executed. If this is the case, the character B is displayed, so that the character A corresponding to the "aspect A" is restricted from being displayed. The restriction may be performed in step 87AKS008 or in step 87AKS004.

In step 87AKS008, the character to be displayed is determined according to the determination ratio shown in FIG. 9-11 according to the number of special changes and the like. Specifically, when the predetermined effect is not executed, the display character is determined according to the determination ratio of FIGS. 9-11 (A) to (C) according to the number of special fluctuations, and when the predetermined effect is executed, the display character is determined. The display character is determined according to the determination ratio shown in FIG. 9-11 (D). In this embodiment, five types of characters such as character A to character E are prepared in advance, character A is displayed at the time of the predetermined effect of "aspect A", and character B is displayed at the time of the predetermined effect of "aspect B". To. Therefore, in step 87AKS008, the display settings of the characters C to E are set. As shown in the figure, in this embodiment, the higher the number of times the character E is displayed, the higher the expectation of becoming a “big hit”. In the example shown in FIG. 9-11, the number of times the character E is displayed is shown. For example, in the case of "E is once" in FIG. 9-11 (A), C or C or in the remaining three special fluctuations. It suffices if D is displayed. It should be noted that a plurality of patterns in which the number and order of characters to be displayed are determined may be prepared as display patterns, and which pattern to display may be determined. In this case, for example, when the number of special fluctuations is 4, even if the number of times the character E is displayed is 1, the number of times the character E is displayed is the same, for example, the expectation that it will be a "big hit" is higher. However, the degree of expectation may differ depending on the display timing.

Returning to FIG. 9-4, after executing any of the processes of step 87AKS001, step S523, and step S527, the effect control CPU 120 performs other effect execution settings (step S531). For example, an effect such that a predetermined sound effect (for example, an alarm sound, a chime sound, a siren sound, etc.) is output from the speakers 8L and 8R at a predetermined timing at the start or during execution of the variable display, or a game effect. Immediately announce (deterministically) that the variable display result will be a "big hit" by executing the effect of a predetermined mode including a part or all of the effect of the mode in which the flash lamp included in the lamp 9 or the like shines. The effect of the one-shot notification mode may be executed. Alternatively, as a notice effect during fluctuation, an effect of displaying a special effect image (premium image) corresponding to the variable display result being a "big hit" may be executed.

As another example, in the process of step S531, regardless of the possibility that the variable display result becomes a "big hit", for example, a setting for executing a predetermined mode of effect for liveliness may be made. More specifically, it suffices to be able to perform a predetermined mode of effect, such as an effect in which a predetermined lamp included in the game effect lamp 9 illuminates, or an effect of displaying a predetermined effect image as a mini character.

After that, the effect control pattern is determined to be one of a plurality of prepared patterns (step S532). At this time, the effect control CPU 120 selects, for example, one of a plurality of prepared special figure variation effect control patterns in response to the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern designation command, and sets the pattern to be used. After executing the process of step S532, for example, the initial value of the effect control process timer provided in the RAM 122 is set corresponding to the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern designation command (step S533). Subsequently, the setting for starting the fluctuation of the decorative pattern or the like in the image display device 5 is made (step S534). At this time, for example, the display control command specified by the display control data included in the special figure fluctuation effect control pattern determined as the pattern to be used in step S532 is transmitted to the VDP or the like of the display control unit 123. The variation of the decorative symbols may be started in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R provided on the screen of the image display device 5. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2", which is a value corresponding to the effect process during variable display (step S535), and then the variable display start setting process ends.

FIG. 9-12 shows an example of an effect operation when the predetermined effect of "Aspect A" is executed. In the illustrated example, an example is shown in which the predetermined effect of "Aspect A" is executed at the 10th time in the fluctuation pattern of the "special fluctuation super reach jackpot" in which the special fluctuation is performed 12 times. As shown in FIG. 9-12 (a), when the first special fluctuation is started, as shown in FIG. 9-12 (b), a message display such as GET character A together with character A as an explanatory effect. (Explanatory display 87AK001) is performed. With the explanatory effect, the player can recognize that the expectation is high when the character A is displayed. The explanatory display 87AK001 may be reduced and continuously displayed in order to prevent the player from forgetting it. In this case, it may be deleted at the timing shown in FIG. 9-11 (i) described later (the timing after the character A is displayed). In addition, the display color may be changed from black to rainbow at the timing.

As shown in FIG. 9-12 (c), at the end of the first special variation (at the time of the first temporary stop of the decorative symbol), the character determined by the process of step 87AKS008 of FIG. 9-5 is displayed. In the illustrated example, the character C is displayed as the character 87AK002 determined by the processing of 87AKS008. Then, when the second special variation is started as shown in FIG. 9-12 (d), the character number display 87AK003 indicating the display number of the character C is performed. The character number display 87AK003 may be displayed for a period until the predetermined effect is performed or until the special variation ends without the predetermined effect being executed.

As shown in FIG. 9-12 (e), at the end of the second special variation (at the time of the second temporary stop of the decorative symbol), the character determined by the process of step 87AKS008 of FIG. 9-5 is displayed. In the illustrated example, an example in which the character E is displayed as the character 87AK002 determined in the process of 87AKS008 is shown. Then, when the third special variation is started as shown in FIG. 9-12 (f), the character number display 87AK003 indicating the number of times the characters C and E are displayed is performed, and at the end of the third special variation ( At the time of the third temporary stop of the decorative symbol), the character C is displayed as the character 87AK002 as shown in FIG. 9-12 (g).

By repeating such special fluctuations, in the 10th special fluctuation which is the execution timing of the predetermined effect, as shown in FIG. 9-12 (h), at the end of the special fluctuation (at the time of the 10th temporary stop of the decorative symbol). Character A, which is character 87AK004 as a predetermined effect, is displayed. After the predetermined effect is executed, the extension effect of the mode determined in step 87AKS006 of FIG. 9-5 is executed for a period corresponding to the period until the remaining two special fluctuations are completed. In the example shown in FIG. 9-12 (h), an example is shown in which the message "target appearance" is displayed as the extension effect of "aspect 1". Then, when a period corresponding to the case where the twelfth special change is performed elapses, as shown in FIG. 9-12 (j), the reach state is reached and the reach effect of the super reach is executed.

FIG. 9-13 shows an example of an effect operation when the predetermined effect of “Aspect B” is executed. In the illustrated example, an example is shown in which the predetermined effect of "Aspect B" is executed at the 10th time in the fluctuation pattern of the "special fluctuation jackpot" in which the special fluctuation is performed 12 times. Similar to FIG. 9-12 (h), at the end of the 10th special variation (at the time of temporary stop of the 10th decorative symbol), as shown in FIG. 9-13 (a), the character 87AK004 as a predetermined effect is used. A certain character B is displayed. Then, after the predetermined effect is executed, the extension effect of the mode determined in step 87AKS006 of FIG. 9-5 is executed for a period corresponding to the period until the remaining two special fluctuations are completed. In the example shown in FIG. 9-13 (b), an example is shown in which the message "Premium target acquisition" is displayed as the extension effect of "Aspect 2". Then, when the period corresponding to the case where the 12th special change is performed elapses, as shown in FIG. 9-13 (c), the confirmed display symbol that does not reach the reach state and becomes a "big hit" as it is is displayed. Will be done.

As described above, the feature unit 87AK can execute the variable display effect of the special variation, and the higher the number of times the special variation is executed, the higher the expectation. Further, the predetermined effect can be executed during the variable display effect of the special variation, and if the predetermined effect is executed at the time of the special variation before 12 times, the special variation is performed 12 times without being executed. Expectations are higher than in the case. Therefore, it is possible to attract the attention of the player to the execution of the predetermined effect, and it is possible to prevent the deterioration of the game interest.

Further, in the first special variation, an explanatory effect indicating that the expectation of becoming a "big hit" is high when the predetermined effect is executed in the special variation is executed. Therefore, the purpose of the special effect can be easily recognized. Further, the fluctuation pattern includes a pseudo-ream fluctuation pattern and a special fluctuation fluctuation pattern, and a predetermined effect is executed in the fluctuation due to the special fluctuation fluctuation pattern. Therefore, it is possible to pay attention not only to the number of executions but also to the presence or absence of execution of the predetermined effect. In addition, there are two types of predetermined effects, "aspect A" and "aspect B", and when the predetermined effect of "aspect B" is executed, the "big hit" is confirmed. That is, the degree of expectation differs depending on the mode to be executed. Therefore, it is possible to pay attention to the type of predetermined production.

Furthermore, the fluctuation patterns include the fluctuation pattern of "special fluctuation super reach jackpot" and the fluctuation pattern of "special fluctuation jackpot", and the pattern that develops into super reach after the special fluctuation and the fluctuation pattern that does not develop into super reach. There is a pattern that becomes a "big hit" as it is. Therefore, there are a plurality of development patterns after the execution of the special production, and the game entertainment can be improved. Further, in the case of the fluctuation pattern of "special fluctuation super reach jackpot", the ratio of executing the predetermined effect of "aspect A" is high, and in the case of the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation pattern of "special fluctuation jackpot", "mode B". The rate at which the prescribed effect of is executed is high. Therefore, there are a plurality of development patterns after the execution of the special production, and it is possible to improve the game entertainment.

(Modification example of feature portion 87AK)
In the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 9-12, an example of displaying the character displayed in each special variation and the character number display 87AK003 indicating the number of times is shown, but in addition to this, the number of specials is displayed. A display that can recognize whether it is a fluctuation (for example, a message display such as the third time!) May be performed. Since the higher the number of special fluctuations is, the higher the expectation is. Therefore, the player can easily recognize the number of special fluctuations by such a display, and the game interest can be improved.

Further, in the above embodiment, the expectation is high when the predetermined effect is executed in the special variation (when the character A or B is displayed), and in other cases, the higher the number of times the character E is displayed, the higher the expectation. An example with a high degree is shown. That is, in the above embodiment, an example of suggesting a jackpot expectation degree according to the displayed character is shown, but this is an example. For example, the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be suggested by the number of times or the combination of the displayed characters. For example, if the character displayed most in the 12 special fluctuations is character A, the set value is even, if it is character B, the set value is odd, and if it is character C, the set value is the lowest. It may be indicated that the character D does not indicate the high setting, and the character E may indicate the high setting, and the character E may confirm the high setting. Further, the character displayed second most may be targeted. Further, the set value may be suggested by the display pattern of the display character. Further, the set value may be suggested by the type of the character displayed at the specific time in the special change, and the number of special changes may be determined by lottery at the start of the special change. .. In that case, a message such as paying attention to the type of character may be displayed at the start of the specific change. Further, for example, the set value may be suggested for the number of times or the pattern of the character displayed in the latter half of the special fluctuations such as the 7th to 12th out of the 12 special fluctuations. In this way, by suggesting the set value in the special effect, the player's attention to the special effect can be attracted.

The present invention is not limited to those described above. Further, the specific configuration is included in the present invention even if there are changes or additions within a range that does not deviate from the gist of the present invention, in addition to the above-described embodiment and other embodiment examples described later.

Further, all or a part of the configurations shown in the above-described embodiment and each modification, and the configurations shown in the following embodiment and each modification may be arbitrarily combined.

It should be noted that the above-described embodiment and the following-described embodiment disclosed this time are exemplary in all respects and are not considered to be restrictive. The scope of the present invention is indicated by the scope of claims rather than the above and below, and is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and scope equivalent to the scope of claims.

The gaming machine according to the present invention is another gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player.
A special effect executing means (such as an effect control CPU 120 that performs a special variation) that executes a special effect that repeats a predetermined mode a predetermined number of times, and
A predetermined effect executing means (such as an effect control CPU 120 that executes a predetermined effect) capable of executing a predetermined effect during execution of the special effect is provided.
When the predetermined effect is not executed by the predetermined effect executing means, it is higher when the predetermined mode is repeated a second time more than the first time than when the predetermined mode is repeated the first time as the special effect. The ratio is controlled to the advantageous state (for example, the higher the number of executions of the special fluctuation, the higher the expectation).
A case where the predetermined effect is executed by the predetermined effect executing means before the predetermined mode is repeated the first time, rather than a case where the predetermined effect is not executed by the predetermined effect executing means and the predetermined mode is repeated the second time. Is controlled to the advantageous state at a higher rate (for example, when the predetermined effect is executed at the time of the special variation before 12 times, the predetermined effect is not executed and the special variation is performed 12 times. Expectations are higher than in the case),
further,
A special display that starts the display according to the start of the variable display and ends the display according to the end of the variable display (for example, the active display, the display of the sphere display 129IW002b in the active display movement effect, and the specific display in the embodiment. It is provided with a special display executing means capable of executing (sometimes referred to as), and the special display executing means can display the special display in a manner capable of suggesting a variable display period (for example, a spherical display by an active display movement effect). It is suggested that the 129IW002b is located at the start position at the start of the variable display and at the end position at the end of the variable display. See FIG. 10-4.), The variable display period is special in a suggestable manner. While displaying the display, it is possible to change the mode of the special display according to the degree of expectation controlled in an advantageous state (for example, during the execution of the active display movement effect of moving the sphere display 129IW002b). , It is possible to execute an active display change effect that changes the display mode of the spherical display 129IW002b (see FIG. 10-5). A game machine can be mentioned.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the game entertainment by executing an appropriate effect.

Further, the timing of changing the display mode of the specific display may be associated with the special effect. For example, the display mode of the specific display may be changed in synchronization with the timing when the repetitive effect is executed in the special effect. By doing so, the player can pay attention to both whether or not the special effect is repeated and whether or not the display mode of the specific display changes.

Further, the repetitive effect of the special effect may be associated with the type of the specific display. For example, as a special effect, a specific display that can be displayed only when the second time is repeated may be provided. By doing so, the player can pay more attention to both the special effect and the specific display.

Further, the advantage may be associated so as to change according to the combination of the special effect, the predetermined effect, and the specific display. For example, when the number of repetitions is large and the predetermined effect and the specific display are executed, the advantage is high. By doing so, it becomes possible for the player to pay more attention to the production and display, and the interest is improved.

Further, it is more advantageous at a higher rate when the specific display mode is changed by the time the predetermined mode is repeated the first time than when the predetermined mode is repeated the second time without executing the predetermined effect during the execution of the special effect. It may be controlled by the state. Alternatively, the case where the mode of the specific display is changed may be controlled to the advantageous state at a higher rate than the case where the predetermined effect is executed. By doing so, if the mode of the specific display changes, the expectation for the advantageous state can be maintained even if the predetermined effect is not executed, and the interest is improved. The timing at which the predetermined effect is executed and the timing at which the specific display mode changes may be the same timing or different timings.

Further, as an example of a form of a gaming machine capable of improving the enjoyment of a game, the gaming machine according to the present invention performs variable display (for example, variable display of a special symbol or a decorative symbol), which is advantageous for the player. A game machine that can be controlled to a state (for example, a jackpot game state), and is a special display (for example, an active display or an active display) that starts the display when the variable display starts and ends the display when the variable display ends. The special display executing means capable of executing the display of the sphere display 129IW002b in the active display movement effect, which may be referred to as a specific display in the examples) is provided, and the special display executing means can suggest a variable display period. The special display can be displayed (for example, the active display movement effect suggests that the spherical display 129IW002b is moved so as to be located at the start position at the start of the variable display and at the end position at the end of the variable display. (See FIG. 10-4.) When the special display is displayed in a mode that can suggest a variable display period, it is possible to change the mode of the special display according to the degree of expectation controlled in an advantageous state. (For example, during the execution of the active display movement effect of moving the sphere display 129IW002b, the active display change effect of changing the display mode of the sphere display 129IW002b can be executed. See FIG. 10-5). Hereinafter, an example of the form example of this game machine will be described as another form example.

(Example of other forms)
Next, the feature portion 129IW of another embodiment will be described. Here, the display area of the image display device 5 includes an information display area (for example, the information display area 129IW001 shown in FIG. 10-3) capable of displaying information related to the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. In the information display area, as information related to the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the active display corresponding to the variable display being executed (for example, the active display 129IW002 shown in FIG. 10-3 and FIG. 10-4 129IW002a and sphere display 129IW002b), hold display corresponding to the variable display whose execution is suspended (for example, hold display 129IW003 shown in FIG. 10-3), variable first special symbol or second special symbol. A small symbol (for example, the small symbol display 129IW004 shown in FIG. 10-4) or the like that is variably displayed in synchronization with the display is displayed. Then, in the information display area, the active display effect using the active display can be executed.

(Active display production)
The active display effect includes an active display change effect that changes the display mode (display color in this example) of the active display, and an active display movement effect that moves and displays the active display.

Among the active display effects, the active display change effect is a big hit by changing the display mode of the active display to a display mode (for example, a blue, green, or red sphere) different from the normal mode (for example, a white sphere). It is suggested that the degree of expectation is high and the degree of expectation that an advantageous effect (for example, super reach effect, pseudo-continuous effect, etc.) is executed. Further, the timing at which the display mode of the active display changes also suggests the degree of expectation of a big hit and the degree of expectation that an advantageous effect (for example, super reach effect, pseudo continuous effect, etc.) will be executed.

In the active display movement effect, the active display is displayed in a manner capable of suggesting a variable display period. Specifically, in the active display movement effect, the active display (for example, the spherical display 129IW002b) starts moving at the start of the variable display and ends the movement at the end of the variable display. The active display is located at a position indicating the variable display start time (hereinafter, also referred to as a start position) at the start of the variable display, and at a position indicating the variable display end time (hereinafter, also referred to as an end position) at the end of the variable display. Move to (for example, move at a constant speed). With such an effect, the elapsed period and the remaining period of the variable display period are suggested by the positional relationship between the current position of the active display and the start position and the end position.

In another embodiment, it is possible to execute an active display change effect and an active display movement effect for the one variable display during the one variable display. When the active display change effect and the active display movement effect are executed, for example, the movement of the active display is started at the start of the variable display, and the display mode (for example, display color) of the active display is started while the active display is moving. Changes, and the movement of the active display ends when the variable display ends.

(Active display effect determination process)
FIG. 10-1 is a flowchart showing an example of the active display effect determination process. The active display effect determination process is executed in the variable display start setting process (step S171). In the active display effect determination process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the active display change effect is executed (step 129IWS001).

In step 129IWS001, the effect control CPU 120 uses the active display change effect execution determination table to draw lots according to the fluctuation pattern, and determines whether or not the active display change effect is executed.

FIG. 10-2 (A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an active display change effect execution decision table. In the active display change effect execution determination table shown in FIG. 10-2 (A), determination values are assigned so that the ratio of determination of "execution" differs depending on the content of the fluctuation pattern. Specifically, the determination values are assigned in the order of "super reach"> "normal reach"> "non-reach" so that the percentage determined as "executed" becomes higher. Further, when the variable display result is "big hit", the determination value is assigned so that the percentage of determination of "execution" is higher than that of "loss". With such a configuration, it is suggested that the execution of the active display change effect has a higher expectation of a big hit and an advantageous effect (for example, a super reach effect) than when it is not executed. Will be.

When it is determined to execute the active display change effect (Y in step 129IWS002), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the active display movement effect (step 129IWS003). In the example shown in FIG. 10-1, the active display movement effect can be executed only when the active display change effect is executed. However, the active display movement effect is performed regardless of whether or not the active display change effect is executed. It may be feasible. In addition, when it is a specific effect mode among a plurality of types of effect modes, or when it is a specific game state (for example, a probabilistic state) among a plurality of types of game states, the active display movement effect is always executed. You may do so.

In step 129IWS003, the effect control CPU 120 uses the active display movement effect execution determination table to perform a lottery according to the fluctuation pattern, and determines whether or not to execute the active display movement effect.

FIG. 10-2 (B) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an active display movement effect execution decision table. In the active display movement effect execution determination table shown in FIG. 10-2 (B), determination values are assigned so that the ratio of determination of "execution" differs depending on the content of the fluctuation pattern. Specifically, the determination values are assigned in the order of "super reach"> "normal reach"> "non-reach" so that the percentage determined as "executed" becomes higher. Further, when the variable display result is "big hit", the determination value is assigned so that the percentage of determination of "execution" is higher than that of "loss". With such a configuration, it is suggested that the execution of the active display movement effect has a higher expectation of a jackpot expectation and an advantageous effect (for example, a super reach effect) than when it is not executed. Will be.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines the display mode of the active display after the change due to the active display change effect (step 129IWS004).

In step 129IWS004, the effect control CPU 120 uses the active display mode determination table to draw lots according to the fluctuation pattern, and determines the display mode of the active display after the change.

FIG. 10-2 (C) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an active display mode determination table. As shown in FIG. 10-2 (C), in other embodiments, in addition to the normal mode (white sphere), the first display mode (blue sphere), the second display mode (green sphere) and The active display can be displayed by the third display mode (red sphere).

In the active display mode determination table shown in FIG. 10-2 (C), the jackpot expectation and advantageous effects (for example, supermarket) are displayed in the order of "third display mode"> "second display mode"> "first display mode". Judgment values are assigned so that the degree of expectation that the reach effect) will be executed is high. With such a configuration, when the active display changes, it is possible to pay attention to which display mode is changed.

In addition, the present invention is not limited to the example of other embodiments, and for example, the display mode of the active display after the change may be determined at different ratios depending on whether or not the active display movement effect is executed. For example, when the active display movement effect is executed, the rate of determination of the display mode having a high degree of expectation may be higher than that when the active display movement effect is not executed. Further, a display mode (for example, a fourth display mode having the highest degree of expectation) that is determined only when the active display movement effect is executed may be provided.

Further, as a look-ahead notice effect, an effect of changing the display mode of the hold display to a display mode different from the normal mode (for example, a display mode corresponding to the first to third display modes of the active display) is executed. May be good. Further, the active display may be a display mode that inherits the display mode of the hold display (for example, the display mode may be the same as the display mode of the hold display, or some elements (for example, shape, size, etc.) are different. Other elements (for example, colors, patterns, etc.) may be displayed by the same display mode). In this case, it may be determined whether or not the active display change effect or the active display move effect is executed at different ratios depending on the display mode when the display is held. Further, the display mode after the change and the change timing when the active display change effect is executed may also be determined according to the display mode when the display is held as the hold display.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines the change timing of the active display due to the active display change effect (step 129IWS005).

In step 129IWS005, the effect control CPU 120 uses the active display change timing determination table to perform a lottery according to the fluctuation pattern to determine the change timing of the active display.

FIG. 10-2 (D) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an active display change timing determination table. As shown in FIG. 10-2 (D), in the other embodiment, the active display is displayed at the first timing (when the fluctuation starts), the second timing (when the reach is established), and the third timing (when the super reach is established). The aspect can be changed.

In the active display change timing determination table shown in FIG. 10-2 (D), the jackpot expectation and advantageous effects (for example, super reach effect) are displayed in the order of "third timing"> "second timing"> "first timing". Etc.) are assigned so that the degree of expectation for execution is high. With such a configuration, even if the display mode after the change is the same, the degree of expectation differs depending on the timing of the change, so that the timing at which the active display changes can be focused on.

In the other embodiment, the display mode of the active display is changed once by the active display change effect, but it may be changed a plurality of times. For example, when the display mode of the active display after the change due to the active display change effect is determined to be the third display mode, the normal mode is changed to the first display mode at the first timing, and the first display mode is changed at the second timing. It may change to the second display mode and change from the second display mode to the third display mode at the third timing. That is, the change may be performed at all timings. Further, for example, the normal mode may be changed to the first display mode at the first timing, and the first display mode may be changed to the third display mode at the third timing, or the normal mode may be changed to the third display mode at the first timing. It may change to one display mode and change from the first display mode to the third display mode at the second timing. That is, the change may be performed by combining a plurality of timings. Further, the ratio of the content of the active display change effect (that is, which of the first to third display modes is changed) may be different depending on the timing of the change.

In another embodiment, the variable display period is suggested by the active display movement effect, but since the presence or absence of the change in the active display and the display mode after the change are determined based on the fluctuation pattern, the display mode of the active display Also suggests a variable display period. Specifically, when the active display is in the third display mode, the ratio of normal reach or super reach is higher than in the normal mode, which suggests that the variable display period is long. Further, when the active display is in the normal mode, the non-reach rate is high, which suggests that the variable display period is short.

(Active display change production)
Next, a specific example of the effect mode of the active display effect will be described. FIG. 10-3 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an effect mode of the active display change effect. In addition, in FIG. 10-3, the mode of the effect screen changes in the order of (1), (2) and (3).

As shown in FIG. 10-3 (1), an information display area 129IW001 is provided below the display area of the image display device 5, and the information display area 129IW001 is an active display corresponding to a variable display during execution. The 129IW002 and the hold display 129IW003 corresponding to the variable display whose execution is held are displayed. In the example of FIG. 10-3 (1), the active display 129IW002 is displayed in such a manner that the spherical display corresponding to the variable display during execution is placed on the pedestal display.

As shown in FIGS. 10-3 (1) and 10-3 (2), when the variable display of the left, middle, and right decorative symbols is completed, the spherical display of the active display 129IW002 is deleted. Then, as shown in FIG. 10-3 (3), the hold memory is digested one by one, the hold display is shifted and displayed one by one, and the next variable display is started in the image display device 5.

In the example shown in FIG. 10-3, the active display change effect is executed at the timing when the reach is established. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 10-3 (4), when the variable display of the decorative pattern is in the reach mode, the display mode of the spherical display in the active display 129IW002 is changed from the normal mode (white in this example) to the first mode. It changes to one display mode (blue in this example, but represented by a diagonal line pattern in FIG. 10-3).

(Active display movement effect)
FIG. 10-4 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an effect mode of the active display movement effect. In addition, in FIG. 10-4, the mode of the effect screen changes in the order of (1), (2) and (3).

When the active display movement effect is executed, the active display movement effect is started at the same time as the variable display of the decorative symbol is started. When the active display movement effect is started, as shown in FIG. 10-4 (1), in the information display area 129IW001 of the image display device 5, the spherical display 129IW002b corresponding to the variable display being executed imitates the belt conveyor. The active display is displayed according to the aspect mounted on the belt conveyor display 129IW002a. Further, in the information display area 129IW001, a small symbol display 129IW004 that performs variable display of the small symbol in synchronization with the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is displayed. The small symbol display 129IW004 is provided at a position that does not interfere with the super reach effect even when the super reach effect is executed, and the small symbol is continuously displayed even during the execution of the super reach effect or the like. Variable display is executed. Further, as shown in FIG. 10-4, when the active display movement effect is executed, the hold display is not displayed. With such a configuration, it is possible to pay attention to the active display movement effect and the variable display during execution. Not limited to the example shown in FIG. 10-4, when the active display movement effect is executed, the hold display may be reduced and displayed, or a number or the like indicating the number of hold memories may be displayed. You may. Further, even in the case of the state shown in FIG. 10-3 in which the active display movement effect is not executed, that is, regardless of whether or not the active display movement effect is executed, a number or the like indicating the number of reserved memories may be displayed. Good.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 10-4 (1), (2), (3), and (4), the spherical display is accompanied by the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol (that is, according to the progress of the variable display period). An effect is performed in which the 129IW002b moves from the right end to the left end on the belt conveyor display 129IW002a.

Then, as shown in FIG. 10-4 (4), the sphere display 129IW002b reaches the left end of the belt conveyor display 129IW002a at the timing when the variable display of the decorative symbol ends, and as shown in FIG. 10-4 (5). When the variable display of the new decorative symbol is started, the sphere display 129IW002b falls from the left end on the belt conveyor display 129IW002a and disappears, and the new sphere display 129IW002b is displayed at the right end on the belt conveyor display 129IW002a.

As described above, in the active display movement effect, the spherical display 129IW002b corresponding to the variable display being executed starts moving at the start of the variable display and ends the movement at the end of the variable display. Further, the spherical display 129IW002b is located at the start position at the start of the variable display (for example, the rightmost position on the belt conveyor display 129IW002a shown in FIG. 10-4 (1)), and the end position at the end of the variable display (for example, FIG. 10). -4 (4) moves so as to be located at the leftmost position on the belt conveyor display 129IW002a). With such an effect, the elapsed period and the remaining period of the variable display period are suggested by the positional relationship between the current position of the sphere display 129IW002b and the start position and the end position. Further, since the active display movement effect is executed in the information display area for displaying information related to the variable display such as the active display, it is possible for the player to easily understand that the variable display period during execution is suggested. it can.

In the example shown in FIG. 10-4 (4), the sphere display is moved by rotating the belt of the belt conveyor display in the traveling direction. In the other embodiment, the variable display period is set for each fluctuation pattern, but the variable display is performed by changing the rotation speed of the belt according to the fluctuation pattern (that is, changing the moving speed of the sphere display). It is possible to cope with the difference in period. In addition, in a specific period (for example, after a big hit or a small hit, a period until the variable display number reaches a predetermined number (which may be 1 time or 30 times)), a constant variable display is performed. The variation pattern set in the period may be used, and the active display movement effect may be executed in the specific period. By doing so, it is possible to reduce the control load due to the active display movement effect.

Not limited to the example shown in FIG. 10-4, when the sphere display 129IW002b moves, the sphere display 129IW002b displays the moved locus region in a different manner from before moving (for example, the locus region is different from before passing). It may be displayed by color, or may be displayed by a display color corresponding to the display mode of the spherical display 120IW002b). With such a configuration, it is possible to easily recognize the elapsed period. Further, the locus region to which the sphere display 129IW002b has moved can be displayed in a plurality of modes, and the jackpot expectation and the expectation that an advantageous effect is executed may differ depending on which mode is displayed. Good. That is, the degree of expectation of a big hit and the degree of expectation that an advantageous effect is executed may be suggested depending on the mode of the locus region.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 10-4, the active display movement effect is started at the same time as the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol, but at a predetermined timing after the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol (for example, at the start of super reach). ) May start the active display movement effect. That is, after the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the information display area is displayed in the manner shown in FIG. 10-3 until a predetermined timing (for example, at the start of super reach) is reached, and the predetermined timing (for example, super reach) is displayed. After that, the information display area may be displayed according to the mode shown in FIG. 10-4.

Further, in another embodiment, the active display movement effect can be executed when the active display change effect is executed, but the active display change effect is executed as in the example shown in FIG. 10-4. Even if it is not performed, the active display movement effect may be executed.

(Active display movement effect and active display change effect)
FIG. 10-5 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an effect mode of the active display movement effect and the active display change effect. In addition, in FIG. 10-5, the mode of the effect screen changes in the order of (1), (2) and (3).

When the active display movement effect is started, as shown in FIG. 10-5 (1), in the information display area 129IW001 of the image display device 5, the spherical display 129IW002b corresponding to the variable display being executed imitates the belt conveyor. The active display is displayed according to the aspect mounted on the belt conveyor display 129IW002a.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 10-5 (1), (2), (3), and (4), the sphere is displayed with the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol (that is, according to the progress of the variable display period). An effect is performed in which the 129IW002b moves from the right end to the left end on the belt conveyor display 129IW002a. At this time, when the execution timing of the active display change effect is reached, the robot arm 129IW005 appears as shown in FIGS. 10-5 (2), (3), and (4), and the spherical display 129IW002b grasped by the robot arm 129IW005. Is changed from the normal mode (white in this example) to the third display mode (red in this example, but represented by black in FIG. 10-5). When the active display change effect is executed during the execution of the active display movement effect, the movement of the active display (spherical display 129IW002b in FIG. 10-5) is temporarily stopped to change the display mode. Later, the movement may be resumed. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the effect control from becoming too complicated.

Then, as shown in FIG. 10-5 (4), the sphere display 129IW002b reaches the left end of the belt conveyor display 129IW002a at the timing when the variable display of the decorative symbol ends, and as shown in FIG. 10-5 (5). When the variable display of the new decorative symbol is started, the sphere display 129IW002b falls from the left end on the belt conveyor display 129IW002a and disappears, and the new sphere display 129IW002b is displayed at the right end on the belt conveyor display 129IW002a.

In this way, when the active display change effect and the active display move effect are executed, the display mode (that is, the degree of expectation) changes while the spherical display 129IW002b corresponding to the variable display being executed is moving. It is configured as follows. According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the development of the production from being pre-read and reduce the interest, and to continuously attract the attention of the player to the moving sphere display 129IW002b. ..

Further, in another embodiment, since the degree of expectation differs depending on the timing (that is, the changing position) when the display mode of the sphere display 129IW002b changes (see FIG. 10-2 (D)), the moving sphere display 129IW002b is displayed. On the other hand, it can attract the attention of the player.

In another embodiment, the display mode of the active display (spherical display 129IW002b in FIG. 10-5) is configured to change only once, but it may be changed a plurality of times. With such a configuration, the player can continuously attract the attention of the moving sphere display 129IW002b.

As described above, the gaming machine according to the present invention has a specific display (for example, active display or active display movement) that starts the display when the variable display starts and ends the display when the variable display ends. A specific display executing means capable of executing the sphere display 129IW002b in the effect) is provided, and the specific display executing means can display the specific display in a manner capable of suggesting a variable display period (for example, a sphere in the active display movement effect). It is suggested that the display 129IW002 is located at the start position at the start of the variable display and at the end position at the end of the variable display. See FIG. 10-4. It is also suggested by the display mode of the active display. When the specific display is displayed in a mode that can suggest a variable display period, it is possible to change the mode of the specific display according to the degree of expectation controlled in an advantageous state (for example, a sphere). During the execution of the active display movement effect of moving the display 129IW002b, it is possible to execute the active display change effect of changing the display mode of the spherical display 129IW002b (see FIG. 10-5). According to such a configuration, the effect of production can be enhanced.

Further, the specific display execution means may display the specific display in a predetermined display area (for example, information display area 129IW001; see FIG. 10-4) in which information related to the variable display is displayed. According to such a configuration, the player can easily recognize the variable display period.

Further, when the specific display is displayed, the information regarding the variable display in the predetermined display area may be difficult to see (see FIGS. 10-3 and 10-4). With such a configuration, attention can be drawn to the variable display during execution.

Further, the specific display execution means moves and displays the specific display during the variable display, suggests a variable display period depending on the display position of the specific display, and changes the mode of the specific display when the specific display is moved. (See FIG. 10-5). According to such a configuration, the player's attention can be continuously attracted to the moving specific display.

Further, even if the mode of the specific display after the change is the same, the degree of expectation to be controlled in an advantageous state differs depending on which display position the specific display is in when the mode is changed (FIG. 10). -2 (D)) may be used. With such a configuration, it is possible to pay attention to the position where the specific display changes.

Further, when the specific display moves, the locus region to which the specific display has moved may be displayed in a manner different from that before the movement. With such a configuration, it is possible to easily recognize the elapsed period.

(Explanation of feature 130IW)
Next, the feature unit 130IW of another embodiment will be described. Here, the display area of the image display device 5 includes an effect display area for displaying an effect related to the game and an information display area. In the information display area, an active display corresponding to the variable display being executed (for example, the active display 130IW001 shown in FIG. 11-3) and a hold display corresponding to the variable display whose execution is suspended (for example, FIG. 11-) Hold display 130IW002) shown in 3, small symbols that perform variable display in synchronization with the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol (for example, small symbol display 129IW004 shown in FIG. 11-3), and displays related thereto. (For example, the storage box display 130IW003 in which the robot arm shown in FIG. 11-4 is housed) is displayed. The information display area is provided so as to overlap the effect display area. In this example, the information display area, which is a part of the display area of the image display device 5, is provided so as to overlap the effect display area, which is the entire display area of the image display device 5. For example, in the example of FIG. 11-3, in the entire display area of the image display device 5 (that is, the effect display area), the area where the active display 130IW001, the hold display 130IW002, and the storage box display 130IW003 are displayed is the information display area. ..

(Predetermined production)
In another embodiment, a predetermined effect can be executed by displaying the decorative display in association with the information display area. The predetermined effect is provided with a first type that changes the background image, a second type that changes the display mode of the hold display, and a third type that changes the display mode of the hold display while changing the background image. There is. Then, the mode of the decorative display displayed in association with the information display area is configured to be different depending on the type of the predetermined effect to be executed. In another embodiment, "displaying in association with the information display area" means that the image is displayed so as to overlap at least a part of the target information display area (that is, it is displayed so as to be in physical contact with the information display area). In addition to this, an image related to the image displayed in the target information display area is displayed (for example, an image having a content corresponding to the content of the image displayed in the information display area or an information display area. It is a concept including (displaying an image or the like acting on the image displayed in), and means displaying the image with a connection with the target information display area.

(Predetermined production determination process)
FIG. 11-1 is a flowchart showing an example of a predetermined effect determination process. The predetermined effect determination process is executed in the lookahead advance notice setting process (step S161). The predetermined effect determination process is executed only when a start prize is generated and an effect control command at the time of the start prize is received. In the predetermined effect determination process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the predetermined effect is executed and the type when the predetermined effect is executed (step 130IWS001).

In step 130 IWS001, the effect control CPU 120 uses the predetermined effect execution determination table to draw a lottery according to the variation pattern specified by the received effect control command at the time of starting winning, and determines whether or not the predetermined effect is executed. Determine the type of case. If the predetermined effect can be executed at an arbitrary timing from the start winning prize to the end of the target variable display, the execution timing at the time of execution is also determined. In this case, the jackpot expectation may be different depending on the execution timing.

FIG. 11-2 (A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a predetermined effect execution determination table. In the predetermined effect execution determination table shown in FIG. 11-2 (A), determination values are assigned so that the ratio of determination of "execution" differs depending on the content of the fluctuation pattern. Specifically, the determination values are assigned in the order of "super reach"> "normal reach"> "non-reach" so that the percentage determined as "executed" becomes higher. Further, when the variable display result is "big hit", the determination value is assigned so that the percentage of determination of "execution" is higher than that of "loss". With such a configuration, it is suggested that the execution of the predetermined effect has a higher expectation of a jackpot expectation and an advantageous effect (for example, a super reach effect) than when the predetermined effect is not executed. become.

In the predetermined effect execution decision table shown in FIG. 11-2 (A), the jackpot expectation degree and advantageous effect (for example, super reach effect, etc.) are displayed in the order of "third type"> "second type"> "first type". ) Is assigned so that the expectation that it will be executed is high. With such a configuration, it is possible to pay attention to which type is executed when the predetermined effect is executed. Regarding the third type of predetermined effect that changes the background image and the display mode of the hold display, the hold display is displayed when the background image is changed by the first type of predetermined effect or by the second type of predetermined effect. The appearance, sound effects, and other effects may be different from when the display mode is changed. Further, the predetermined effect (background change) of the first type may be feasible regardless of the degree of expectation. That is, it may be a production that does not suggest the degree of expectation.

When it is determined to execute the predetermined effect (Y in step 130IWS002), the effect control CPU 120 determines the mode of the decorative display effect that displays the decorative display in association with the information display area prior to the predetermined effect (step 130IWS003). ).

In step 130IWS003, the effect control CPU 120 uses the decoration display determination table to draw lots according to the type of the predetermined effect, and determines the mode of the decoration display effect.

FIG. 11-2 (B) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a decorative display determination table. The decoration display determination table shown in FIG. 11-2 (B) is configured so that the mode of the decoration display displayed in association with the information display area differs depending on the type of the predetermined effect to be executed. According to the decoration display determination table shown in FIG. 11-2 (B), when the decoration display effect of the first aspect is executed, the predetermined effect of the first type is executed, and the decoration display effect of the second aspect is executed. And the second type of predetermined effect is executed. Exceptionally, when the decorative display effect of the third aspect is executed, any of the predetermined effects of the first type, the second type, and the third type is executed.

In the decorative display effect of the first aspect, for example, as shown in FIG. 11-5, the two robot arms 130IW005 are displayed as decorative displays so as to be attached to the belt conveyor display of the hold display 130IW002. Further, in the decorative display effect of the second aspect, for example, as shown in FIG. 11-4, the robot arm 130IW005 is displayed as a decorative display so as to appear from the storage box display 130IW003.

Next, a specific example of the information display area will be described. FIG. 11-3 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the information display area.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 11-3 (1) and 11-3, the information display area that is a part of the display area of the image display device 5 overlaps the effect display area that is the entire display area of the image display device 5. It is provided. Specifically, in the entire display area of the image display device 5 (that is, the effect display area), the active display 130IW001 corresponding to the variable display during execution, the hold display 130IW002 corresponding to the variable display whose execution is suspended, and the hold display The information display area is the area where the storage box display 130IW003 in which the robot arm 130IW005 used for the effect of changing the display mode of the active display is displayed is displayed. The hold display 130IW002 includes a belt conveyor display that imitates a belt conveyor and a spherical display corresponding to each hold memory, and the first special symbol or the second special symbol is overlapped with the belt conveyor display of the hold display 130IW002. The small symbol display 130IW004 that performs the variable display of the small symbol in synchronization with the variable display of is displayed. In the example of FIG. 11-3, the areas where the active display 130IW001, the hold display 130IW002, and the storage box display 130IW003 are displayed are the information display areas as they are, but they do not have to be the same. Is displayed within the area defined as the information display area.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 11-3 (1) and 11-3, when the variable display of the decorative symbol is started, the belt conveyor display of the hold display 130IW002 operates and the sphere display corresponding to each hold memory moves. Then, a shift effect is executed such that the sphere display dropped from the belt conveyor display is placed on the pedestal portion of the active display 130IW001. At this time, the variable display of the small symbol is also started.

(Predetermined production (pending change))
FIG. 11-4 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an effect mode of a predetermined effect (holding change). In addition, in FIG. 11-4, the mode of the effect screen changes in the order of (1), (2) and (3).

As shown in FIG. 11-4 (1), the second aspect is when the decorative symbol is variablely displayed and the active display 130IW001 and the hold display 130IW002 are displayed in the information display area of the image display device 5. When the decorative display effect of is executed, the robot arm 130IW005 appears from the storage box display 130IW003 as a decorative display, and the appearing robot arm 130IW005 overlaps with the effect display area in the information display area. The effect of grasping the third spherical display (corresponding to the third hold memory) from the left of the high hold display 130IW002 is performed (Fig. 11-4 (2)). That is, the robot arm 130IW005, which is a decorative display, is displayed by superimposing (adhering) it on the hold display 130IW002. Then, the sphere display grasped by the robot arm 130IW005 changes from a normal mode (white in this example) to a special mode (red in this example, but represented by black in FIG. 11-4). Hold change) is executed (Fig. 11-4 (3)). Here, depending on the number of the display mode of the sphere display to be changed by the predetermined effect (hold change), the operation mode of the robot arm (for example, the number of the hold portion to be grasped) by the decorative display effect to be executed in advance It is decided in advance. The portion of the robot arm 130IW005 in contact with the hold display 130IW002 (or sphere display) may be enlarged and displayed, or may be displayed with an effect display to facilitate the attention. Further, in the example of the predetermined effect (hold change) shown in FIG. 11-4, the display mode of the sphere display of the hold display 130IW002 changes by being grasped by the robot arm 130IW005, but the belt conveyor display operates (for example, the belt). The display mode of the sphere display may be changed by rotating the sphere display in the traveling direction or the backward direction to vibrate the sphere display). That is, a predetermined effect (holding change) may be executed by using the belt conveyor display which is the pedestal of the sphere display. In addition, both the effect of using the belt conveyor display, which is the pedestal of the sphere display, and the effect of displaying (attaching) the decorative display (robot arm 130IW005) on the hold display 130IW002 are executed and held. The display mode of the display may be changed.

The degree of overlap of the information display area with the effect display area means the degree of overlap of each area (active display 130IW001, hold display 130IW002, and storage box display 130IW003) constituting the information display area with the effect display area. In the example, the larger the size of the area constituting the information display area, the higher the degree of overlap with the effect display area. Of the information display area, the area that has a high degree of overlap with the effect display area (hold display 130IW002 in this example) is displayed in association with the decorative display (in this example, the robot arm 130IW005 is displayed so as to grasp the spherical display of the hold display 130IW002). By doing so, it is possible to easily recognize that the decorative display has been displayed while visually recognizing the information display area.

In another embodiment, the display mode of the hold display is changed by the decorative display effect of the second mode (specifically, the robot arm 130IW005 grabs the spherical display corresponding to the hold memory). However, the ratio of whether or not the hold display changes and the degree of expectation differ depending on the movement and mode of the robot arm (for example, how it moves until it adheres to the hold display, the color, size, and shape of the robot arm). The ratio of the hold display to which of the plurality of display modes may be changed may be different.

(Predetermined production (background change))
FIG. 11-5 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an effect mode of a predetermined effect (background change). In addition, in FIG. 11-5, the mode of the effect screen changes in the order of (1), (2) and (3).

As shown in FIG. 11-5 (1), when the decorative display effect of the first aspect is executed prior to the predetermined effect (background change), the robot arm 130IW005 displays the effect in the information display area as the decorative display. It is displayed so as to adhere to the belt conveyor display of the hold display 130IW002, which has a high degree of overlap with the area. That is, the robot arm 130IW005, which is a decorative display, is displayed by superimposing (adhering) it on the hold display 130IW002. Then, as shown in FIG. 11-5 (2), the robot arm 130IW005 grabs the background image, and as shown in FIG. 11-5 (3), the background image grabbed by the robot arm 130IW005 changes. Background change) is executed. The display mode of the active display 130IW001, the hold display 130IW002 (sphere display or belt conveyor display), and the storage box display 130IW003 may be changed according to the change of the background image, or the mode of the robot arm 130IW005. May be changed.

Regardless of which of the predetermined effect (pending change) shown in FIG. 11-4 and the predetermined effect (background change) shown in FIG. 11-5 is executed, a common start effect (for example, a common start effect) is performed before the decorative display effect. , The effect that the belt conveyor display vibrates, etc.) may be executed. With such a configuration, when the start effect is executed, in what manner the decorative display is displayed, that is, which of the predetermined effect (pending change) and the predetermined effect (background change) is executed. Can be noticed.

The effect executed in the information display area may be related to the effect executed in the effect display area. For example, when the battle effect is being executed in the effect display area, the belt conveyor display of the hold display 130IW002 in the information display area or the spherical display on the belt conveyor display may vibrate. Further, for example, the decorative display (for example, the robot arm 130IW005) displayed in the information display area may act on the notice image displayed in the effect display area to change the mode of the notice image.

Further, the decorative display (for example, the robot arm 130IW005) may be displayed in operation when the predetermined effect (background change) or the predetermined effect (holding change) is being executed. With such a configuration, the interest can be improved.

Further, the decorative display (for example, the robot arm) may be displayed in the information display area even when the shift effect of the hold display is being executed together with the predetermined operation display (for example, the operation of the belt conveyor). .. With such a configuration, since the individual operation displays are executed in parallel, it is possible for the player to easily recognize that the shift effect of the hold display has been performed.

As described above, the gaming machine according to the present invention has an active display 130IW001 and a hold in the information display area (for example, in the example of FIG. 11-3, the entire display area of the image display device 5 (that is, the effect display area)). A display means capable of displaying information related to the game (for example, active display 130IW001, hold display 130IW002, etc.) in the display 130IW002 and the storage box display 130IW003 (the area in which the storage box display 130IW003 is displayed is the information display area), and the information display area. By displaying a decorative display (for example, robot arm 130IW005; see FIG. 11-4) in association with, any one of a plurality of types of predetermined effects (for example, predetermined effects (background change) and predetermined effects (holding change)). It is provided with a predetermined effect executing means capable of executing the above, and the mode of the decorative display displayed in association with the information display area differs depending on the type of the predetermined effect to be executed (for example, FIG. 11-2 (B), See Figures 11-4 and 11-5). According to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the effect of production and improve the interest.

Further, the predetermined effect executing means displays the decorative display in association with a part of the information display area (for example, the robot arm is displayed so as to grasp the spherical display of the hold display 130IW002 in the information display area. The robot arm 130IW005 is displayed so as to be attached to the belt conveyor display of the hold display 130IW002 (see FIGS. 11-4 and 11-5) to execute a predetermined effect. According to such a configuration, the player can recognize the effect without excessively moving the line of sight.

Further, the display area of the display means includes an effect display area for displaying the effect related to the game and an information display area, and the effect display area and the information display area overlap at least a part of the information display area. The decorative display is displayed in association with the effect display area and the area with a high degree of overlap (for example, the robot arm displays the information display area so as to grasp the spherical display of the hold display 130IW002 with a high degree of overlap with the effect display area. In addition, the robot arm 130IW005 is displayed so as to adhere to the hold display 130IW002, which has a high degree of overlap with the effect display area, among the information display areas. See FIGS. 11-4 and 11-5). According to such a configuration, it is possible to easily recognize that the decorative display is displayed even when viewing the effect in the effect display area.

In addition, the predetermined effect executing means can execute a predetermined effect that changes the background image of the effect display area (see FIG. 11-5). With such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest.

Further, when the background image of the effect display area is changed by a predetermined effect, a change effect (for example, a background image) that changes at least a part of the game-related information displayed in the information display area. A change in which the display mode such as the active display 130IW001 and the hold display 130IW002 (spherical display or belt conveyor display) of the information display area can be changed, or the mode of the robot arm 130IW005 can be changed. An effect executing means may be provided. With such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest.

Further, the predetermined effect executing means may cause the decorative display to be operated and displayed while the predetermined effect is being executed (for example, the robot arm 130IW005 is operated when the background image is changed). 5). With such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest.

Further, a hold storage means capable of storing information related to variable display as hold storage and a hold display means capable of displaying hold display corresponding to hold storage in the information display area are provided, and the hold display means is predetermined in the information display area. It is possible to shift the hold display together with the operation display of, and the predetermined effect executing means displays the decorative display as an operation display even when the shift display of the hold display is executed together with the predetermined operation display in the information display area. It may be possible. According to such a configuration, since the individual operation displays are executed in parallel, it is possible for the player to easily recognize that the hold shift has occurred.

1 ... Pachinko game machine 2 ... Game board 3 ... Game machine frame 4A, 4B ... Special symbol display device 5 ... Image display device 6A ... Winning ball device 6B ... Variable winning ball device 7 ... Special variable winning ball device 8L, 8R ... Speaker 9 ... Game effect lamp 10 ... General winning opening 11 ... Main board 12 ... Production control board 13 ... Voice control board 14 ... Lamp control board 15 ... Relay board 20 ... Ordinary symbol display 21 ... Gate switches 22A, 22B ... Starting port Switch 23 ... Count switch 30 ... Hitting ball operation handle 31A ... Stick controller 31B ... Push button 32 ... Movable body 100 ... Game control microcomputer 101, 121 ... ROM
102, 122 ... RAM
103 ... CPU
104, 124 ... Random number circuits 105, 125 ... I / O
120 ... CPU for production control
123… Display control unit

Claims (1)

It is a game machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player.
A special effect executing means for executing a special effect that repeats a predetermined mode a predetermined number of times,
A predetermined effect executing means capable of executing a predetermined effect during the execution of the special effect is provided.
When the predetermined effect is not executed by the predetermined effect executing means, the case where the predetermined mode is repeated a second time more than the first time is earlier than the case where the predetermined mode is repeated the first time as the special effect. The rate of being controlled in a favorable state is high ,
A case where the predetermined effect is executed by the predetermined effect executing means before the predetermined mode is repeated the first time, rather than a case where the predetermined effect is not executed by the predetermined effect executing means and the predetermined mode is repeated the second time. high proportion of people of is controlled before Symbol advantageous state,
The predetermined aspect is performed after the predetermined aspect is repeated the first number of times and before the predetermined effect is repeated the second number of times, as compared with the case where the predetermined effect is executed by the predetermined effect executing means by repeating the predetermined aspect the first number of times. When the predetermined effect is executed by the effect executing means, the ratio of being controlled to the advantageous state is higher.
further,
It is equipped with a specific display execution means that can execute a specific display that starts the display when the variable display starts and ends the display when the variable display ends.
The specific display execution means is
A specific display can be displayed in a manner that can suggest a variable display period.
A game characterized in that when a specific display is displayed in a mode capable of suggesting a variable display period, the mode of the specific display can be changed according to the degree of expectation controlled in the advantageous state. Machine.